在《小部》中显示巴利原文
Khuddakanikāye
《小义释》注释书显示巴利原文
Cūḷaniddesa-aṭṭhakathā
《彼岸道品》的义释显示巴利原文
Pārāyanavagganiddeso
一、阿逸多童子经义释的注释显示巴利原文
1. Ajitamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
《彼岸道品》第一《阿逸多经》的义释中:显示巴利原文
Pārāyanavaggassa paṭhame ajitasuttaniddese –
具寿阿逸多问:“世间被何所遮蔽?显示巴利原文
‘‘Kenassu nivuto loko, (iccāyasmā ajito,)
Kenassu nappakāsati; Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsi, kiṃsu tassa mahabbhaya’’nti. –
对于阿逸多童子所问的第一个问题及随后的问题,凡在义释中已明说与浅显之处,我们不再赘述,唯释其要义。其中,“被遮蔽”指被覆盖。“你说它的染著是什么?”意思是:你说什么是这个世间的染著?显示巴利原文
Ajitamāṇavassa pucchite paṭhamapañhe ca uparūparipañhe ca niddesesu ca vuttañca uttānañca vajjetvā visesameva vakkhāma. Tattha nivutoti paṭicchādito. Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsīti kiṃ assa lokassa abhilepanaṃ vadesi?
Āvuta(被包围):指被包围。Nivuta(被遮蔽):指被覆盖。Ovuta(从下覆盖):指从下方被覆盖。Pihita(从上方封闭):指从上方被遮盖。Paṭicchanna(隐覆):指未敞开。Paṭikujjita(覆藏):指面朝下被遮盖。显示巴利原文
Āvutoti āvarito. Nivutoti paṭicchādito. Ovutoti heṭṭhā paṭicchādito. Pihitoti uparibhāgena chādito. Paṭicchannoti avivaṭo. Paṭikujjitoti adhomukhaṃ chādito.
Nappakāsati(不照耀):指不照耀。Nappabhāsati(不发光):指不发出智慧的光明。Na tapati(不炽热):指不生起智慧的热力。Na virocati(不辉耀):指不产生智慧的光辉。Na ñāyati(不被知):指不被了知。Na paññāyati(不显现):指不显现。显示巴利原文
Nappakāsatīti nappakāso hoti. Nappabhāsatīti ñāṇappabhāsaṃ na karoti. Na tapatīti ñāṇatapaṃ na karoti. Na virocatīti ñāṇavirocanaṃ na karoti. Na ñāyatīti na jānīyati. Na paññāyatīti nappaññāyate.
“Kenalitto(被什么涂染)”:意为被什么所涂染。“Saṃlitto(被遍染)、upalitto(被涂抹)”:是通过加前缀扩展的词。“Ācikkhasi(你宣说)”:是以解说的方式说明。“Desesi(你开示)”:是以再解说的方式说明。“Paññapesi(你施设)”:是用种种方式施设。“Atthaṃ bodhento paṭṭhapesi(使了知义理而安立)”:是通过让人了知义理而确立。“Tassatthassa kāraṇaṃ dassento vivarasi(显示彼义之因由而开显)”:是通过展示那义理的原因而开显。“Byañjanabhāvaṃ dassento vibhajasi(显示文句之性质而分别)”:是通过显示文句的特性而分别。“Nikujjitabhāvaṃ gambhīrabhāvañca haritvā sotūnaṃ ñāṇassa patiṭṭhaṃ janayanto uttānīkarosi(去除隐蔽性和甚深性,为听众的智慧生起立足处而使之浅显)”:即除去其隐蔽性与甚深性,为听众的智慧建立立足处而使之变得浅显。显示巴利原文
Kenalittoti kena limpito. Saṃlitto upalittoti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Ācikkhasi niddesavasena. Desesi paṭiniddesavasena . Paññapesi tena tena pakārena. Atthaṃ bodhento paṭṭhapesi. Tassatthassa kāraṇaṃ dassento vivarasi. Byañjanabhāvaṃ dassento vibhajasi. Nikujjitabhāvaṃ gambhīrabhāvañca haritvā sotūnaṃ ñāṇassa patiṭṭhaṃ janayanto uttānīkarosi. Sabbehipi imehi ākārehi sotūnaṃ aññāṇandhakāraṃ vidhamento pakāsesīti evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo.
2 “Vevicchā pamādā nappakāsatī(由于悭吝和放逸而不照耀)”:由于悭吝之因与放逸之因,故不照耀。因为悭吝使他不能以布施等功德来照耀,放逸使他不能以持戒等来照耀。“Jappābhilepana(渴爱的染著)”:渴爱对此世间来说,就像猴胶对猴子的染著一样。“Dukkha(苦)”:指生等之苦。显示巴利原文
2.Vevicchā pamādā nappakāsatīti macchariyahetu ca pamādahetu ca nappakāsati. Macchariyaṃ hissa dānādīhi guṇehi pakāsituṃ na deti, pamādo sīlādīhi. Jappābhilepananti taṇhā assa lokassa makkaṭalepo viya makkaṭassa abhilepanaṃ. Dukkhanti jātiādikaṃ dukkhaṃ.
“Yesaṃ dhammānaṃ(那些法)”:指那些色等法。“Ādito samudāgamanaṃ paññāyati(从开始,集起被了知)”:意思是,首先,生起被了知。“Atthaṅgamato nirodho paññāyati(从灭没,灭被了知)”:意思是,从坏灭的角度,息灭被了知。“Kammasannissito vipāko(果依附于业)”:指善与不善之果,因为不离开业而转起,故称“果依附于业”。“Vipākasannissitaṃ kammaṃ(业依附于果)”:指善与不善之业,因为给予果机会而安立,故称“业依附于果”。“Nāmasannissitaṃ rūpaṃ(色依附于名)”:在五蕴有中,色不离名而转起,故称“色依附于名”。“Rūpasannissitaṃ nāmaṃ(名依附于色)”:在五蕴有中,名不离色而转起,故称“名依附于色”。显示巴利原文
Yesaṃ dhammānanti yesaṃ rūpādidhammānaṃ. Ādito samudāgamanaṃ paññāyatīti paṭhamato uppādo paññāyati. Atthaṅgamato nirodho paññāyatīti bhaṅgato nirujjhanaṃ paññāyati. Kammasannissito vipākoti kusalākusalavipāko kammaṃ amuñcitvā pavattanato kammasannissito vipākoti vuccati. Vipākasannissitaṃ kammanti kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ vipākassa okāsaṃ katvā ṭhitattā vipākasannissitaṃ kammanti vuccati. Nāmasannissitaṃ rūpanti pañcavokāre rūpaṃ nāmaṃ amuñcitvā pavattanato nāmasannissitaṃ rūpanti vuccati. Rūpasannissitaṃ nāmanti pañcavokāre nāmaṃ rūpaṃ amuñcitvā pavattanato rūpasannissitaṃ nāmanti vuccati.
3 “诸流一切处而流”:即在一切色等之处,渴爱等流在流动。“什么是遮止”:什么是这些流的阻碍,什么是保护?“请说防护”:请说那名为它们遮止的防护。通过这一问,是在问有剩余的断除。“以什么,诸流被关闭”:依什么法,这些流被关闭、被截断。通过这一问,是在问无剩余的断除。显示巴利原文
3.Savanti sabbadhi sotāti sabbesu rūpādiāyatanesu taṇhādikā sotā sandanti. Kiṃ nivāraṇanti tesaṃ kiṃ āvaraṇaṃ kā rakkhā. Saṃvaraṃ brūhīti taṃ tesaṃ nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūhi. Etena sāvasesappahānaṃ pucchati. Kena sotā pidhīyareti kena dhammena ete sotā pidhīyanti pacchijjanti. Etena anavasesappahānaṃ pucchati.
“流动”:即生起。“流向”:即成为向下方向而流动。“漂流”:即无间断地向前漂流、转起。“转起”:即一再地转起。显示巴利原文
Savantīti uppajjanti. Āsavantīti adhogāmino hutvā savanti. Sandantīti nirantaragāmino hutvā sandamānā pavattanti. Pavattantīti punappunaṃ vattanti.
4 “念是它们的遮止”:与观相应、寻求善法与不善法趣向的念,即是这些流的遮止。“我说诸流的防护”:我所说的诸流之防护,即是指念——这是其中的含义。“以慧这些被关闭”:而通过通达色等事物的无常等特性所成就的道慧,则能将这些流完全关闭。显示巴利原文
4.Satitesaṃ nivāraṇanti vipassanāyuttā kusalākusaladhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesamānā sati tesaṃ sotānaṃ nivāraṇaṃ . Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmīti tamevāhaṃ satiṃ sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmīti adhippāyo. Paññāyete pidhīyareti rūpādīsu pana aniccatādipaṭivedhasādhikāya maggapaññāya ete sotā sabbaso pidhīyanti.
“Pacchijjantīti(被截断)”:意为被斩断。“Samudayañca(及集)”:意为及缘。“Atthaṅgamañca(及灭)”:指已生起者归于不存在,或未生起者不令生起。“Assādañca(及味)”:意为及功德。“Ādīnavañca(及过患)”:意为及过失。“Nissaraṇañca(及出离)”:意为及出离。显示巴利原文
Pacchijjantīti ucchijjanti. Samudayañcāti paccayañca. Atthaṅgamañcāti uppannānaṃ abhāvagamanañca, anuppannānaṃ anuppādaṃ vā. Assādañcāti ānisaṃsañca. Ādīnavañcāti dosañca. Nissaraṇañcāti nikkhamanañca.
5 “Paññā ceva(那慧以及)”:在提问的偈颂中,“您所说的慧、念,以及其余的名色,这一切在何处灭尽?我这样问您,请您宣说”——应如此理解其略义。显示巴利原文
5.Paññā cevāti pañhāgāthāya yā cāyaṃ tayā vuttā paññā, yā ca sati, yañca tadavasesaṃ nāmarūpaṃ, etaṃ sabbampi kattha nirujjhati. Etaṃ me pañhaṃ puṭṭho pabrūhīti evaṃ saṅkhepattho veditabbo.
“Katthetaṃ uparujjhati(这在何处灭?)”:意为名色在何处不再存在。“Vūpasammati(寂止)”:意为熄灭。“Atthaṃ gacchati(去至没)”:意为归于不存在。“Paṭippassambhati(止息)”:意为平息、止息。显示巴利原文
Katthetaṃ uparujjhatīti etaṃ nāmarūpaṃ kattha na bhavati. Vūpasammatīti nibbāti. Atthaṃ gacchatīti abhāvaṃ gacchati. Paṭippassambhatīti sannisīdati.
6 在解答的偈颂中,由于仅以名称便已全部被包含,所以没有单独宣说五十种烦恼。此处简略的含义是:阿逸多,你问我“这个在何处灭尽?”我这样告诉你——在名与色毫无剩余灭尽之处。因为随着每一种识的灭尽,名色便在那儿刹那顿灭;正是由于识的灭尽,名色才灭尽;识灭故,种种名色亦随之灭。此理决定不变、不可逾越,这便是所说的意思。显示巴利原文
6. Vissajjanagāthāya panassa yasmā paññāsatiyo nāmeneva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, tasmā tā visuṃ na vuttā. Ayamettha saṅkhepattho – yaṃ maṃ tvaṃ, ajita, etaṃ pañhaṃ apucchi – ‘‘katthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti, tadetaṃ yattha nāmañca rūpañca asesaṃ uparujjhati, taṃ te vadāmi. Tassa tassa hi viññāṇassa nirodhena saheva apubbaṃ acarimaṃ etthetaṃ uparujjhati, ettheva viññāṇanirodhena nirujjhati etaṃ, viññāṇanirodhā tassa tassa nirodho hoti, taṃ nātivattatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“以入流道智令行作识灭”:与入流道相应的智慧,以令善与不善心中那些与思相应之心,不再有能力生起的方式而达到灭尽。其中有两种灭:非执受灭和执受灭。由入流道,与见相应的四种心及与疑相应的一种心——这五种心灭去。这些心本身也能产生色法。其所产生的色属于非执受的色蕴;那些心是识蕴;与它们相应的受、想、行则是三种无色蕴(名蕴)。假如入流者的入流道未被修习,那么这五种心还可能在六种所缘上现起;然而,入流道会阻止它们现起和产生,如同拆除桥梁一般,使它们再也不能生起,这称为非执受灭。由一来道,与见不相应的四种心以及两种与忧相应的心——由于粗的欲贪和嗔恚之力,这六种心灭去。由不来道,由于微细的欲贪和嗔恚之力,同样这六种心灭去。由阿拉汉道,与见不相应的四种心以及一种与掉举相应的心——这五种不善心灭去。如果那些圣者的那些道未被修习,这些心也会在六种所缘上现起;但是那些道会阻止它们现起和生起,如同拆除桥梁一般,使它们再也没有能力生起,这称为非执受灭。应当这样来理解非执受灭。显示巴利原文
Sotāpattimaggañāṇena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa nirodhenāti sotāpattimaggasampayuttapaññāya kusalākusalacetanāsampayuttacittassa abhabbuppattikavasena nirujjhanena. Tattha duvidho nirodho anupādinnakanirodho upādinnakanirodhoti. Sotāpattimaggena hi cattāri diṭṭhisampayuttāni vicikicchāsahagatanti pañca cittāni nirujjhanti, tāni rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpenti . Taṃ anupādinnakarūpakkhandho , tāni cittāni viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsampayuttā vedanā saññā saṅkhārā tayo arūpakkhandhā. Tattha sace sotāpannassa sotāpattimaggo abhāvito abhavissā, tāni pañca cittāni chasu ārammaṇesu pariyuṭṭhānaṃ pāpuṇeyyuṃ. Sotāpattimaggo pana nesaṃ pariyuṭṭhānuppattiṃ vārayamāno setusamugghātaṃ abhabbuppattikabhāvaṃ kurumāno anupādinnakaṃ nirodheti nāma. Sakadāgāmimaggena cattāri diṭṭhivippayuttāni dve domanassasahagatānīti oḷārikakāmarāgabyāpādavasena cha cittāni nirujjhanti. Anāgāmimaggena aṇusahagatakāmarāgabyāpādavasena tāni eva cha cittāni nirujjhanti. Arahattamaggena cattāri diṭṭhivippayuttāni uddhaccasahagatañcāti pañca akusalacittāni nirujjhanti. Tattha sace tesaṃ ariyānaṃ te maggā abhāvitā assu, tāni cittāni chasu ārammaṇesu pariyuṭṭhānaṃ pāpuṇeyyuṃ. Te pana tesaṃ maggā pariyuṭṭhānuppattiṃ vārayamānā setusamugghātaṃ abhabbuppattikabhāvaṃ kurumānā anupādinnakaṃ nirodhenti nāma. Evaṃ anupādinnakanirodho veditabbo.
然而,假如入流者的入流道未被修习,那么除了七次生命(七有)之外,在没有起点的轮回流转中,被执取的五蕴相续还会继续转起。为什么呢?因为其转起的因缘犹在。然而,入流道在生起时,便将这三结——见随眠与疑随眠,亦即这五种烦恼彻底断除。既然如此,除了七有之外,入流者如何还会在没有起点的轮回流转中产生执取蕴的相续呢?因此,入流道使执取蕴的相续不再转起,这就称为执受灭。显示巴利原文
Sace pana sotāpannassa sotāpattimaggo abhāvito abhavissā, ṭhapetvā satta bhave anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe upādinnakakkhandhappavattaṃ pavatteyya. Kasmā? Tassa pavattiyā hetūnaṃ atthitāya. Tīṇi saṃyojanāni diṭṭhānusayo vicikicchānusayoti ime pana pañca kilese so maggo uppajjamānova samugghāteti. Idāni kuto sotāpannassa satta bhave ṭhapetvā anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe upādinnakappavattaṃ pavattissati. Evaṃ sotāpattimaggo upādinnakappavattaṃ appavattaṃ kurumāno upādinnakaṃ nirodheti nāma.
若一来者的一来道尚未修习圆满,那么除“二有”(两次流转)之外,在“五有”中,执取所生的生命相续仍会继续运转。何以故?因为令彼相续运转的因还在。然而,一来道于生起之时,即把粗分的“欲贪结”与“嗔结”,以及粗分的“欲贪随眠”与“嗔随眠”——此四种烦恼,一并根除。如此,一来者除“二有”外,如何还会于“五有”中生起执取所生的相续?是故,一来道令执取所生的相续不再运转,即名为“执取灭”。显示巴利原文
Sace sakadāgāmissa sakadāgāmimaggo abhāvito abhavissā, ṭhapetvā dve bhave pañcasu bhavesu upādinnakappavattaṃ pavatteyya. Kasmā? Tassa pavattiyā hetūnaṃ atthitāya. Oḷārikāni kāmarāgapaṭighasaṃyojanāni oḷāriko kāmarāgānusayo paṭighānusayoti ime pana cattāro kilese so maggo uppajjamānova samugghāteti. Idāni kuto sakadāgāmissa dve bhave ṭhapetvā pañcasu bhavesu upādinnakappavattaṃ pavattissati . Evaṃ sakadāgāmimaggo upādinnakappavattaṃ appavattaṃ kurumāno upādinnakaṃ nirodheti nāma.
若不来者的不来道尚未修习圆满,那么除一个“有”之外,在第二个“有”中,执取所生的生命相续仍会继续运转。何以故?因为令彼相续运转的因还在。然而,不来道于生起之时,即把与微细俱行的“欲贪结”与“嗔结”,以及与微细俱行的“欲贪随眠”与“嗔随眠”——此四种烦恼,一并根除。如此,不来者除一个“有”外,如何还会于第二个“有”中生起执取所生的相续?是故,不来道令执取所生的相续不再运转,即名为“执取灭”。显示巴利原文
Sace anāgāmissa anāgāmimaggo abhāvito abhavissā, ṭhapetvā ekaṃ bhavaṃ dutiyabhave upādinnakappavattaṃ pavatteyya. Kasmā? Tassa pavattiyā hetūnaṃ atthitāya. Aṇusahagatāni kāmarāgapaṭighasaññojanāni aṇusahagato kāmarāgānusayo paṭighānusayoti ime pana cattāro kilese so maggo uppajjamānova samugghāteti. Idāni kuto anāgāmissa ekaṃ bhavaṃ ṭhapetvā dutiyabhave upādinnakappavattaṃ pavattissati. Evaṃ anāgāmimaggo upādinnakappavattaṃ appavattaṃ kurumāno upādinnakaṃ nirodheti nāma.
若阿拉汉的阿拉汉道尚未修习圆满,那么在“色有”与“无色有”中,执取所生的生命相续仍会继续运转。何以故?因为令彼相续运转的因还在。然而,阿拉汉道于生起之时,即把“色贪”、“无色贪”、“慢”、“掉举”、“无明”,以及“慢随眠”、“有贪随眠”、“无明随眠”——此八种烦恼,一并根除。如此,诸漏尽者如何还会于“后有”中生起执取所生的相续?是故,阿拉汉道令执取所生的相续不再运转,即名为“执取灭”。显示巴利原文
Sace arahato arahattamaggo abhāvito abhavissā, rūpārūpabhavesu upādinnakappavattaṃ pavatteyya. Kasmā? Tassa pavattiyā hetūnaṃ atthitāya. Rūparāgo arūparāgo māno uddhaccaṃ avijjā mānānusayo bhavarāgānusayo avijjānusayoti ime pana aṭṭha kilese so maggo uppajjamānova samugghāteti. Idāni kuto khīṇāsavassa punabbhave upādinnakappavattaṃ pavattissati? Evaṃ arahattamaggo upādinnakappavattaṃ appavattaṃ kurumāno upādinnakaṃ nirodheti nāma.
其中,入流道灭尽恶趣有;一来道灭尽部分善趣欲有;不还道灭尽欲有;阿拉汉道灭尽色有与无色有,亦即灭尽一切有。论师们如此说。应如此了知执取灭。显示巴利原文
Sotāpattimaggo cettha apāyabhavaṃ nirodheti. Sakadāgāmimaggo sugatikāmabhavekadesaṃ. Anāgāmimaggo kāmabhavaṃ. Arahattamaggo rūpārūpabhavaṃ, sabbabhavepi nirodheti evāti vadanti. Evaṃ upādinnakanirodho veditabbo.
其中,以“行作识灭尽”一语显示非执取灭;而以“可能生起的名色,即于此灭尽”一语显示执取灭。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa nirodhenā’’ti etena anupādinnakanirodhaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ye uppajjeyyuṃ nāmañca rūpañca, etthete nirujjhantī’’ti iminā pana upādinnakanirodhaṃ dasseti.
其中,“除去七有”的意思是:对于从欲有流转到欲有的众生,除去七有。在那无始的轮回中——显示巴利原文
Tattha satta bhave ṭhapetvāti kāmabhavato kāmabhavaṃ saṃsarantassa satta bhave vajjetvā. Anamatagge saṃsāreti –
诸蕴次第流转,诸界与诸处次第流转,
如此持续不断、无有间断地运转着,便称之为‘轮回’。(《清净道论》2.619;《法集论注·序论》;《增支部注》2.4.199;《无碍解道注》2.1.117;《如是语注》14, 58;《优陀那注》39)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, ‘saṃsāro’ti pavuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.619; dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.117; itivu. aṭṭha. 14, 58; udā. aṭṭha. 39) –
如此描述了轮回的流转之后,再说明‘那些会生起的,名与色’:‘名’是指具有倾向性特相的四蕴,‘色’是指具有变坏性特相的大种与所造色——这些法会生起。‘在此处它们灭尽’:即在此预流道中,这些名色法由于不再可能生起而灭尽。所谓‘以一来道智’:在此处,由于结生,只来此世间一次,故称‘一来者’;一来者的道即是一来道,与此道相应的智即是一来道智。‘除二有’:指就欲界的结生而言,除去两个有。‘于五有中’:指在其余的五有当中。‘在此处它们灭尽’:即在此一来道中,这些法按前述方式而灭尽。所谓‘除一有’:就最高的类型而言,指除去色界或无色界中的一个有。‘于色界或无色界中’:指在第二个有中的色界与无色界。‘名与色’:在此处,于色有中有名与色,于无色有中唯有名。‘在此处它们灭尽’:即在此不还道中,这些名色法按前述方式而灭尽。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vaṇṇite saṃsāravaṭṭe. Ye uppajjeyyuṃ nāmañca rūpañcāti namanalakkhaṇaṃ catukkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ nāmañca ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ bhūtopādāyasaṅkhātaṃ rūpañca ete dhammā uppajjeyyuṃ. Etthete nirujjhantīti etasmiṃ sotāpattimagge ete nāmarūpadhammā abhabbuppattikavasena nirodhaṃ gacchanti. Sakadāgāmimaggañāṇenāti ettha paṭisandhivasena sakiṃyeva imaṃ lokaṃ āgacchatīti sakadāgāmī , tassa maggo sakadāgāmimaggo. Tena maggena sampayuttañāṇena. Dve bhave ṭhapetvāti kāmadhātuyāyeva paṭisandhivasena dve bhave vajjetvā. Pañcasu bhavesūti tadavasiṭṭhesu pañcasu bhavesu. Etthete nirujjhantīti ettha sakadāgāmimagge ete dhammā vuttanayena nirujjhanti. Ekaṃ bhavaṃ ṭhapetvāti ukkaṭṭhavasena rūpadhātuyā vā arūpadhātuyā vā ekaṃ bhavaṃ vajjetvā. Rūpadhātuyā vā arūpadhātuyā vāti dutiyakabhave rūpadhātuyā ceva arūpadhātuyā ca. Nāmañca rūpañcāti ettha rūpabhave nāmarūpaṃ, arūpabhave nāmameva. Etthete nirujjhantīti ettha anāgāmimagge ete nāmarūpadhammā vuttanayena nirujjhanti.
「阿拉汉」:因远离烦恼而得“阿拉汉”之名,即指诸漏尽者。「以无余涅槃界」:涅槃界有二种,即有余涅槃界与无余涅槃界。其中,被执取为“我、我所”而牢牢执著者,称为「取」,这是五蕴的别名。取本身即是残余,故称「有余」;与有余共存,即称「有余涅槃」。此处已无取的残余,故称「无余」。以这样的无余涅槃界。「般涅槃者」:犹如无燃料之火般熄灭,进入不再转起的状态。「最后识灭尽」:此处是依出入息的灭尽而说“最后”。最后有三种:有最后、禅那最后、死最后。在诸有中,出入息仅于欲有中转起,于色有、无色有不转起,故彼为「有最后」。在诸禅那中,出入息唯在前三禅中转起,于第四禅不转起,故彼为「禅那最后」。而于死心之前与第十六心俱生的出入息,与死心一同灭尽,则称「死最后」。这里所说的「最后」,正指此而言。因为一切佛、独觉佛或圣弟子,乃至蝼蚁,皆依有分心——即无记的苦谛——而命终。因此,「最后识灭尽」即指死心的灭尽。显示巴利原文
Arahatoti kilesehi ārakattā ‘‘arahā’’ti laddhanāmassa khīṇāsavassa. Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāti duvidhā hi nibbānadhātu saupādisesā ca anupādisesā ca. Tattha upādīyati ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti bhusaṃ gaṇhīyatīti upādi, khandhapañcakassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Upādiyeva seso avasiṭṭho upādiseso, saha upādisesena vattatīti saupādisesā. Natthettha upādisesoti anupādisesā. Tāya anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā. Parinibbāyantassāti nirindhanassa viya jātavedassa nibbāyantassa appavattaṃ pavisantassa. Carimaviññāṇassa nirodhenāti ettha assāsapassāsānaṃ nirodhavasena. Tayo carimā bhavacarimo jhānacarimo cuticarimoti. Bhavesu hi kāmabhave assāsapassāsā pavattanti, rūpārūpabhavesu nappavattanti. Tasmā so bhavacarimo. Jhānesu purimajhānattayeva pavattanti, catutthe nappavattanti. Tasmā so jhānacarimo. Ye pana cuticittassa purato soḷasamena cittena sahuppannā, te cuticittena saha nirujjhanti. So cuticarimo nāma. Ayaṃ idha carimoti adhippeto. Ye hi keci buddhā vā paccekabuddhā vā ariyasāvakā vā antamaso kunthakipillikaṃ upādāya sabbe bhavaṅgacitteneva abyākatena dukkhasaccena kālaṃ karonti. Tasmā carimaviññāṇassa nirodhenāti cuticittassa nirodhenāti attho.
「慧、念与名」:由此可知,这是指四无色蕴。「色」:由此可知,这是指四大种与二十四种所造色。今为显示其灭尽之方式,故说「由识灭尽,此处于此灭尽」。在此,「识」指最后识,亦指行作识。由行作识的断除与灭尽,此处于此灭尽——犹如灯焰熄灭,归于不可施设的状态;而最后识则因无有生起之缘,以无生灭尽的方式,依无生而灭尽。显示巴利原文
Paññāca sati ca nāmañcāti etehi catunnaṃ arūpakkhandhānaṃ gahaṇaṃ paccetabbaṃ. Rūpañcāti etena catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ catuvīsatiupādārūpānañca gahaṇaṃ paccetabbaṃ. Idāni tassa nirujjhanūpāyaṃ dassento ‘‘viññāṇassa nirodhena, etthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti āha. Tattha viññāṇanti carimaviññāṇampi abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇampi. Abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa pahīnanirodhena etthetaṃ uparujjhati nirujjhati dīpasikhā viya apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ yāti, carimaviññāṇassa anuppādapaccayattā anuppādanirodhena anuppādavaseneva uparujjhatīti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.499).
7 至此,以「对他而言,这苦难是大怖畏」一句,宣说了苦谛;以「诸流」一句,宣说了集谛;以「以慧,这些得以覆藏」一句,宣说了道谛;以「无余灭尽」一句,宣说了灭谛。如此,有人虽闻四谛,却尚未证得圣位,为了再次请问有学与无学的行道,而说出「有学等诸了知法者」之偈。在此,「了知法者」是指以无常等方式审察法的人,这是阿拉汉的别名。「有学」是指正在修习戒等的其余圣者。「众多」是指许多众生。「请为我宣说他们那些明智者的行仪」:意思是,我为这些有学与无学者请问,您这位明智的智者,请告诉我他们的行道。显示巴利原文
7. Ettāvatā ca ‘‘dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti iminā pakāsitaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, ‘‘yāni sotānī’’ti iminā samudayasaccaṃ, ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti iminā maggasaccaṃ, ‘‘asesaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti iminā nirodhasaccanti evaṃ cattāri saccāni sutvāpi ariyabhūmiṃ anadhigato puna sekkhāsekkhapaṭipadaṃ pucchanto ‘‘ye ca saṅkhātadhammāse’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha saṅkhātadhammāti aniccādivasena parivīmaṃsitadhammā, arahantānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sekkhāti sīlādīni sikkhamānā avasesā ariyapuggalā. Puthūti bahū sattajanā. Tesaṃ me nipako iriyaṃ puṭṭho pabrūhīti tesaṃ me sekkhāsekkhānaṃ nipako paṇḍito tvaṃ puṭṭho paṭipattiṃ brūhīti.
「他们的蕴已被宣说」:是说将他们的五蕴说明为无结生,或以总结的方式安立。对于界等其他诸法,也是如此。「行仪」指努力、用功。「行为」指造作、行动。「所说」指流转、状况。「修习」指实践、修行。「行境」指所缘、依处。「住」指威仪路之运作。「行道」指观照。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ khandhā saṅkhātāti tesaṃ pañcakkhandhā appaṭisandhikaṃ katvā desitā, saṅkhepaṃ katvā ṭhapitā vā. Dhātuādīsupi eseva nayo. Iriyanti payogaṃ. Cariyanti kiriyaṃ. Vuttinti pavattiṃ. Ācaranti caraṇaṃ. Gocaranti paccayaṃ. Vihāranti iriyāpathapavattanaṃ. Paṭipadanti vipassanaṃ.
8 那时,世尊因有学者必须断除以欲贪盖为首的一切烦恼,故以「于诸欲」等半偈开示有学行道。其意为:对于所依事欲,不应以烦恼欲贪求;应舍离身恶行等令心浑浊之法,使心无浊。又因无学者以无常等观,已如实衡量一切行等,故于一切法善巧;以身随观念住等保持正念;由于身见等已断,故成就比丘身份;于一切威仪中游行。是故世尊以「善巧者」等半偈开示无学行道。显示巴利原文
8. Athassa bhagavā yasmā sekkhena kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbakilesā pahātabbā eva, tasmā ‘‘kāmesūti upaḍḍhagāthāya sekkhapaṭipadaṃ dasseti. Tassattho – vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena nābhigijjheyya, kāyaduccaritādayo ca manaso āvilabhāvakare dhamme pajahanto manasānāvilo siyāti. Yasmā pana asekkho aniccādivasena sabbasaṅkhārādīnaṃ paritulitattā kusalo sabbadhammesu kāyānupassanāsatiādīhi ca sato sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīnaṃ bhinnattā bhikkhubhāvaṃ patto hutvā sabbairiyāpathesu paribbajati, tasmā ‘‘kusalo’’ti upaḍḍhagāthāya asekkhapaṭipadaṃ dasseti.
「不应贪求」:即不陷于贪染。「不应贪著」:即不陷于贪。「不应缠缚」:即不因贪而黏着不舍。显示巴利原文
Nābhigijjheyyāti gedhaṃ nāpajjeyya. Na paligijjheyyāti lobhaṃ nāpajjeyya. Na palibundheyyāti lobhavasena na allīyeyya.
“应断除令心浑浊的烦恼”:指应断除那些能使心摇动、名为带来逼恼的烦恼。显示巴利原文
Āvilakare kilese jaheyyāti cittāluḷakare upatāpasaṅkhāte kilese jaheyya.
“一切法无我”:此句是涵盖涅槃在内而说的。“凡是集起之法”:即任何具有因缘而生起之性质者。显示巴利原文
Sabbe dhammā anattāti nibbānaṃ antokaritvā vuttaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammanti yaṃ kiñci sappaccayasabhāvaṃ.
“与偈颂一同结束”:即于偈颂结束的同时。“那些与婆罗门同一欲愿者”:指那些与阿耆多学童以善妙欲愿而同一意乐的人。“同一精勤”:以身、语、意精勤而同一精勤。“同一意图”:指他们共一意图、共一喜好,故称同一意图,即同一喜好。“同宿一室而住”:指在往昔诸佛的教法中,与他一同修习、熏修的人。“无数众生千”:指无数称为天、人的数以千计的众生。“离尘离垢”:已远离贪欲等尘垢、已远离贪欲等染污。显示巴利原文
Saha gāthāpariyosānāti gāthāvasāneneva saddhiṃ. Yete brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ ekacchandāti ye ete ajitamāṇavena kalyāṇachandena ekajjhāsayā. Ekappayogāti kāyavacīmanopayogehi ekappayogā. Ekādhippāyāti eko adhippāyo ruci etesanti ekādhippāyā, ekarucikāti attho. Ekavāsanavāsitāti atītabuddhasāsane tena saddhiṃ bhāvitabhāvanā. Anekapāṇasahassānanti anekesaṃ devamanussasaṅkhātānaṃ pāṇasahassānaṃ. Virajaṃ vītamalanti rāgādirajavirahitaṃ rāgādimalavirahitañca.
「法眼」:此处指预流道;于其它处则指前三道。为示法眼生起之因,世尊开示:“凡集起之法,皆归于灭尽。”因为此道以涅槃为所缘,在如此通达一切行法的作用中而生起。那位婆罗门“无取著而从诸漏心解脱”:这是指阿耆多婆罗门与他的一千位童子,在道刹那,心不执取渴爱等,正从欲漏等烦恼中解脱;于果刹那,心便彻底解脱。所谓“与证得阿拉汉果同时”,即当他们证得阿拉汉果时,尊者阿耆多及其千名童子的鹿皮衣、发髻、树皮衣、三杖、水壶等外相一并消失,全部化作手持神通所化钵衣、头发仅二指长的“善来比丘”,合掌礼敬世尊而坐。然而,圣典中仅明示了阿耆多长老一人。此处“随义行道”:指自己期许并已获得的行道,即是已达涅槃的境界。其余各处之义皆明显可解。世尊即以此证得阿拉汉果为顶极,结束了本次说法。显示巴利原文
Dhammacakkhunti idha sotāpattimaggo adhippeto. Aññattha heṭṭhāmaggattayaṃ. Tassa uppattikāraṇadassanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti āha. Tañhi nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena evaṃ sabbasaṅkhataṃ paṭivijjhantaṃ uppajjati. Tassa brāhmaṇassa anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccīti tassa ca ajitabrāhmaṇassa antevāsikasahassānañca taṇhādīhi aggahetvā kāmāsavādīhi maggakkhaṇe cittaṃ vimuccamānaṃ phalakkhaṇe vimucci. Saha arahattappattāti arahattappattiyā ca saheva āyasmato ajitassa ca antevāsikasahassassa ca ajinajaṭāvākacīratidaṇḍakamaṇḍaluādayo antaradhāyiṃsu. Sabbeva iddhimayapattacīvaradharā dvaṅgulakesā ehibhikkhū hutvā bhagavantaṃ namassamānā pañjalikā nisīdiṃsu. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ajitattherova paññāyati. Tattha anvatthapaṭipattiyāti sayaṃ paccāsīsitaladdhapaṭipattiyā, nibbānaladdhabhāvenāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva. Evaṃ bhagavā arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti.
二、提舍弥勒学童经义释的注释显示巴利原文
2. Tissametteyyamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
9 第二部提舍弥勒经的义释中——当《阿耆多经》里“嗔怒与满足”等教示结束后,摩伽罗阇便开始发问:“一个人应如何观察世间,死王才不会看见他?”世尊知道“他的根器尚未成熟”,便止住他说:“摩伽罗阇,且稍待,让别人来问吧。”于是,提舍弥勒为了提出自己的疑惑,便说出「嗔怒」等偈颂。此处,「嗔怒与满足」:是指谁在此世间作为有情而心满意足。「动摇」:指渴爱与邪见的种种波动。「遍知两端」:指完全了知两个极端之后。「以慧不染著」:指以智慧而不被染污。显示巴利原文
9. Dutiye tissametteyyasuttaniddese – kodha santusitoti niṭṭhite pana ajitasutte ‘‘kathaṃ lokaṃ avekkhantaṃ, maccurājā na passatī’’ti (su. ni. 1124; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchā 143) evaṃ mogharājā pucchituṃ ārabhi. ‘‘Na tāvassa indriyāni paripākaṃ gatānī’’ti ñatvā bhagavā ‘‘tiṭṭha tvaṃ, mogharāja, añño pucchatū’’ti paṭikkhipi. Tato tissametteyyo attano saṃsayaṃ pucchanto ‘‘kodhāti gāthamāha. Tattha kodha santusitoti ko idha satto tuṭṭho. Iñjitāti taṇhādiṭṭhivipphanditāni. Ubhantamabhiññāyāti ubho ante abhijānitvā. Mantā na lippatīti paññāya na lippati.
「思惟具足」:以出离等寻思而令思惟圆满,由此心中所愿皆得成办。显示巴利原文
Paripuṇṇasaṅkappoti nekkhammādivitakkehi paripuṇṇasaṅkappattā paripuṇṇamanoratho.
「爱所动」(taṇhiñjita):指被贪爱所动摇。于「见所动」等,同理可知。「欲所动」(kāmiñjita):指被烦恼欲所动摇、所颤动。另有「业所动」的异读,但此说并不妥当。显示巴利原文
Taṇhiñjitanti taṇhāya calitaṃ. Diṭṭhiñjitādīsupi eseva nayo. Kāmiñjitanti kilesakāmehi iñjitaṃ phanditaṃ. ‘‘Kammiñjita’’ntipi pāṭho, taṃ na sundaraṃ.
「大人」(mahanto puriso):大士。「最上人」(uttamo puriso):至上士。「上首人」(padhāno puriso):最胜士。「不低下的人」(alāmako puriso):殊胜士。「长者人」(jeṭṭhako puriso):首要士。「非低下之人」(na heṭṭhimako puriso):无上士。「达到人中之顶者」(purisānaṃ koṭippatto puriso):上首士。「一切人所欲求者」(sabbesaṃ icchito puriso):最优秀士。显示巴利原文
Mahanto purisoti mahāpuriso. Uttamo purisoti aggapuriso. Padhāno purisoti seṭṭhapuriso. Alāmako purisoti visiṭṭhapuriso. Jeṭṭhako purisoti pāmokkhapuriso. Na heṭṭhimako purisoti uttamapuriso. Purisānaṃ koṭippatto purisoti padhānapuriso. Sabbesaṃ icchito purisoti pavarapuriso.
「超越缝线」(sibbinimaccagā):指已超越渴爱,逾越而安住。「极超越」(upaccagā):指完全超越。显示巴利原文
Sibbinimaccagāti taṇhaṃ atiagā, atikkamitvā ṭhito. Upaccagāti bhusaṃ atiagā.
10 世尊为阐明此义,而宣说了“于诸欲中”等两首偈颂。其中,“于诸欲中修梵行者”:指以欲为缘而修梵行的人,也就是见到欲的过患后,具足道梵行的人。由此说明了知足的状态。而“离渴爱者”等句则显示了不动性。其中,“思择而寂灭者”:指以无常等方式思择诸法后,灭除贪等而寂灭的人。显示巴利原文
10. Tassetamatthaṃ bhagavā byākaronto ‘‘kāmesū’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha kāmesu brahmacariyavāti kāmanimittaṃ brahmacariyavā, kāmesu ādīnavaṃ disvā maggabrahmacariyena samannāgatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettāvatā santusitataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vītataṇho’’tiādīhi aniñjitataṃ. Tattha saṅkhāya nibbutoti aniccādivasena dhamme vīmaṃsitvā rāgādinibbānena nibbuto.
“入非法”:指与低劣法结合。“远离”:指远离后而乐住。“离”:指离开那些后而乐住。“退还离”:指退还后离开那些而乐住。“离”:指破坏怨敌。“不造作”:指断除造作。“不造”:指限定不造作。“不犯”:指不到达犯戒的状态。“不越界”:指不越过界限。其余各处,因已在前说明,故易于理解。显示巴利原文
Asaddhammasamāpattiyāti nīcadhammasamāyogato. Āratīti ārakā ramanaṃ. Viratīti tāya vinā ramanaṃ. Paṭiviratīti paṭinivattitvā tāya vinā ramanaṃ. Veramaṇīti veravināsanaṃ. Akiriyāti kiriyāpacchindanaṃ. Akaraṇanti karaṇaparicchindanaṃ. Anajjhāpattīti anāpajjanatā. Velāanatikkamoti sīmāanatikkamo. Sesaṃ tattha tattha vuttanayattā pākaṭameva.
同样地,世尊也以阿拉汉果为顶点的教法开示了这部经。开示结束时,这位婆罗门与一千位学童一同安住于阿拉汉果,另有数千人获得了法眼。其余内容如前所述。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi. Desanāpariyosāne ayampi brāhmaṇo arahatte patiṭṭhāsi saddhiṃ antevāsikasahassena, aññesañca anekasahassānaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādi. Sesaṃ pubbasadisameva.
3. 《布那迦学童所问经义释注》显示巴利原文
3. Puṇṇakamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
12 12. 在第三篇《布那迦经义释》中,「无贪欲」一词也是依前述方式,在拒绝摩伽罗阇之后所说。其中,「见根者」指见不善根等之人。「仙人」指称为仙人的结发修行者。「祭祀」指应施之物。「准备」指寻求。显示巴利原文
12. Tatiye puṇṇakasuttaniddese – anejanti idampi purimanayeneva mogharājānaṃ paṭikkhipitvā vuttaṃ. Tattha mūladassāvinti akusalamūlādidassāviṃ. Isayoti isināmakā jaṭilā. Yaññanti deyyadhammaṃ. Akappayiṃsūti pariyesiṃsu.
「见因者」等,这一切都是原因的同义词。因为,原因为了自果而施为、运转,故称之为「因」。因为,原因将那个果安置、给予,如同说「喂,拿去吧!」一般,故称之为「起因」。「见集起者」等五词,如前所述之法解释。因为,依它而来、运转,而那个果从中集起、生起,故称之为「缘」和「集起」。显示巴利原文
Hetudassāvītiādīni sabbāni kāraṇavevacanāneva. Kāraṇañhi yasmā attano phalatthāya hinoti pavattati, tasmā hetūti vuccati. Yasmā taṃ phalaṃ nideti ‘handa, gaṇhatha na’nti appeti viya, tasmā nidānanti vuccati. Sambhavadassāvītiādīni pañca padāni heṭṭhā dassitanayāni eva. Yasmā taṃ paṭicca eti pavattati, tañca phalaṃ tato samudeti uppajjati, tasmā paccayoti ca samudayoti ca vuccati.
又,所谓「或任何其他的善趣」,应知是指已脱离四恶趣的众生,如北方母亲等少威德者、贫穷困苦之人,衣食难得,为苦所逼。而「或任何其他的恶趣」,则指如阎魔王、龙、金翅鸟、有大神力的饿鬼等。「为了获得有身」,即为了在三处以结生而获得有身。「知」,是以一切知智了知;「见」,是以周遍眼见。显示巴利原文
Yā vā panaññāpi kāci sugatiyoti catuapāyavinimuttakā uttaramātādayo appesakkhā kapaṇamanussā ca dullabhaghāsacchādanā dukkhapīḷitā veditabbā. Yā vā panaññāpi kāci duggatiyoti yamarājanāgasupaṇṇapetamahiddhikādayo paccetabbā. Attabhāvābhinibbattiyāti tīsu ṭhānesu paṭisandhivasena attabhāvapaṭilābhatthāya. Jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇena jānāti. Passatīti samantacakkhunā passati.
「不善」指从不善巧所生。「亲近不善者」指属于不善分的。「住于不善品者」指属于不善品类的。这一切都「以无明为根」,即以无明为根本原因。「归入无明」指正确地归入、进入无明,即归入无明。「以无明之断除」指通过阿拉汉道断除无明时。「这一切都走向断除」指前面所说的那些不善法,它们全都达到被断除的状态。显示巴利原文
Akusalāti akosallasambhūtā. Akusalaṃ bhajantīti akusalabhāgiyā. Akusalapakkhe bhavāti akusalapakkhikā. Sabbe te avijjā mūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ etesanti avijjāmūlakā. Avijjāya samosaranti sammā osaranti gacchantīti avijjāsamosaraṇā. Avijjāsamugghātāti arahattamaggena avijjāya hatāya. Sabbe te samugghātaṃ gacchantīti vuttappakārā akusaladhammā, te sabbe hatabhāvaṃ pāpuṇanti.
「以不放逸为根本」的意思是:正念不远离,即不放逸是这些法的根本原因,所以称为「以不放逸为根本」。「汇归不放逸」的意思是:这些法正确汇入、进入不放逸中,所以称为「汇归不放逸」。「不放逸被称为这些法的最上」的意思是不放逸自身虽属欲界,但因为作为四地诸法的依止处,所以被称为最上。显示巴利原文
Appamādamūlakāti satiavippavāso appamādo mūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ etesanti appamādamūlakā. Appamādesu sammā osaranti gacchantīti appamādasamosaraṇā. Appamādo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatīti sayaṃ kāmāvacaropi samāno catubhūmakadhammānaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvena aggo nāma jāto.
“Alamatto”意为有足够的心力。“Mayā pucchitaṃ”指我所问的。“Vahassetaṃ bhāraṃ”是说:你当担起这已挑起的重担。“Ye keci isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitā”指任何行仙人出家的人。也有读作“Isipabbajjā pabbajitā”的。显示巴利原文
Alamattoti samatthacitto. Mayā pucchitanti mayā puṭṭhaṃ. Vahassetaṃ bhāranti etaṃ ābhatabhāraṃ vahassu. Ye keci isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitā. ‘‘Isipabbajjā pabbajitā’’tipi pāṭho.
“Ājīvakasāvakānaṃ ājīvakā devatā”的意思为:凡是听闻并信受邪命外道教法者,即为邪命外道弟子;对于这些邪命外道的弟子而言,邪命外道就是他们的天神。邪命外道接受他们所供养的施物,那些邪命外道本身即是天神。于一切处皆同此理。“Ye yesaṃ dakkhiṇeyyā”意为:那些邪命外道等乃至以方位为究竟者,对于这些刹帝利等来说,是堪受施物的人。“Te tesaṃ devatā”意为:那些邪命外道等,就是那些刹帝利等的天神。显示巴利原文
Ājīvakasāvakānaṃ ājīvakā devatāti ye ājīvakavacanaṃ suṇanti sussusanti, te ājīvakasāvakā, tesaṃ ājīvakasāvakānaṃ. Ājīvakā ca tesaṃ deyyadhammaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti, te eva ājīvakā devatā. Evaṃ sabbattha. Ye yesaṃ dakkhiṇeyyāti ye ājīvakādayo disāpariyosānā yesaṃ khattiyādīnaṃ deyyadhammānucchavikā. Te tesaṃ devatāti te ājīvakādayo tesaṃ khattiyādīnaṃ devatā.
“Yepi yaññaṃ esanti”意为希求应施物。“Gavesanti”意为寻找。“Pariyesanti”意为产生。“Yaññā vā ete puthū”意为:或者这些就是众多的祭祀。“Yaññayājakā vā ete puthū”意为:或者这些就是众多乞求应施物的人。“Dakkhiṇeyyā vā ete puthū”意为:或者这些就是众多应供者。为了详细说明他们,便以“怎样是众多祭祀”等方式展开开示。显示巴利原文
Yepi yaññaṃ esantīti deyyadhammaṃ icchanti. Gavesantīti olokenti. Pariyesantīti uppādenti. Yaññā vā ete puthūti yaññā eva vā ete puthukā. Yaññayājakā vā ete puthūti deyyadhammassa yājanakā eva vā ete puthukā. Dakkhiṇeyyā vā ete puthūti deyyadhammānucchavikā eva vā ete puthukā. Te vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kathaṃ yaññā vā ete puthū’’tiādinā nayena vitthārena dasseti.
13 “Āsīsamānā”意为希求色等。“Itthattan”意为希求此处之身,也就是希求人的存在状态等。“Jaraṃ sitā”意为依止于老。这里以老为代表,说一切轮回之苦。由此显示他们依止轮回之苦,未能从中解脱而进行造作。显示巴利原文
13.Āsīsamānāti rūpādīni patthayamānā. Itthattanti itthabhāvañca patthayamānā, manussādibhāvaṃ icchantāti vuttaṃ hoti. Jaraṃ sitāti jaraṃ nissitā. Jarāmukhena cettha sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena vaṭṭadukkhanissitā tato aparimuccamānāyeva kappayiṃsūti dīpeti.
「Rūpapaṭilābhaṃ āsīsamānā」意为希求获得殊胜色处的成就。对于声等处,同理。「Khattiyamahāsālakule attabhāvapaṭilābhaṃ」意为希求在具足心要的刹帝利大富家族中获得有身,亦即希求结生。对于婆罗门大富家族等,同理。「Brahmakāyikesu devesu」是就前生而言的,此处的「ettha」指刹帝利家族等。显示巴利原文
Rūpapaṭilābhaṃ āsīsamānāti vaṇṇāyatanasampattilābhaṃ patthayamānā. Saddādīsupi eseva nayo. Khattiyamahāsālakule attabhāvapaṭilābhanti sārappatte khattiyānaṃ mahāsālakule attabhāvalābhaṃ paṭisandhiṃ patthayamānā. Brāhmaṇamahāsālakulādīsupi eseva nayo. Brahmakāyikesu devesūti ettha pubbabhavaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Etthāti khattiyakulādīsu.
「Jarānissitā」意为依附于老。「Byādhinissitā」等,同理。由此,已遍摄一切轮回之苦而显示之。显示巴利原文
Jarānissitāti jaraṃ assitā. Byādhinissitātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Etehi sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ pariyādiyitvā dassitaṃ hoti.
14 此处,「yaññapathe」意指祭祀本身即是祭祀之道。这句话是说:你们是否在祭祀中不放逸,于行持祭祀之际渡越了轮回之苦?显示巴利原文
14.Kaccisu te bhagavā yaññapathe appamattā, atāru jātiñca jarañca mārisāti ettha yañño eva yaññapatho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kacci te yaññe appamattā hutvā yaññaṃ kappayantā vaṭṭadukkhamuttariṃsūti.
“Yepi yaññaṃ denti yajanti”意为他们通过布施应施之物而行祭祀。“Pariccajanti”意为他们施舍、舍弃。显示巴利原文
Yepiyaññaṃ denti yajantīti deyyadhammadānavasena yajanti. Pariccajantīti vissajjenti.
15 Āsīsanti:他们希求获得色等。Thomayanti:他们以“净施”等方式称赞祭祀等。Abhijappanti:他们为获得色等而发出言语。Juhanti:他们布施。Kāmābhijappanti paṭicca lābhaṃ:意为由于获得了色等,他们一再贪求欲乐,说“啊,愿我们也拥有这样的”,并因此增长渴爱,这就是其含义。Yājayogā:专心于祭祀。Bhavarāgarattā:如此,由于这些希求等,他们被有贪所染着;或者因被有贪染着而有这些希求等,他们未能度脱生、老等轮回之苦,无法超越。显示巴利原文
15.Āsīsantīti rūpapaṭilābhādayo patthenti. Thomayantīti ‘‘suciṃ dinna’’ntiādinā nayena yaññādīni pasaṃsanti. Abhijappantīti rūpādipaṭilābhāya vācaṃ gīranti. Juhantīti denti. Kāmābhijappanti paṭicca lābhanti rūpādilābhaṃ paṭicca punappunaṃ kāme eva abhijappanti, ‘‘aho vata amhākampi siyyu’’nti vadanti, taṇhañca tattha vaḍḍhentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yājayogāti yāgādhimuttā. Bhavarāgarattāti evamimehi āsīsanādīhi bhavarāgeneva rattā, bhavarāgarattā vā hutvā etāni āsīsanādīni karontā nātariṃsu jātiādivaṭṭadukkhaṃ na uttariṃsu.
“或称赞祭祀”(yaññaṃ vā thomenti):赞叹布施。“或称赞果报”(phalaṃ vā):获得色等果报。“或称赞应供者”(dakkhiṇeyye vā):对具足种姓等功德者。“清净地布施”(suciṃ dinnaṃ):清净地作布施。“悦意”(manāpaṃ):能令心生欢喜。“殊胜”(paṇītaṃ):具有滋养力。“适时”(kālena):在恰当的时机。“适宜”(kappiyaṃ):避开不适宜之物的布施。“无过失”(anavajjaṃ):没有过患。“一再”(abhiṇhaṃ):一次又一次。“令布施之心明净”(dadaṃ cittaṃ pasāditaṃ):布施者布施时,那放下、解脱的心变得明净。“称赞”(thomenti):显露其功德。“赞扬”(vaṇṇenti):说出赞美之辞。“称叹”(pasaṃsantī):令人生起欢喜心。显示巴利原文
Yaññaṃ vā thomentīti dānaṃ vā vaṇṇenti. Phalaṃ vāti rūpādipaṭilābhaṃ. Dakkhiṇeyye vāti jātisampannādīsu. Suciṃ dinnanti suciṃ katvā dinnaṃ. Manāpanti manavaḍḍhanakaṃ. Paṇītanti ojavantaṃ. Kālenāti tattha tattha sampattakāle . Kappiyanti akappiyaṃ vajjetvā dinnaṃ. Anavajjanti niddosaṃ. Abhiṇhanti punappunaṃ. Dadaṃ cittaṃ pasāditanti dadato muñcanacittaṃ pasāditanti. Thomenti kittentīti guṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonti. Vaṇṇentīti vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇanti. Pasaṃsantīti pasādaṃ pāpenti.
“由此因由”(ito nidānaṃ),是指源于此人界中布施的因由。“诵习者”(ajjhāyakā)指背诵圣典者;“持典者”(mantadharā)指受持圣典者。“三吠陀”(tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ)即《梨俱吠陀》《夜柔吠陀》和《娑摩吠陀》。“通达者”(pāragū),是通过口、唇、颚之精准发音而达于彼岸者。在“连同尼犍图与计都婆”(sahanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṃ)中,“尼犍图”(nighaṇḍu)是阐明树木等诸物名称的论书;“计都婆”(keṭubha)是论述诗人创作仪轨与分类、利益诗人的论书。在“连同字类”(sākkharappabhedānaṃ)中,“字类”(akkharappabheda)指音韵学与词源学。“以史传为第五”(itihāsapañcamānaṃ),是以《阿闼婆吠陀》为第四,再以史传为第五。显示巴利原文
Ito nidānanti ito manussalokato dinnakāraṇā. Ajjhāyakāti mante parivattentā. Mantadharāti mante dhārentā. Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti iruvedayajuvedasāmavedānaṃ. Oṭṭhapahaṭakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gatāti pāragū. Saha nighaṇḍunā ca keṭubhena ca sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṃ. Nighaṇḍūti nighaṇḍurukkhādīnaṃ vevacanappakāsakaṃ satthaṃ. Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo kavīnaṃ upakārāvahaṃ satthaṃ . Saha akkharappabhedena sākkharappabhedānaṃ. Akkharappabhedoti sikkhā ca nirutti ca. Itihāsapañcamānanti āthabbaṇavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā ‘‘itiha āsa, itiha āsā’’ti īdisavacanapaṭisaṃyuttapurāṇakathāsaṅkhāto itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā, tesaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ vedānaṃ.
因为他们学习并通达句(pada)及其余部分的语法(byākaraṇa),故称“句释家”(padaka)与“语法家”(veyyākaraṇā)。“顺世论”(lokāyataṃ)指的是诡辩论之类的书。“大人相”(mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ),是阐明佛陀等大人之相、分量有一万二千经量的论书。此论中有一万六千偈颂的内容,称为“佛陀真言”(buddhamantā)。正是依凭这部《大人相论》,才能辨别如此差别:“具足此相者,即为佛陀;具足此相者,即为独觉佛;具足此相者,则为上首弟子、八十位大弟子、佛陀之母、佛陀之父、最上侍者、最上侍奉者以及转轮王。”“无缺”(anavayā),是指在这些顺世论和大人相论中完全具足、圆满成就而无缺减;所谓“缺减者”(avayā),是指那些不能依义理与文句受持这些论典的人。“离贪”(vītarāgā),意为断除了贪欲,这是开示阿拉汉果位的状态。“或为调伏贪而行道”(rāgavinayāya vā paṭipannā),这是开显示巴利原文
Padaṃ tadavasesañca byākaraṇaṃ adhiyanti, vedenti vāti padakā veyyākaraṇā. Lokāyataṃ vuccati vitaṇḍavādasatthaṃ. Mahāpurisalakkhaṇanti mahāpurisānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ lakkhaṇadīpakaṃ dvādasasahassaganthappamāṇaṃ satthaṃ. Yattha soḷasasahassagāthāpadaparimāṇā buddhamantā nāma ahesuṃ. Yesaṃ vasena ‘‘iminā lakkhaṇena samannāgatā buddhā nāma honti, iminā paccekabuddhā, aggasāvakā , asītimahāsāvakā (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.1288), buddhamātā, buddhapitā, aggupaṭṭhāko, aggupaṭṭhāyikā, rājā cakkavattī’’ti ayaṃ viseso ñāyati. Anavayāti imesu lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anūnā paripūrakārino, avayā na hontīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avayā nāma ye tāni atthato ca ganthato ca sandhāretuṃ na sakkonti. Vītarāgāti pahīnarāgā. Etena arahattaphalaṭṭhā vuttā. Rāgavinayāya vā paṭipannāti etena arahattamaggaṭṭhā. Vītadosāti anāgāmiphalaṭṭhā. Dosavinayāya vā paṭipannāti etena anāgāmimaggaṭṭhā. Vītamohāti arahattaphalaṭṭhā. Mohavinayāya vā paṭipannāti arahattamaggaṭṭhā. Sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttisampannāti etehi catūhi lokiyalokuttaramissakehi sīlādīhi sampannā. Vimuttiñāṇadassanasampannāti etena paccavekkhaṇañāṇasampannā vuttāti ñātabbaṃ, tañca kho lokiyameva. Abhijappantīti patthenti. Jappantīti paccāsīsanti. Pajappantīti atīva paccāsīsanti. Yājayogesu yuttāti anuyoge deyyadhamme diyyamāne abhiyogavasena yuttā.
16 “那么,还有谁呢?”(Atha ko carahī),意为:那么,现在还有哪一个人能超越呢?显示巴利原文
16.Atha ko carahīti atha idāni ko añño atāri.
17 “考量后”(saṅkhāya):即以智慧审察之后。“胜与劣”(paroparāni):指殊胜与低劣,如他人的有身、自己的有身等,即是胜与劣。“无烟”(vidhūma):指远离了身恶行等诸烟。“无恼”(anīgha):指远离了贪等诸恼。“他已超越”(atāri so):意为这样的阿拉汉已超越了生与老。显示巴利原文
17.Saṅkhāyāti ñāṇena vīmaṃsitvā. Paroparānīti parāni ca oparāni ca, parattabhāvasakattabhāvādīni parāni ca oparāni cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vidhūmoti kāyaduccaritādidhūmavirahito . Anīghoti rāgādiīghavirahito. Atāri soti so evarūpo arahā jātijaraṃ atāri.
“自色”(sakarūpā):指自己的色身。“他色”(pararūpā):指他人的色身。“身恶行已无烟”(kāyaduccaritaṃ vidhūmitaṃ):指三种身恶行已无烟。“已遣除”(vidhamitaṃ):即已消灭。显示巴利原文
Sakarūpāti attano rūpā. Pararūpāti paresaṃ rūpā. Kāyaduccaritaṃ vidhūmitanti tividhakāyaduccaritaṃ vidhūmaṃ kataṃ. Vidhamitanti nāsitaṃ.
“婆罗门,你的慢确实如肩担”(Māno hi te, brāhmaṇa, khāribhāro):正如肩担被扛在肩上,即使放在高处,也会随着每一步所踏之处与大地相触;同样,依凭出身、种姓、家族等慢的所依而被抬高的慢,在各个地方生起嫉妒,使人沉沦于四恶趣。因此说:“婆罗门,你的慢确实如肩担”。“忿怒是烟”(kodho dhūmo):意思是说,对你的智火而言,忿怒是随烦恼,因此称为烟。因为被这随烦恼所障,你的智火便不能放光。“妄语是灰”(bhasmani mosavajjaṃ):妄语以无滋味之义而得名灰。正如被灰覆盖的火不能放光,这显示你的智被妄语所覆。“舌是善生之匙”(jivhā sujā):就像你拥有为祭祀而用金、银、铜、木、陶等所造的善生之匙;同样,我拥有为法施祭祀所用的堪能之舌,这就称为善生之匙。又如你在河岸有祭祀之地,同样,以法施祭祀之地的意义来说,心就是光耀之地。“我”(attā),即指心。显示巴利原文
Māno hi te, brāhmaṇa, khāribhāroti yathā khāribhāro khandhena vayhamāno upariṭṭhitopi akkantakkantaṭṭhānaṃ pathaviyā saddhiṃ phasseti viya, evaṃ jātigottakulādīni mānavatthūni nissāya ussāpito māno, tattha tattha issaṃ uppādento catūsu apāyesu saṃsīdāpeti. Tenāha – ‘‘māno hi te, brāhmaṇa, khāribhāro’’ti. Kodho dhūmoti tava ñāṇaggissa upakkilesaṭṭhena kodho dhūmo. Tena hi te upakkiliṭṭho ñāṇaggi na virocati. Bhasmani mosavajjanti nirojaṭṭhena musāvādo chārikā nāma. Yathā hi chārikāya paṭicchanno aggi na jotati, evaṃ te musāvādena paṭicchannaṃ ñāṇanti dasseti. Jivhā sujāti yathā tuyhaṃ suvaṇṇarajatalohakaṭṭhamattikāsu aññataramayā yāgayajanatthāya sujā hoti, evaṃ mayhaṃ dhammayāgayajanatthāya pahutajivhā sujāti vadati. Yathā tuyhaṃ nadītīre yajanaṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ dhammayāgayajanaṭṭhānaṭṭhena hadayaṃ jotiṭṭhānaṃ. Attāti cittaṃ.
“生”(jāti),是依生起的状态而言,此就自性说。“遍生”(sañjāti),是依完全生起的状态而言,这是加上前缀以增强语义。“入胎”(okkanti),是依进入的状态而言。或者,以“产生”的意义,称为“生”,用于根门尚未圆满之时。以“完全产生”的意义,称为“遍生”,用于根门已圆满之时。以“进入”的意义,称为“入胎”,用于卵生和胎生。那些众生进入、潜入卵壳或胞宫,正如正在进入、潜入一样而执取结生。以“再生”(abhinibbatti)的意义,称为“再生”,用于湿生和化生。那些众生是自然显现而生的。以上是随顺世俗之说。显示巴利原文
Jātīti jāyanakavasena jāti. Idamettha sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Sañjāyanavasena sañjāti, upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Okkamanavasena okkanti. Jāyanaṭṭhena vā jāti. Sā aparipuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Sañjāyanaṭṭhena sañjāti. Sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Okkamanaṭṭhena okkanti. Sā aṇḍajajalābujavasena yuttā. Te hi aṇḍakosañca vatthikosañca okkamanti pavisanti okkamantā pavisantā viya paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti. Abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbatti. Sā saṃsedajaopapātikavasena yuttā. Te hi pākaṭā eva hutvā nibbattanti. Ayaṃ tāva sammutikathā.
现在说究竟义。从究竟义而言,只有诸蕴显现,并无有情。这里的“诸蕴”,应理解为:一蕴有中为一个蕴,四蕴有中为四个蕴,五蕴有中为五个蕴。“显现”,即生起。“诸处”,指于各处受生之处所的总集。“获得”,即于相续中显现,因为正在显现的,便被称为“已获得”。而此“生”,在种种有中,以最初结生之相为特相,以给出(结生)为作用,以从此世、从过去有中浮现为现起,或以由果报所生的种种苦的差别为现起。显示巴利原文
Idāni paramatthakathā hoti. Khandhā eva hi paramatthato pātubhavanti, na sattā. Tattha ca khandhānanti ekavokārabhave ekassa, catuvokārabhave catunnaṃ, pañcavokārabhave pañcannampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pātubhāvoti uppatti. Āyatanānanti ettha tatra tatra upapajjamānāyatanānaṃ saṅgaho veditabbo. Paṭilābhoti santatiyā pātubhāvoyeva. Pātubhavantāneva hi tāni paṭiladdhāni nāma honti. Sā panesā tattha tattha bhave paṭhamābhinibbattilakkhaṇā jāti, niyyātanarasā, atītabhavato idha ummujjanapaccupaṭṭhānā, phalavasena dukkhavicittatāpaccupaṭṭhānā vā.
“衰老”(jarā)是自性专名。“老性”(jīraṇatā)是对状态的描述。“齿落”等前三个词,是就时间推移中所起的作用而作说明;后两个词,是就自然状态而作说明。因为以“衰老”一词,从自性上指明了它,故为自性专名。以“老性”,从状态上指明了它,故为状态的描述。以“齿落”,说明时间推移中令齿、爪破损的作用。以“发白”,说明令头发、体毛变白的作用。以“皮皱”,说明令肌肉萎缩、皮肤起皱的作用。因此,“齿落”等前三个词,是对衰老在时间推移中所起作用的说明。通过这些可见的变化,显出了明显的衰老。犹如水、风、火或草木,通过被冲散、被吹散、被烧焦而显出其行迹,然而那条行迹并非那些水等本身;同样地,衰老通过牙齿等齿落等现象显其行迹,明眼可见,但齿落等本身并非衰老。因为衰老并非眼所识知的对象。显示巴利原文
Jarāti sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Jīraṇatāti ākārabhāvaniddeso. Khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā, pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā. Ayañhi jarāti iminā padena sabhāvato dīpitā. Tenassā idaṃ sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Jīraṇatāti iminā ākārato, tenassāyaṃ ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccanti iminā kālātikkame dantanakhānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Pāliccanti iminā kesalomānaṃ palitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Valittacatāti iminā maṃsaṃ milāpetvā tace valibhāvakaraṇakiccato. Tenassā ime khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Tehi imesaṃ vikārānaṃ dassanavasena pākaṭībhūtā pākaṭajarā dassitā. Yatheva hi udakassa vā vātassa vā aggino vā tiṇarukkhādīnaṃ saṃbhaggapalibhaggatāya vā jhāmatāya vā gatamaggo pākaṭo hoti, na ca so gatamaggo tāneva udakādīni, evameva jarāya dantādīnaṃ khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo, cakkhuṃ ummīletvāpi gayhati, na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarā. Na hi jarā cakkhuviññeyyā hoti.
“寿的消减”与“诸根的成熟”——这些词语,实际上是指唯有在时间逾越时才明显显现的、可称为寿尽与眼等诸根坏熟的自然本性。因此,这最后两句应知是对自然本性的说明。其中,由于到达老年时,寿命便会减损,故借由果的施设,将老称为“寿的消减”。又因为眼等诸根在年轻之时极为清净,能轻易地执取各自的微细对象,而到达老年后便成熟、混乱、不清明,连粗大的对象也无力执取,所以同样借由果的施设,称为“诸根的成熟”。显示巴利原文
Āyunosaṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripākoti imehi pana padehi kālātikkameyeva abhibyattāya āyukkhayacakkhādiindriyaparipākasaṅkhātāya pakatiyā dīpitā, tenassime pacchimā dve pakatiniddesāti veditabbā. Tattha yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, tasmā jarā ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti phalūpacārena vuttā. Yasmā ca daharakāle suppasannāni sukhumampi attano visayaṃ sukheneva gaṇhanasamatthāni cakkhādīni indriyāni jaraṃ pattassa paripakkāni āluḷitāni avisadāni, oḷārikampi attano visayaṃ gahetuṃ asamatthāni honti. Tasmā ‘‘indriyānaṃ paripāko’’ti phalūpacāreneva vuttā.
以上被如此说明的一切老,分为“显露的老”与“隐蔽的老”两种。其中,在牙齿等处可见缺损等变化,依此在色法上的老,称为显露的老。而在无色法上的老,由于见不到此类变化,称为隐蔽的老。其中,所见的那些缺损等变化,因其容易识知,只是诸如此类牙齿等的颜色而已。以眼见到这些后,再以意门思惟“这些牙齿已被老所侵袭”,便了知有老。正如看见水中系着的牛角等物件,便知下方有水一样。显示巴利原文
Sā panesā evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbāpi jarā pākaṭā paṭicchannāti duvidhā hoti. Tattha dantādīsu khaṇḍādibhāvadassanato rūpadhammesu jarā pākaṭajarā nāma. Arūpadhammesu pana jarā tādisassa vikārassa adassanato paṭicchannajarā nāma. Tattha yvāyaṃ khaṇḍādibhāvo dissati, so tādisānaṃ dantādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā vaṇṇoyeva. Tañca cakkhunā disvā manodvārena cintetvā ‘‘ime dantā jarāya pahaṭā’’ti jaraṃ jānāti. Udakaṭṭhāne baddhāni gosiṅgādīni oloketvā heṭṭhā udakassa atthibhāvajānanaṃ viya.
再者,此老又有另一种分法,即“无间老”与“有间老”。其中,对于摩尼珠、金、银、珊瑚、月亮、太阳等,以及像“十有”等长命的有情众生那样,还有对于花、果、嫩叶等非有情之物,由于它们中间不时出现的色泽等差别变化不易被察觉,那样的老称为无间老,意思是无间断的老。而除此之外,如上所述的那些,由于其间不时出现的色泽等差别变化容易被察觉,那样的老称为有间老。显示巴利原文
Puna avīci savīcīti evampi ayaṃ jarā duvidhā hoti. Tattha maṇikanakarajatapavāḷacandasūriyādīnaṃ mandadasakādīsu pāṇīnaṃ viya ca pupphaphalapallavādīsu apāṇīnaṃ viya ca antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ dubbiññeyyattā jarā avīcijarā nāma, nirantarajarāti attho. Tato aññesu pana yathāvuttesu antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā jarā savīcijarā nāma.
其中,有间老应依“有执受”与“无执受”的分别作如下说明:幼孩最初生出的乳齿并不坚固。乳齿脱落后再生的牙齿,起初是白色的,但当被老风侵扰时便变成黑色。头发最初则有铜色、黑色,也有白色。皮肤带红色。随着逐渐长大,原本白皙的越显白,原本黑的越显黑;当被老风侵扰时便起了皱纹。一切谷物在播种时是青绿的,后来变成黄熟时的淡黄色。也值得以芒果的嫩芽为例来说明。而此老,以诸蕴的成熟为相,以导至死亡为作用,以青春消逝为现起。其余一切处都容易理解。世尊同样以这部经,以阿拉汉果为顶峰作了开示。开示结束时,这位婆罗门连同千位内弟子安住于阿拉汉果。其他数千人则生起了法眼。余如前说。显示巴利原文
Tattha savīcijarā upādinnakaanupādinnakavasena evaṃ dīpetabbā – daharakumārakānañhi paṭhamameva khīradantā nāma uṭṭhahanti, na te thirā. Tesu pana patitesu puna dantā uṭṭhahanti, te paṭhamameva setā honti, jarāvātena pana pahaṭakāle kāḷakā honti. Kesā pana paṭhamameva tambāpi honti kāḷakāpi setakāpi. Chavi pana salohitakā hoti. Vaḍḍhantānaṃ vaḍḍhantānaṃ odātānaṃ odātabhāvo, kāḷakānaṃ kāḷakabhāvo paññāyati. Jarāvātena pahaṭakāle ca valiṃ gaṇhāti. Sabbampi sassaṃ vapitakāle setaṃ hoti, pacchā nīlaṃ. Jarāvātena pana pahaṭakāle paṇḍaraṃ hoti. Ambaṅkurenāpi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭati eva. Sā panesā khandhaparipākalakkhaṇā jarā, maraṇūpanayanarasā, yobbanavināsapaccupaṭṭhānā. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva. Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ayampi brāhmaṇo arahatte patiṭṭhāsi saddhiṃ antevāsikasahassena. Aññesañca anekasahassānaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādi. Sesaṃ vuttasadisameva.
四、《弥德古青年经》经释的注释显示巴利原文
4. Mettagūmāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
18 在第四《梅塔古经》中,“maññāmi taṃ vedagū bhāvitattanti”意为:我这样认为,他既是极智者,也是修习成就者。显示巴利原文
18. Catutthe mettagūsutte – maññāmi taṃ vedagū bhāvitattanti ‘‘ayaṃ vedagū’’ti ca ‘‘bhāvitatto’’ti ca evaṃ taṃ maññāmi.
“Aparitto”意为不小,即非低劣。“Mahanto”意为广大,即非狭小。“Gambhīro”意为甚深,即非肤浅。“Appameyyo”意为不可测量,即无法度量。“Duppariyogāḷho”意为难通达,即难以进入、难以探究。“Bahuratano sāgarūpamo”意为多宝如海,因是众多法宝的库藏,具足种种宝,犹如大海多宝,与海相似。显示巴利原文
Aparittoti na appo. Mahantoti na khuddako. Gambhīroti na uttāno. Appameyyoti minituṃ na sakkuṇeyyo. Duppariyogāḷhoti avagāhituṃ otarituṃ dukkho. Bahuratano sāgarūpamoti bahūnaṃ dhammaratanānaṃ ākarattā anekavidharatanasampanno mahāsamuddo viya bahuratano sāgarasadiso.
“不郁闷”(Na maṅku hoti):指面容不扭曲。“心无住著”(appatiṭṭhitacitto):即因嗔恚而心不僵固。“意不退缩”(alīnamanaso):即心不萎缩。“无害之心”(abyāpannacetaso):即心不腐坏。显示巴利原文
Na maṅku hotīti na vikuṇitamukho hoti. Appatiṭṭhitacittoti dosavasena na ghanībhūtacitto. Alīnamanasoti na saṅkucitacitto. Abyāpannacetasoti na pūticitto.
“于所见中只是所见”(diṭṭhe diṭṭhamatto):在眼根色所缘的领域,所见仅是所缘本身,没有作者或令作者。眼所见只是色处。对于闻等也是如此。再者,以“见”的作用指示色处;以“闻”的作用指示声处;以“触”(muta)的作用指示鼻处、舌处、身处——即鼻的香处、舌的味处、身的触处(包括地、火、风);以“识知”的作用指示法处。“于所见中无随行”(diṭṭhe anūpayo):对于眼识所见,离贪的随行。“无嗔害”(anapāyo):离嗔,无嗔恚。“无所依”(anissito):不黏著于渴爱。“无所系缚”(appaṭibaddho):不被慢系缚。“已遍解脱”(vippamutto):从一切所缘中解脱。“已离结使”(visaññutto):离烦恼而安住。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattoti cakkhuvisaye rūpārammaṇe diṭṭhamattoyeva taṃ ārammaṇaṃ bhavissati, kattā vā kāretā vā natthi. Yaṃ cakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ vaṇṇāyatanameva. Sutādīsupi eseva nayo. Api ca diṭṭheti dassanayogena vaṇṇāyatanaṃ, savanayogena saddāyatanaṃ, mutayogena ghānajivhākāyāyatanāni dasseti. Ghānassa gandhāyatanaṃ, jivhāya rasāyatanaṃ, kāyassa pathavī tejo vāyūti phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ, viññātayogena dhammāyatanaṃ dasseti. Diṭṭhe anūpayoti cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhe rāgūpayavirahito. Anapāyoti kodhavirahito appaṭigho . Anissitoti taṇhāya anallīno. Appaṭibaddhoti mānena na baddho. Vippamuttoti sabbārammaṇato mutto. Visaññuttoti kilesehi viyutto hutvā ṭhito.
“世尊有眼”(saṃvijjati bhagavato cakkhu):指佛陀世尊本具的肉眼可得。“见”(passati):即看见、观察。“以眼见色”(cakkhunā rūpaṃ):即以眼识取色所缘。“欲贪”(chandarāgo):即渴爱与欲。显示巴利原文
Saṃvijjati bhagavato cakkhūti buddhassa bhagavato pakatimaṃsacakkhu upalabbhati. Passatīti dakkhati oloketi. Cakkhunā rūpanti cakkhuviññāṇena rūpārammaṇaṃ. Chandarāgoti taṇhāchando.
“Dantaṃ nayanti samitiṃ”:他们将已调御者带往集会。在园林、游艺场等众人聚集处,人们把已调御的牛或已调御的良马套在车上,驾驭前往。“Rājā”:国王。国王前往那些场合时,也骑乘已调御者。“Manussesu”:在人中。在人中,由四种圣道所调御、无可指摘的人,才是最殊胜的。“Yotivākyaṃ”:如此超越之言。像这样超越的言词,纵使一再被说,也能忍受而不反抗、不被困扰;这样的调御者便是最殊胜的——这是它的义理。显示巴利原文
Dantaṃ nayanti samitinti uyyānakīḷāmaṇḍalādīsu hi mahājanamajjhaṃ gacchantā dantameva goṇaṃ vā dantaṃ assājānīyaṃ vā yāne yojetvā nayanti. Rājāti tathārūpāneva ṭhānāni gacchanto rājāpi dantameva abhiruhati. Manussesūti manussesupi catūhi ariyamaggehi danto nibbisevanova seṭṭho. Yotivākyanti evarūpaṃ atikkammavacanaṃ punappunaṃ vuccamānampi titikkhati nappatippharati na vihaññati, evarūpo danto seṭṭhoti attho.
“Assatarā”:杂种驴马,由母马与驴交配所生。“Ājānīyā”:良骏,指对于善巧御者所下达的命令,能迅速理解的那种马。“Sindhavā”:信度马,即生于信度国的马。“Mahānāgā”:大象,即称为象的大象。“Attadanto”:自我调御者。这些杂种驴马、信度马或大象,本身就是已被调御的,并非未被调御。然而,以四圣道为内涵的自我调御,成为无可指摘的自我调御者,这比那些更殊胜,胜过这一切——这是义理。显示巴利原文
Assatarāti vaḷavāya gadrabhena jātā. Ājānīyāti yaṃ assadammasārathi kāraṇaṃ kāreti, tassa khippaṃ jānanasamatthā. Sindhavāti sindhavaraṭṭhe jātā assā. Mahānāgāti kuñjarasaṅkhātā mahāhatthino. Attadantoti ete assatarā vā sindhavā vā kuñjarā vā dantāva, na adantā. Yo pana catumaggasaṅkhātena attano dantatāya attadanto nibbisevano, ayaṃ tatopi varaṃ, sabbehipi etehi uttaritaroti attho.
“Na hi etehi yānehi”:并非凭借这些车乘。那些象车等最上乘的车乘,任何一个人哪怕在梦中,也从未乘坐这些车乘到达过那被称为“未曾到达”的涅槃之境。而如是:在前行阶段由调御诸根而调御,在后行阶段由修习圣道而善加调御,成为调御、无可指摘、具慧的补特伽罗,他能到达那未曾到达之处,达到调御之地。因此,自我调御才是更殊胜的——这是义理。显示巴利原文
Na hi etehi yānehīti yāni etāni hatthiyānādīni uttamayānāni, etehi yānehi koci puggalo supinantenapi agatapubbattā ‘‘agata’’nti saṅkhātaṃ nibbānadisaṃ tathā na gaccheyya. Yathā pubbabhāge indriyadamena dantena, aparabhāge ariyamaggabhāvanāya sudantena danto nibbisevano sappañño puggalo taṃ agatapubbaṃ disaṃ gacchati, dantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti, tasmā attadamanameva varataranti attho (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.322; mahāni. aṭṭha. 90).
「于诸慢类中不动摇」:在九种慢的类别中,不摇动、不颤抖。「已从后有得解脱」:从业与烦恼中,由断尽解脱而彻底解脱。「已达调御之地」:证得阿拉汉果而安住。「他们于世间中为征服者」:如前所说的漏尽者,在众生世间中称为征胜者。显示巴利原文
Vidhāsu na vikampantīti navavidhamānakoṭṭhāsesu na calanti na vedhenti. Vippamuttā punabbhavāti kammakilesato samucchedavimuttiyā suṭṭhu muttā. Dantabhūmiṃ anuppattāti arahattaphalaṃ pāpuṇitvā ṭhitā. Te loke vijitāvinoti te vuttappakārā khīṇāsavā sattaloke vijitavijayā nāma (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.76; mahāni. aṭṭha. 90).
「凡诸根已修习者」:那位漏尽者,他的信等五根已被培育至阿拉汉果而增长。「于内及于外」:眼等内处与色等外处,于他皆已无耽著。「于一切世间」:在一切三界世间中。「洞察此世间与彼世间」:那位漏尽者超越此世之自身与他世之自身而安住。他——那调御者、修习者,在等待般涅槃的时刻。显示巴利原文
Yassindriyāni bhāvitānīti yassa khīṇāsavassa saddhādipañcindriyāni arahattaphalaṃ pāpetvā vaḍḍhitāni. Ajjhattañca bahiddhā cāti cakkhādiajjhattāyatanāni ca rūpādibahiddhāyatanāni ca nibbisevanāni katāni. Sabbaloketi sakalatedhātuke loke ca. Nibbijjha imaṃ parañca lokanti imañca attabhāvaṃ paraloke ca attabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhito khīṇāsavo . Kālaṃ kaṅkhati bhāvito sa dantoti so khīṇāsavo cakkhādito danto vaḍḍhitacitto maraṇakālaṃ pattheti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.522; mahāni. aṭṭha. 90).
「某些法,其生起之初可被知」:凡诸蕴等法,其生起之初即可了知。「从灭殁而灭尽」:依灭没,他们法之消失可以了知。「依业而存立的果报」:依托善业与不善业而存立的果报,因其不离业而转起,故果报亦名依业存立者。「依名而存立的色」:一切色依名而转起,故名为依名存立者。「为生所跟从」:一切以业等为首者,皆随入于生中。「为老所散布」:被老所遍布。「为病所征服」:被病苦所摧伏。「为死所击打」:被死所击碎。「无救护」:纵有子女等亦不能救护,故无救护、无守护、不得安稳处。「无依处」:不堪作皈依、不堪作依止之处;纵有所皈依,亦不能成真正依处。「无皈依」:对于皈依者不能除其怖畏,不能摧其怖畏。「成为无皈依者」:于未生时,因自体尚不存在故已无皈依;于生时即成无皈依者——此为义。显示巴利原文
Yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ādito samudāgamanaṃ paññāyatīti yesaṃ khandhādidhammānaṃ uppatti paññāyati. Atthaṅgamato nirodhoti atthaṅgamanavasena tesaṃyeva abhāvo paññāyati. Kammasannissito vipākoti kusalākusalakammanissito vipāko kammaṃ amuñcitvā pavattanato vipākopi kammasannissitova nāma. Nāmasannissitaṃ rūpanti sabbarūpaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā pavattanato nāmasannissitaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Jātiyā anugatanti sabbaṃ kammādikaṃ jātiyā anupaviṭṭhaṃ. Jarāya anusaṭanti jarāya patthaṭaṃ. Byādhinā abhibhūtanti byādhidukkhena abhimadditaṃ. Maraṇena abbhāhatanti maccunā abhihaṭaṃ pahaṭaṃ. Atāṇanti puttādīhipi tāyanassa abhāvato atāyanaṃ anārakkhaṃ alabbhaṇeyyaṃ khemaṃ vā. Aleṇanti allīyituṃ nissayituṃ anarahaṃ, allīnānampi na leṇakiccakaraṇaṃ. Asaraṇanti nissitānaṃ na bhayahārakaṃ, na bhayavināsakaṃ. Asaraṇībhūtanti pure uppattiyā attano abhāveneva asaraṇaṃ, uppattisamakālameva asaraṇabhūtanti attho.
19 “他问”:此处的“a”只是填充音节的小品词,意思就是“他问了”。
“我将依我所知而宣说”:如其所知,我将如是宣说。
“诸苦由依着之因而生起”:以渴爱等依着为因,出生等种种苦患便会生起。显示巴利原文
19.Apucchasīti ettha a-iti padapūraṇamatte nipāto, pucchasitveva attho. Pavakkhāmi yathā pajānanti yathā pajānanto ācikkhati, evaṃ ācikkhissāmi. Upadhinidānā pabhavanti dukkhāti taṇhādiupadhinidānā jātiādidukkhavisesā pabhavanti.
“渴爱即渴爱依着”:渴爱本身就是渴爱依着。常见与断见本身就是见依着。贪等烦恼本身就是烦恼依着。福行等业本身就是业依着。三种恶行本身就是恶行依着。抟食等食本身就是食依着。嗔恚本身就是害对依着。由业所等起、被业所执持的地等四界,本身就是四种已执受界依着。眼等六内处本身就是六内处依着。眼识等六识身本身就是六识身依着。三地一切之苦,因难忍的缘故,从难忍之义而言,即是依着。显示巴利原文
Taṇhūpadhīti taṇhā eva taṇhūpadhi. Sassatucchedadiṭṭhi eva diṭṭhūpadhi. Rāgādikilesā eva kilesūpadhi. Puññādikammāni eva kammūpadhi. Tividhaduccaritāniyeva duccaritūpadhi. Kabaḷīkārādayo āhārā eva āhārūpadhi. Dosapaṭigho eva paṭighūpadhi. Kammasamuṭṭhānā kammeneva gahitā pathavādayo catasso dhātuyova catasso upādinnadhātuyo upadhī. Cakkhādichaajjhattikāni āyatanāni eva cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni upadhī. Cakkhuviññāṇādichaviññāṇakāyāva cha viññāṇakāyā upadhī. Sabbampi dukkhaṃ dukkhamanaṭṭhenāti sabbatebhūmakaṃ dukkhaṃ dussahanaṭṭhena upadhi.
20 如是,当诸苦由依着之因而生起时,有此一颂:“确实,那无明者……”。其中,“了知者”是指从无常等方面了知诸行的人。“观苦之生起与因者”是指随观轮回苦的生起因——“依着”的人。对于此偈的解释,无需再作更多说明。显示巴利原文
20. Evaṃ upadhinidānato pabhavantesu dukkhesu – yo ve avidvāti gāthā. Tattha pajānanti saṅkhāre aniccādivasena jānanto. Dukkhassa jātippabhavānupassīti vaṭṭadukkhassa jātikāraṇaṃ ‘‘upadhī’’ti anupassanto. Imissā gāthāya niddese vattabbaṃ natthi.
21 「愁与悲叹」即愁和悲叹。确实,正如众生以种种方式了知,你也通过令其了知的方式,如是了知了此法。显示巴利原文
21.Sokapariddavañcāti sokañca paridevañca. Tathā hi te vidito esa dhammoti yathā yathā sattā jānanti, tathā tathā ñāpanavasena vidito esa tayā dhammoti.
其中,「渡」指以初道渡越见流。「上渡」指以第二道,通过令欲流减弱而升进后渡越。「殊渡」指以第三道,以无余断除的方式,殊胜地渡越同一欲流。「正度越」指以第四道,通过断除有流与无明流而正确地度越。「已越而住立」指证得果位后安住。显示巴利原文
Tattha tarantīti paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhoghaṃ taranti. Uttarantīti dutiyamaggena kāmoghaṃ tanukaraṇavasena uggantvā taranti. Patarantīti tameva niravasesappahānavasena tatiyamaggena visesena taranti. Samatikkamantīti bhavoghaavijjoghappahānavasena catutthamaggena sammā atikkamanti. Vītivattantīti phalaṃ pāpuṇitvā tiṭṭhanti.
22 「我将为你称说法」意思是:我将为你开示涅槃法,以及通往涅槃的道法。「于现见之法」意思是:就在现前可见的苦等法上,或即在此自身之中。「非据传闻」意思是:自所亲证。「凡是了知后」意思是:依“一切行无常”等方法如理思惟,了知该法之后。显示巴利原文
22.Kittayissāmi te dhammanti nibbānadhammaṃ nibbānagāminipaṭipadādhammañca te desayissāmi. Diṭṭhe dhammeti diṭṭheva dukkhādidhamme, imasmiṃyeva vā attabhāve. Anītihanti attapaccakkhaṃ. Yaṃ viditvāti yaṃ dhammaṃ ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinā (dha. pa. 277; theragā. 676; kathā. 753) nayena sammasanto viditvā.
这里所说的“初善”等,意谓:纵使舍弃无上远离之乐,我也将为你说法;而且,无论我说多说少,所宣说的,皆是具足初善等特质的法。所谓“我将以初善而说”,是指于开端即以美好、吉祥、无过失的方式宣说。中间也是如此。所谓“我将以中善而说,亦将以后善而说”,是指于结尾也同样以美好、无过失的方式宣说。诚然,当世尊开示哪怕一首偈颂时,由于法具有周遍的善好性,这首偈颂的第一句便是初善,第二、三句是中善,末句是后善。对于主题单一的经典,其序分是初善,结分是后善,中间其余部分是中善。对于有多主题的经典,第一个主题段落是初善,最后一个主题段落是后善,其余主题段落则是中善。显示巴利原文
Tattha ādikalyāṇanti hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ tava kittayissāmi, tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā kittayanto ādikalyāṇādippakārameva kittayissāmi. Ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā kittayissāmi . Majjhepi. Pariyosānepi bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā kittayissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmiñhi bhagavā ekagāthampi desesi, sā samantabhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapādena ādikalyāṇā, dutiyatatiyapādehi majjhekalyāṇā, pacchimapādena pariyosānakalyāṇā. Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ nidānena ādikalyāṇaṃ, nigamanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesena majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Nānānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ paṭhamānusandhinā ādikalyāṇaṃ, pacchimena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesehi majjhekalyāṇaṃ.
再者,由于具足序分与生起的因缘,故为初善;由于契合所化对象、义理无有颠倒,并运用了因由与譬喻,故为中善;由于依凭结分能令听闻者生起净信,故为后善。显示巴利原文
Api ca sanidānauppattittā ādikalyāṇaṃ, veneyyānaṃ anurūpato atthassa aviparītatāya ca hetudāharaṇayuttato ca majjhekalyāṇaṃ, sotūnaṃ saddhāpaṭilābhajananena nigamanena ca pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ.
一切教法,以其自性所摄的戒为初善,以止、观、道、果为中善,以涅槃为后善。或以戒与定为初善,以观与道为中善,以果与涅槃为后善。或以佛陀的善成正觉为初善,以法的善妙法性为中善,以僧伽的善妙行道为后善。又或,听闻此法之后,为证得彼真实而修行的人所应证得的正等觉是初善,辟支菩提是中善,声闻菩提是后善。显示巴利原文
Sakalo hi sāsanadhammo attano atthabhūtena sīlena ādikalyāṇo, samathavipassanāmaggaphalehi majjhekalyāṇo, nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo. Sīlasamādhīhi vā ādikalyāṇo, vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo, phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo. Buddhasubodhitāya vā ādikalyāṇo, dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇo, saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo . Taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipannena adhigantabbāya abhisambodhiyā vā ādikalyāṇo, paccekabodhiyā majjhekalyāṇo, sāvakabodhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo.
再者,此法在被听闻时,便因能镇伏诸障碍,仅凭听闻本身也能带来善妙,故称“初善”;在被修习时,能带来止与观的快乐,仅凭修行的过程也能带来善妙,故称“中善”;而如此修行之人,当其修行之果圆满成就时,能带来如如不动的圣者境界,仅凭修行的成果也能带来善妙,故称“后善”。显示巴利原文
Suyyamāno cesa nīvaraṇavikkhambhanato bhavanenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti ādikalyāṇo, paṭipajjiyamāno samathavipassanāsukhāvahanato paṭipattiyāpi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti majjhekalyāṇo, tathāpaṭipanno (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.1) ca paṭipattiphale niṭṭhite tādibhāvāvahanato paṭipattiphalenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti pariyosānakalyāṇoti.
而这位世尊在开示法时,会阐明教法上的梵行与道上的梵行,并以种种方法将其揭示明白。此法因义理的成就而契合,故称“具义”;因文辞的成就而完备,故称“具文”。它以宣说、显示、揭示、分别、阐明、安立义理词句的结合,成为“具义”;它以字母、词语、音节、方式、语法解说的成就,成为“具文”。因意义的甚深与通达的甚深,故是“具义”;因法本身的甚深与说法的甚深,故是“具文”。因属于义无碍解与辩无碍解的范畴,故是“具义”;因属于法无碍解与词无碍解的范畴,故是“具文”。因是智者所能了知,能令同等智者欢喜,故是“具义”;因可信可受,能令世间大众欢喜,故是“具文”。因蕴含甚深的意旨,故是“具义”;因文句显了易懂,故是“具文”。因无有需再增添的完全圆满状态,故称“绝对圆满”;因无有需再去除的无瑕清净状态,故称“清净”。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ panesa bhagavā dhammaṃ desento sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, nānānayehi dīpeti. Taṃ yathānurūpaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattiatthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ. Akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi sātthaṃ. Dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjanaṃ. Atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato sātthaṃ. Dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjanaṃ. Paṇḍitavedanīyato sarikkhakajanappasādakanti sātthaṃ. Saddheyyato lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjanaṃ. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthaṃ. Uttānapadato sabyañjanaṃ. Upanetabbassa abhāvato sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvena kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ. Apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosabhāvena parisuddhaṃ.
再者,从修行方面证得的明确性来说,它是“具义”;从教理方面传来的明确性来说,它是“具文”。因其与戒等五法蕴相合,故是“绝对圆满”。因其远离烦恼杂染、为度脱生死而运作、不希求世间利益,故是“清净”。因其为三学所摄,故应由此成就了最胜境界的圣者所行持,并成为他们日常的行处,因此称为“梵行”。显示巴利原文
Api ca – paṭipattiyā adhigamabyattito sātthaṃ. Pariyattiyā āgamabyattito sabyañjanaṃ. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhayuttato kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ. Nirupakkilesato nittharaṇatthāya pavattito lokāmisanirapekkhato ca parisuddhaṃ. Sikkhattayapariggahitattā brahmabhūtehi seṭṭhehi caritabbato, tesañca cariyabhāvato brahmacariyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.1).
如是显示了教法之后,为显示超世间法而说「四念处」;展示了三十七菩提分法之后,为显示由彼所生的超世间法而说「与涅槃」。至于「及导向涅槃之道」,我将宣说彼道的前行部分——即戒、定、观诸法。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pariyattidhammaṃ dassetvā idāni lokuttaradhammaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhāne’’ti āha. Sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhamme dassetvā nibbattitalokuttaraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nibbānañcā’’ti āha. Nibbānagāminiñca paṭipadanti pubbabhāgasīlasamādhivipassanādhammañca kittayissāmi.
「于苦谛见」:当以苦的自相如实见苦谛时,我即阐明苦谛。对于集等其余圣谛,其说亦然。显示巴利原文
Dukkhe diṭṭheti dukkhasacce sarasalakkhaṇena diṭṭhe dukkhasaccaṃ pakāsessāmi. Samudayādīsupi eseva nayo.
23 「我亦欣求彼」:即我渴望你那如是能阐明法的言教。「最上法」:即我亦欣求那最上之法。显示巴利原文
23.Tañcāhaṃabhinandāmīti taṃ vuttappakāradhammajotakaṃ tava vacanaṃ ahaṃ patthayāmi. Dhammamuttamanti tañca dhammamuttamaṃ abhinandāmi.
此处,“破除大黑暗蕴”是指截断那巨大的无明之堆。“以无常相寻求”,即依无常相而寻求;“以苦相探寻”,即依苦相而探寻;“以无我相遍寻”,即依无我相而周遍寻求。“破坏大颠倒”是指破除那巨大的、以不净为净等十二种颠倒。“拔出大爱箭”是指拔除那巨大的渴爱之箭,此箭因其能内在地刺伤,故称为爱刺。“解开局结”:“局结”指见解本身,因其无间断地流转而具有纠结之义;解开局结,便是扭转、舍断那纠结的见解。“打倒慢幢”是指打倒那高举的、以高耸为特征的傲慢之旗。“平息行”是指使福行等造作之行止息。“渡越暴流”是指从能令人沉沦于轮回的欲暴流等暴流中渡越、出离。“放下重担”是指抛弃、放下色等五蕴的重担。“截断轮回的轮转”是指通过灭除其因,来截断以蕴等相续流转的轮回之轮。“熄灭热恼”即烦恼所生热恼的寂灭。“清凉热逼”即息灭那烦恼所生的热恼,获得清凉。“举起法幢”即把九种出世间法高高举起,树立法幢。“究竟义、不死、涅槃”:“究竟义”因其具有最殊胜的含义,故称为究竟义。显示巴利原文
Tattha mahato tamokāyassa padālananti mahato avijjārāsissa chedanaṃ. Aniccalakkhaṇavasena esī. Dukkhalakkhaṇavasena gavesī. Anattalakkhaṇavasena samantato pariyesī. Mahato vipallāsassa pabhedananti mahantassa asubhe subhantiādidvādasavidhassa vipallāsassa bhedanaṃ. Mahato taṇhāsallassa abbahananti mahantassa antotudanaṭṭhena taṇhākaṇṭakassa luñcanaṃ. Diṭṭhisaṅghāṭassa viniveṭhananti diṭṭhiyeva abbocchinnappavattito saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena saṅghāṭo, tassa diṭṭhisaṅghāṭassa nivattanaṃ. Mānadhajassa pātananti ussitaṭṭhena unnatilakkhaṇassa mānaddhajassa pātanaṃ. Abhisaṅkhārassa vūpasamanti puññādiabhisaṅkhārassa upasamanaṃ. Oghassa nittharaṇanti vaṭṭe osīdāpanassa kāmoghādioghassa nittharaṇaṃ nikkhamanaṃ. Bhārassa nikkhepananti rūpādipañcakkhandhabhārassa khipanaṃ chaḍḍanaṃ. Saṃsāravaṭṭassa upacchedanti khandhādipaṭipāṭisaṃsāravaṭṭassa hetunassanena ucchijjanaṃ. Santāpassa nibbāpananti kilesasantāpassa nibbutiṃ. Pariḷāhassa paṭipassaddhanti kilesapariḷāhassa vūpasamaṃ paṭipassambhanaṃ. Dhammadhajassa ussāpananti navavidhalokuttaradhammassa ussāpetvā ṭhapanaṃ. Paramatthaṃ amataṃ nibbānanti uttamaṭṭhena paramatthaṃ. Natthi etassa maraṇasaṅkhātaṃ matanti amataṃ. Kilesavisapaṭipakkhattā agadantipi amataṃ. Saṃsāradukkhapaṭipakkhabhūtattā nibbutanti nibbānaṃ. Natthettha taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ vānantipi nibbānaṃ.
“被有大威力的众生”,即被帝释天等具有大神力的众生。“所寻求的”,即被周遍寻求。“天中之天何在”,即诸天中的最胜天在何处。“人牛王何在”,即最上之人、人中牛王在何处。显示巴利原文
Mahesakkhehi sattehīti mahānubhāvehi sakkādīhi sattehi. Pariyesitoti pariyiṭṭho. Kahaṃ devadevoti devānaṃ atidevo kuhiṃ. Kahaṃ narāsabhoti uttamapuriso.
24 24.「上方、下方、横向以及中间」这句话里,「上方」是指未来时。「下方」是指过去时。「横向以及中间」是指现在时。「对于这些,应驱除喜悦、住处以及识」意思是:在这些上方等三时之中,你应当驱除渴爱、邪见的住处以及造作之识。驱除之后,「不应住于有」是说,如果能这样,就不应再住于两种有之中。以上是先把「panujja」这个词解释为“你应驱除”时的语法关联。而当把它理解为「panuditvā(驱除了之后)」时,和「不应住于有」的关联也是一样的。意思是:驱除了这些喜悦、住处和识之后,不应再住于两种有。显示巴利原文
24.Uddhaṃ adho tiriyañcāpi majjheti ettha uddhanti anāgataddhā vuccati. Adhoti atītaddhā. Tiriyañcāpi majjheti paccuppannaddhā. Etesu nandiñca nivesanañca, panujja viññāṇanti etesu uddhādīsu taṇhañca diṭṭhinivesanañca abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇañca panudehi. Panuditvā ca bhave na tiṭṭheti evaṃ sante duvidhepi bhave na tiṭṭheyya. Evaṃ tāva panujjasaddassa panudehīti imasmiṃ atthavikappe sambandho. Panuditvāti etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe bhave na tiṭṭheti ayameva sambandho. Etāni nandīnivesanaviññāṇāni panuditvā duvidhepi bhave na tiṭṭheyyāti.
依同一处所而说:天界为上方,恶趣世间为下方,人界为中间。其中,善法因能避恶趣、授予上方结生,故称善法为“上方”;不善法因授予恶趣结生,故称“下方”;无记法因脱离此二者,故称“横向及中间”。依一切最上而言:无色界为上方;依一切最下而言:欲界为下方;依处二者之间而言:色界为中间。依似挖除身心苦痛之义:乐受为上方;依苦性:苦受为下方;不苦不乐受为中间。为显示依有身划分界限,说“上方即脚掌以上”等。“上方即脚掌以上”,指脚掌向上的部分;“下方即头发顶端以下”,指头顶发端向下的部分;“中间”,指此二者之间。显示巴利原文
Sahokāsavasena devaloko uddhaṃ. Apāyaloko adho. Manussaloko majjhe. Tattha kusalā dhammāti apāyaṃ muñcitvā upari paṭisandhidānato kusalā dhammā uddhanti vuccanti. Akusalādhammā apāyesu paṭisandhidānato adhoti. Tadubhayavimuttattā abyākatā dhammā tiriyañcāpi majjheti vuccanti. Sabboparivasena arūpadhātu uddhaṃ. Sabbaadhovasena kāmadhātu adho. Tadubhayantaravasena rūpadhātu majjhe. Kāyacittābādhakhananavasena sukhā vedanā uddhaṃ . Dukkhamanavasena dukkhā vedanā adho. Adukkhamasukhā vedanā majjhe. Attabhāvavasena paricchedaṃ dassento ‘‘uddhanti uddhaṃ pādatalā’’tiādimāha. Tattha uddhaṃ pādatalāti pādatalato upari. Adho kesamatthakāti kesamatthakato adho. Majjheti dvinnaṃ antaraṃ.
“福行相应识”:指与十三种福行相应的业识。“非福行相应识”:指与十二种非福行相应的业识。“不动行相应识”:指与四种不动行相应的业识。“Nujja”为“抛弃”义。“Panujja”为“彻底抛弃”义。“Nuda”为“拔除”义。“Panuda”为“彻底拔除”义。“Pajaha”为“舍弃”义。“Vinodehi”为“彻底除去”义。显示巴利原文
Puññābhisaṅkhārasahagataṃviññāṇanti terasavidhapuññābhisaṅkhārasampayuttaṃ kammaviññāṇaṃ. Apuññābhisaṅkhārasahagataṃ viññāṇanti dvādasavidhaapuññābhisaṅkhārasampayuttaṃ kammaviññāṇaṃ. Āneñjābhisaṅkhārasahagataṃ viññāṇanti catubbidhaṃ āneñjābhisaṅkhārasahagataṃ kammaviññāṇaṃ. Nujjāti khipa. Panujjāti atīva khipa. Nudāti luñca. Panudāti atīva luñca. Pajahāti chaḍḍehi. Vinodehīti dūraṃ karohi.
“以及业有”:即指福行等的思。“结生之有及再生”:指结生时的色等后有。由第一道(入流道)而“舍弃”,由第二道(一来道)而“除去”,由第三道(不还道)而“根绝”,由第四道(阿拉汉道)而“令其永无”。“不应住于业有”,即不应再住于福行等诸行。显示巴利原文
Kammabhavañcāti puññābhisaṅkhāracetanāva. Paṭisandhikañca punabbhavanti paṭisandhiyā rūpādipunabbhavañca. Pajahanto paṭhamamaggena, vinodento dutiyamaggena, byantī karonto tatiyamaggena, anabhāvaṃ gamento catutthamaggena. Kammabhave na tiṭṭheyyāti puññādiabhisaṅkhāre na tiṭṭheyya.
25 “除去这些之后不住于有,他——如是住者”这一偈。其中,“就在此”是指“就在此教法中”,或“就在此有身(即此生命体)中”。这一偈的解释,意义明了。显示巴利原文
25. Etāni vinodetvā bhave atiṭṭhanto eso – evaṃ vihārīti gāthā. Tattha idhevāti imasmiṃyeva sāsane, imasmiṃyeva vā attabhāve. Imissā gāthāya niddeso uttānatthova.
26 在“Sukittitaṃ gotamanūpadhīkaṃ(善说乔达摩无依怙)”这句话中,“anūpadhīka(无依怙)”是指涅槃。说话者以此词称呼世尊,便说:“善说乔达摩无依怙。”显示巴利原文
26.Sukittitaṃ gotamanūpadhīkanti ettha anūpadhīkanti nibbānaṃ, taṃ sandhāya bhagavantaṃ ālapanto āha – ‘‘sukittitaṃ gotamanūpadhīka’’nti.
在义释中:“烦恼等”——从“烧恼”之义来说,指贪等烦恼;从“积聚”之义来说,成为果报的五蕴,以及善、不善等诸行与思,都被称为“依怙”,即如此解说。“依怙的舍断”是指部分舍断,“依怙的止息”是指镇伏舍断,“依怙的弃舍”是指正断舍断,“依怙的轻安”是指以果证得的轻安。显示巴利原文
Niddese kilesā cāti upatāpanaṭṭhena rāgādayo kilesā ca rāsaṭṭhena vipākabhūtā pañcakkhandhā ca kusalādiabhisaṅkhārā cetanā ca ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti kathīyanti. Upadhippahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānena, upadhivūpasamaṃ vikkhambhanappahānena, upadhipaṭinissaggaṃ samucchedappahānena upadhipaṭipassaddhaṃ phalenāti.
27 「不仅舍断了苦」等偈颂。此处「aṭṭhitaṃ」意为恭敬地,或持续不断地。「taṃ taṃ namassāmi」意为因此我礼敬那位。「samecca」意为亲近之后。「nāgā」是以此称呼来呼唤世尊而说的。显示巴利原文
27. Na kevalaṃ dukkhameva pahāsi – te cāpīti gāthā. Tattha aṭṭhitanti sakkaccaṃ, sadā vā. Taṃ taṃ namassāmīti tasmā taṃ namassāmi. Sameccāti upagantvā. Nāgāti bhagavantaṃ ālapanto āha.
义释中:「samecca」意为知已,或成为一致之后;「abhisamecca」意为通达之后;「samāgantvā」意为当面见到之后;「abhisamāgantvā」意为走到近处之后;「sammukhā」意为在面前;「āguṃ na karoti」意为不作恶。显示巴利原文
Niddese sameccāti jānitvā, ekato hutvā vā. Abhisameccāti paṭivijjhitvā. Samāgantvāti sammukhā hutvā. Abhisamāgantvāti samīpaṃ gantvā. Sammukhāti sammukhe. Āguṃ na karotīti pāpaṃ na karoti.
28 此时,虽然那位婆罗门已了知「世尊确实已舍断苦」,世尊却不以自身为例,而以一个已舍断苦的人来教诫他,故说「yaṃ brāhmaṇa」等偈颂。其含义为:你应了知那位自证者——「此人因除去诸恶,故称婆罗门;因通达诸吠陀,故称明觉者;因无所执着,故称无所者;因不染着于欲界与诸有,故称于欲有中无著者。」他确实已渡此暴流,抵达彼岸,内心无碍,亦无渴爱。显示巴利原文
28. Idāni naṃ bhagavā ‘‘addhā hi bhagavā pahāsi dukkha’’nti evaṃ tena brāhmaṇena viditopi attānaṃ anupanetvāva pahīnadukkhena puggalena ovadanto ‘‘yaṃ brāhmaṇa’’nti gāthamāha. Tassattho – yaṃ taṃ abhijānanto ‘‘ayaṃ bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇo, vedehi gatattā vedagū, kiñcanābhāvā akiñcano, kāmesu ca bhavesu ca asattattā kāmabhave asatto’’ti jaññā jāneyyāsi. Addhā hi so oghamimaṃ atāri, tiṇṇo ca pāraṃ akhilo akaṅkho.
在义释中:「贪所执」即贪的障碍。像「嗔所执」等,也同理可知。「已度欲流」依不来道成就;「已度有流」依阿拉汉道成就;「已度见流」依入流道成就;「已度无明流」依阿拉汉道成就。「已度轮回途」,是说依善业与不善业的差别而度越。此外,「已出离」依第一道成就;「已度脱」依第二道成就;「已度越」依第三道成就;「已完全度越」依第四道成就;「已度」依果证成就。显示巴利原文
Niddese rāgakiñcananti rāgapalibodhaṃ. Dosakiñcanantiādipi eseva nayo. Kāmoghaṃ tiṇṇo anāgāmimaggena. Bhavoghaṃ tiṇṇo arahattamaggena. Diṭṭhoghaṃ tiṇṇo sotāpattimaggena. Avijjoghaṃ tiṇṇo arahattamaggena. Saṃsārapathaṃ tiṇṇo kusalākusalakammappabhedenāti. Uttiṇṇo paṭhamamaggena. Nittiṇṇo dutiyamaggena. Atikkanto tatiyamaggena. Samatikkanto catutthamaggena.Vītivatto phalena.
29 再者,「vidvā ca yo」这一偈颂中,「idha」是指:于此教法中,或于此身之中。「visajjā」的意思是:舍弃之后。显示巴利原文
29. Kiñca bhiyyo – vidvā ca yoti gāthā. Tattha idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane, attabhāve vā. Visajjāti vosajjitvā.
在义释中:「sajja」指放弃,「visajja」指舍弃。其余各处皆明了易知。如此,世尊亦以阿拉汉果为究竟而宣说此经。说法终了时,如前所说,便实现了法的证悟。显示巴利原文
Niddese sajjanti muñcanaṃ. Visajjanti vosajjanaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva. Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi. Desanāpariyosāne ca vuttasadiso eva dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
第五经:《陶他咖童子经》义释注释显示巴利原文
5. Dhotakamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
30 在第五《陶他咖经》中,「vācābhikaṅkhāmī」意为‘我渴望话语’。「sikkhe nibbānamattano」意为‘为了自心贪等烦恼的息灭,应当修学增上戒等。’《义释》中并无新的内容。显示巴利原文
30. Pañcame dhotakasutte – vācābhikaṅkhāmīti vācaṃ abhikaṅkhāmi. Sikkhe nibbānamattanoti attano rāgādīnaṃ nibbānatthāya adhisīlādīni sikkheyya. Niddese apubbaṃ natthi.
「iti」(这样)意为‘从我的口中说出’。显示巴利原文
Itoti mama mukhato.
在义释中:“ātappan(热勤)”意为烧尽烦恼;“ussāhan(努力)”意为不退转;“ussoḷhī(勇猛)”意为强劲的精进;“thāman(力)”意为不懈怠;“dhiti(坚忍)”意为持续安住;“vīriyaṃ karohi(应行精进)”即应策励精进;“chandaṃ janehi(应生起欲)”即应激发意乐。显示巴利原文
Niddese ātappanti kilesatāpanaṃ. Ussāhanti asaṅkocaṃ. Ussoḷhīnti balavavīriyaṃ. Thāmanti asithilaṃ. Dhitinti dhāraṇaṃ. Vīriyaṃ karohīti parakkamaṃ karohi. Chandaṃ janehīti ruciṃ uppādehi.
32 如此说已,欢喜的陶他咖赞叹世尊,请求从疑惑中解脱,即诵出“passāmahaṃ(我看见)”此偈。其中,“passāmahaṃ devamanussaloke(我在天与人世间看见)”意为:我于天及人世间得见。“taṃ taṃ namassāmi(我礼敬彼)”意为:我礼敬如是之人。“pamuñca”意为:请令解脱。显示巴利原文
32. Evaṃ vutte attamano dhotako bhagavantaṃ abhitthavamāno kathaṃkathāpamokkhaṃ yācanto ‘‘passāmaha’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha passāmahaṃ devamanussaloketi passāmi ahaṃ devamanussaloke. Taṃ taṃ namassāmīti taṃ evarūpaṃ taṃ namassāmi. Pamuñcāti pamocehi.
在义释中:“paccekabuddhā(独觉佛)”意为:各自缘种种所缘,独自觉悟四圣谛而得通达者。“sīhasīho(狮中之狮)”意为:以无所怖畏故,于诸狮子中最为殊胜。“nāganāgo(龙象中之龙象)”意为:以无烦恼故,或以广大故,于诸龙象中最为殊胜。“gaṇigaṇī(有众者中之有众者)”意为:于拥有徒众者中,最胜有众。“munimunī(牟尼中之牟尼)”意为:于具智慧者中,最胜牟尼。“rājarājā(王中之王)”即诸王中最殊胜者。“muñca maṃ(请解开我)”即请救度我;“pamuñca maṃ(请遍解脱我)”即以种种方式救度我;“mocehi maṃ(请释放我)”即请令我脱离;“pamocehi maṃ(请遍释放我)”即请极大程度地令我脱离;“uddhara maṃ(请拔出我)”即把我从轮回的泥沼中拔出,安置于干地;“samuddhara maṃ(请正拔出我)”即正确地拔出后,将我安置于干地;“vuṭṭhāpehi(请使起立)”即令我出离疑之箭。显示巴利原文
Niddese paccekabuddhāti taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ catusaccaṃ sayameva buddhā paṭivedhappattāti paccekabuddhā. Sīhasīhoti achambhitaṭṭhena sīhānaṃ atisīho. Nāganāgoti nikkilesaṭṭhena, mahantaṭṭhena vā nāgānaṃ atināgo. Gaṇigaṇīti gaṇavantānaṃ atīva gaṇavā. Munimunīti ñāṇavantānaṃ atīva ñāṇavā. Rājarājāti uttamarājā. Muñca manti mocehi maṃ. Pamuñca manti nānāvidhena muñcehi maṃ. Mocehi manti sithilaṃ karohi maṃ. Pamocehi manti atīva sithilaṃ karohi maṃ. Uddhara manti maṃ saṃsārapaṅkā uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhāpehi. Samuddhara manti sammā uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhāpehi maṃ. Vuṭṭhāpehīti vicikicchāsallato apanetvā visuṃ karaṇavasena uṭṭhāpehi.
33 接着,世尊为显示唯依自力方能从疑惑中解脱、渡越瀑流之理,说了“nāhaṃ”(我不)这首偈颂。其中,「nāhaṃ sahissāmi」(我将不能)意思是“我不能,我做不到”,这即是说“我不努力”。「pamocanāya」(为令解脱)是为了令彼解脱。「kathaṃkathin」(有疑者)指心有疑惑之人。「taresi」(你将度越)意为你应当度越。显示巴利原文
33. Athassa bhagavā attādhīnameva kathaṃkathāpamokkhaṃ oghataraṇamukhena dassento ‘‘nāha’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha nāhaṃ sahissāmīti ahaṃ na sahissāmi na sakkomi. Na vāyamissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Pamocanāyāti pamocetuṃ. Kathaṃkathinti sakaṅkhaṃ. Taresīti tareyyāsi.
在义注中,「na īhāmi」(我不勤求)指我不付出努力。「na samīhāmi」(我不极勤求)指我不作极度的努力。「assaddhe puggale」(于无信之人)指对三宝没有信心的人。「acchandike」(于无欲者)指对道果之利无所乐求之人。「kusīte」(于懈怠者)指缺少禅定之人。「hīnavīriye」(于精进下劣者)指毫无精进之人。「appaṭipajjamāne」(于不修行者)指不从事修行实践之人。显示巴利原文
Niddese na īhāmīti payogaṃ na karomi. Na samīhāmīti atīva payogaṃ na karomi. Assaddhe puggaleti ratanattaye saddhāvirahite puggale. Acchandiketi maggaphalatthaṃ rucivirahite. Kusīteti samādhivirahite. Hīnavīriyeti nibbīriye. Appaṭipajjamāneti paṭipattiyā na paṭipajjamāne.
34 如此说时,愈发欢喜的陶他咖称赞世尊,请求教诫,便诵出“请教导,梵天!”这首偈颂。其中,「brahme」(梵天)是对最殊胜者的称呼。他以这个名号称呼世尊,说道“请教导,梵天!”。「vivekadhammaṃ」(远离之法)指一切行悉皆远离的涅槃法。「abyāpajjamāno」(未遭厄)指不会遭遇种种灾厄。「idheva santo」(即于此住立)意即就在此处安住。「asito」(不依止)即不执著。显示巴利原文
34. Evaṃ vutte attamanataro dhotako bhagavantaṃ abhitthavamāno anusāsaniṃ yācanto ‘‘anusāsa brahme’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha brahmeti seṭṭhavacanametaṃ. Tena bhagavantaṃ āmantayamāno āha ‘‘anusāsa brahme’’ti. Vivekadhammanti sabbasaṅkhāravivekaṃ nibbānadhammaṃ. Abyāpajjamānoti nānappakārakaṃ anāpajjamāno. Idheva santoti idheva samāno. Asitoti anissito.
35-7 接下来的两首偈颂,其解释方式与《梅塔故经》相同。唯一的不同在于:该处作“kevalañhi dhammaṃ”(唯法),此处则作“idha santi”(住于此)。第三首偈颂的前半部分,也与该处所说相同。后半部分中,“saṅgo”(执着)指执取之处,即“laggana”(粘着)的意思。其余各处皆显了易解。显示巴利原文
35-7. Ito parā dve gāthā mettagūsutte vuttanayā eva. Kevalañhi tattha dhammaṃ, idha santinti ayaṃ viseso. Tatiyagāthāyapi pubbaḍḍhaṃ tattha vuttanayameva. Aparaḍḍhe saṅgoti sajjanaṭṭhānaṃ, laggananti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
如此,世尊同样以阿拉汉果为顶点开示了此经;开示结束时,亦如前述,成就了法现观。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca vuttasadiso eva dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
6. 《优婆西瓦青年经》的义注注释显示巴利原文
6. Upasīvamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
38 38. 第六优婆西瓦经中——「大流」指大的暴流。「不依」指不依附于补特伽罗或法。「我不能」指我不能。「所缘」指依止。「依于某者」指依止于某种法或某位补特伽罗。显示巴利原文
38. Chaṭṭhe upasīvasutte – mahantamoghanti mahantaṃ oghaṃ. Anissitoti puggalaṃ vā dhammaṃ vā anallīno. No visahāmīti na sakkomi. Ārammaṇanti nissayaṃ. Yaṃ nissitoti yaṃ dhammaṃ vā puggalaṃ vā nissito.
依义释:欲流——以不还道渡越欲流;有流——以阿拉汉道渡越有流;见流——以预流道渡越见流;无明流——以阿拉汉道渡越无明流,应渡。‘从释迦族出家者’:是为显示世尊出身高贵家族而说。‘所缘’:指展开而安住之处。‘依止’:指依附。‘亲依止’:指无所依凭。显示巴利原文
Niddese kāmoghanti anāgāmimaggena kāmoghaṃ. Arahattamaggena bhavoghaṃ. Sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhoghaṃ. Arahattamaggena avijjoghaṃ tareyyaṃ. Sakyakulā pabbajitoti bhagavato uccākulaparidīpanavasena vuttaṃ. Ālambaṇanti avattharitvā ṭhānaṃ. Nissayanti allīyanaṃ. Upanissayanti apassayanaṃ.
39 39. 如今,那位婆罗门虽已证得无所有处定,却不知彼虽是寂静,仍为依止。因此,世尊为显示彼依止及更上的出离道,而宣说了‘无所有’等偈。其中,‘观察者’:即正念进入彼无所有处定,出定后以无常等相观察。‘以“无所有”为依止’:即取彼以‘无任何’而转起的等至为所缘。‘应渡流’:指从彼时起转起的观,随宜渡越四种流。‘种种疑惑’:即种种疑惑。‘爱尽、无上大观察者’:即日夜令涅槃显著而观察。以此,世尊为他开示了现法安乐住。显示巴利原文
39. Idāni yasmā brāhmaṇo ākiñcaññāyatanalābhī tañca santampi nissayaṃ na jānāti. Tenassa bhagavā tañca nissayaṃ uttariñca niyyānapathaṃ dassento ‘‘ākiñcañña’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha pekkhamānoti taṃ ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ sato samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhahitvā ca aniccādivasena passamāno. Natthīti nissāyāti taṃ ‘‘natthi kiñcī’’ti pavattaṃ samāpattiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Tarassu oghanti tato pabhuti pavattāya vipassanāya yathānurūpaṃ catubbidhampi oghaṃ tarassu. Kathāhīti kathaṃkathāhi. Taṇhakkhayaṃ nattamahābhipassāti rattindivaṃ nibbānaṃ vibhūtaṃ katvā passa. Etenassa diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṃ kathesi.
依义释:‘令彼识无有’:即以空为所缘,令已转起的广大识归于无有,使成无。‘令消散’:以种种方式使归于无。‘令消失’:使归于不可见。‘见“无任何”’:谓连彼识之坏灭亦不存在,如是而见。显示巴利原文
Niddese taññeva viññāṇaṃ abhāvetīti ākāsālambaṇaṃ katvā pavattamahaggataviññāṇaṃ abhāveti abhāvaṃ gameti. Vibhāvetīti vividhā abhāvaṃ gameti. Antaradhāpetīti adassanaṃ gameti. Natthi kiñcīti passatīti antamaso bhaṅgamattampissa natthīti passati.
40 40. 此时,那位婆罗门听闻“舍弃欲”后,观察到自己已通过镇伏而断除了诸欲,便宣说了“于一切”等偈。其中,“舍弃其他”:指舍弃了其他六种较低的等至。“于想解脱中,最上”:指七种想解脱中最上的无所有处。“他是否安住彼处,不再随转?”:这位补特伽罗在无所有处梵天世界,是否安住而不离去?他如此询问。显示巴利原文
40. Idāni ‘‘kāme pahāyā’’ti sutvā vikkhambhanavasena attanā pahīne kāme sampassamāno ‘‘sabbesū’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha hitvāmaññanti aññaṃ tato heṭṭhā chabbidhampi samāpattiṃ hitvā. Saññāvimokkhe parameti sattasu saññāvimokkhesu uttame ākiñcaññāyatane. Tiṭṭhe nu so tattha anānuyāyīti so puggalo tattha ākiñcaññāyatanabrahmaloke avigacchamāno tiṭṭheyya nūti pucchati.
在义释中——“不分离”:即不被分离。“不离去”:即不遭到离别。“不消失”:即不遭到消失。“不退减”:即不遭到中途退减。显示巴利原文
Niddese aviccamānoti aviyujjamāno. Avigacchamānoti viyogaṃ anāpajjamāno. Anantaradhāyamānoti antaradhānaṃ anāpajjamāno. Aparihāyamānoti anantarā parihānaṃ anāpajjamāno.
41-2 41-42. 当时,世尊仅允许了六十劫千的住处,便说出第四偈。如此,他听闻了在那里的住处后,为询问其常住与断灭的状况,而说“若安立”偈。其中,“纵经多年”:指无量年,即许多年的累积。也有读作“Pūgampi vassānī”。此处因格的变易,应将属格转为主格,或者说“pūga”即是众多的意思。也有读作“Pūgānī”的,但前一种读法最为完备。“即于此中,他清凉、解脱”:意思是那位有情就在无所有处,从种种苦解脱,达到清凉状态,获得了涅槃,长久存在,意思是‘常恒而住’。“那样者的识,是否死灭?”:这是问‘或者那样者的识,不执取而般涅槃吗?’这是在询问断灭,同时也询问他的结生:‘或者,是为了结生而存在吗?’显示巴利原文
41-2. Athassa bhagavā saṭṭhikappasahassamattakaṃyeva ṭhānaṃ anujānanto catutthaṃ gāthamāha. Evaṃ tassa tattha ṭhānaṃ sutvā idānissa sassatucchedabhāvaṃ pucchanto ‘‘tiṭṭhe ce’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha pūgampi vassānanti anekasaṅkhyampi vassānaṃ, gaṇanarāsinti attho. ‘‘Pūgampi vassānī’’tipi pāṭho. Tattha vibhattibyattayena sāmivacanassa paccattavacanaṃ kātabbaṃ, pūganti vā etassa bahūnīti attho vattabbo. ‘‘Pūgānī’’ti vāpi paṭhanti, purimapāṭhoyeva sabbasundaro. Tattheva so sīti siyā vimuttoti so puggalo tatthevākiñcaññāyatane nānādukkhehi vimutto sītibhāvappatto bhaveyya, nibbānappatto sassato hutvā tiṭṭheyyāti adhippāyo. Cavetha viññāṇaṃ tathāvidhassāti ‘‘udāhu tathāvidhassa viññāṇaṃ anupādāya parinibbāyeyyā’’ti ucchedaṃ pucchati, ‘‘paṭisandhiggahaṇatthaṃ vāpi bhaveyyā’’ti paṭisandhimpi tassa pucchati.
「他的识死灭」是指他在无所有处生起的识,到达死亡。「断灭」即成为断灭。「消亡」即到达消亡。「不存在」即进入无有。「再生者」是指通过结生而再生的人。显示巴利原文
Tassa viññāṇaṃ caveyyāti tassa ākiñcaññāyatane uppannassa viññāṇaṃ cutiṃ pāpuṇeyya. Ucchijjeyyāti ucchedaṃ bhaveyya. Vinasseyyāti vināsaṃ pāpuṇeyya. Na bhaveyyāti abhāvaṃ gameyya. Upapannassāti paṭisandhivasena upapannassa.
43 这时,世尊为了说明生于该处的圣弟子不执取而般涅槃,不落入断灭见与常见,而说「如火焰」偈。其中,「归趣于义」(atthaṃ paleti)意为趣向于义。「不进入计数」(na upeti saṅkhaṃ)即不进入‘去往某某方’这样的称呼。如此,牟尼从名身解脱:正如这样,在那里生起的有学牟尼,先前已从色身解脱,在那里生起第四道后,由于对法身的遍知,又从名身解脱,成为俱分解脱的漏尽者,趣入无取涅槃之义,不进入‘刹帝利或婆罗门’等的计数。显示巴利原文
43. Athassa bhagavā ucchedasassataṃ anupagamma tatthupapannassa ariyasāvakassa anupādāya parinibbānaṃ dassento ‘‘accī yathā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha atthaṃ paletīti atthaṃ gacchati. Na upeti saṅkhanti ‘‘asukaṃ nāma disaṃ gato’’ti vohāraṃ na gacchati. Evaṃ munī nāmakāyā vimuttoti evaṃ tattha uppanno sekkhamuni pakatiyā pubbeva rūpakāyā vimutto, tattha catutthamaggaṃ nibbattetvā dhammakāyassa pariññātattā puna nāmakāyāpi vimutto ubhatobhāgavimutto khīṇāsavo hutvā anupādānibbānasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkhaṃ ‘‘khattiyo vā brāhmaṇo vā’’ti evamādikaṃ.
在《义释》中,「被摇动」(khittā)指被移动;「被举起」(ukkhittā)指过度移动;「被推动」(nunnā)指被弹开;「被除去」(paṇunnā)指被远离;「被制止」(khambhitā)指被阻止;「被镇伏」(vikkhambhitā)指不被置于近处。显示巴利原文
Niddese khittāti calitā. Ukkhittāti aticalitā. Nunnāti papphoṭiyā. Paṇunnāti dūrīkatā. Khambhitāti paṭikkamāpitā. Vikkhambhitāti na santike katā.
44 44. 此时,听闻了“归于义”之后,他如理作意其义,而诵出“他已入灭”一偈。其意为:他已入灭?还是不存在?抑或是恒常健康、不变易之法?牟尼,请为我善加说明。何以故?因为你已了知此法。显示巴利原文
44. Idāni ‘‘atthaṃ paletī’’ti sutvā tassa yoniso atthamasallakkhento ‘‘atthaṅgato so’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho – so atthaṅgato udāhu natthi, udāhu ve sassatiyā sassatabhāvena arogo avipariṇāmadhammo soti evaṃ taṃ me munī sādhu byākarohi. Kiṃkāraṇā? Tathā hi te vidito esa dhammoti.
在义释中:“灭”(niruddho)谓达至灭;“断”(ucchinno)谓相续断绝;“亡”(vinaṭṭho)谓达至消亡。显示巴利原文
Niddese niruddhoti nirodhaṃ patto. Ucchinnoti ucchinnasantāno. Vinaṭṭhoti vināsaṃ patto.
45 45. 那时,世尊为显示彼不可言说,而说“趣入灭者”偈。其中,“趣入灭者”指无取著般涅槃者。“无有量”指无色等之量。“以何说他”指以贪等而称说他。“于一切法”指于一切蕴等诸法。显示巴利原文
45. Athassa bhagavā tathā avattabbataṃ dassento ‘‘atthaṅgatassā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha atthaṅgatassāti anupādāparinibbutassa. Na pamāṇamatthīti rūpādipamāṇaṃ natthi. Yena naṃ vajjunti yena rāgādinā naṃ vadeyyuṃ. Sabbesu dhammesūti sabbesu khandhādidhammesu.
在《义释》中,所谓“增语”,如“增吉祥”、“增财富”等,是仅依言说而施设的,故称为增语。增语的言说方式,称为增语道。“比丘们!所谓‘他们造作’,因此称为‘行’。”(《相应部》)如此论定之后,依于因缘而说出的表述,称为词(nirutti)。词的言说方式,称为词道。“寻、伺、思量”(《法集论》)等,以种种方式施设,所以称为施设。施设的言说方式,称为施设道。其余各处都很明了。显示巴利原文
Niddese adhivacanāni cāti sirivaḍḍhako dhanavaḍḍhakotiādayo hi vacanamattaṃyeva adhikāraṃ katvā pavattā adhivacanā nāma. Adhivacanānaṃ pathā adhivacanapathā nāma. ‘‘Abhisaṅkharontīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā saṅkhārā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.79) evaṃ niddhāritvā sahetukaṃ katvā vuccamānā abhilāpā nirutti nāma. Niruttīnaṃ pathā niruttipathā nāma. ‘‘Takko vitakko saṅkappo’’ti (dha. sa. 7) evaṃ tena tena pakārena paññāpanato paññatti nāma. Paññattīnaṃ pathā paññattipathā (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 101-108) nāma. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
如是,世尊亦以阿拉汉果为顶点而开示此经。开示终了时,法现观即如前所说般出现。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca vuttasadisova dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
第七 难陀青年经的义注解释显示巴利原文
7. Nandamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
46 46. 第七《难陀经》中,第一首偈颂的意义——世间里的刹帝利等人,针对邪命外道、尼干陀等,说“世间有牟尼”。此中“如何”之意为:他们究竟是因为具有等至智等智慧,而说牟尼是“智慧成就者”吗?他们是那样说的,还是说牟尼是以种种形式的、被称为粗陋生活的生存方式而成就的呢?显示巴利原文
46. Sattame nandasutte – paṭhamagāthāyattho – loke khattiyādayojanā ājīvakanigaṇṭhādike sandhāya ‘‘santi loke munayo’’ti vadanti. Tayidaṃ kathaṃsūti kiṃ nu kho te samāpattiñāṇādinā ñāṇena upapannattā ñāṇūpapannaṃ muni no vadanti, evaṃvidhaṃ nu vadanti, udāhu ve nānappakārakena lūkhajīvitasaṅkhātena jīvitenūpapannanti.
义注中,“以八等至智”是指与初禅等八等至相应的智慧。“以五神通智”是指宿住等能了知的智慧。显示巴利原文
Niddese aṭṭhasamāpattiñāṇena vāti paṭhamajjhānādiaṭṭhasamāpattisampayuttañāṇena vā. Pañcābhiññāñāṇena vāti pubbenivāsādijānanañāṇena vā.
47 47. 那时,世尊否定了那两者后,为阐明牟尼而宣说了“非以见……”的偈颂。显示巴利原文
47. Athassa bhagavā tadubhayampi paṭikkhipitvā muniṃ dassento ‘‘na diṭṭhiyā’’ti gāthamāha.
48 48. 现在,为消除持“以见等得清净”论者的疑惑,他问:“那些无论什么人……”。在此,“以种种方式”是指以好奇、吉祥等方式。在此,“依之而行者”是指依那种方式,以有身见为防护而住的人。显示巴利原文
48. Idāni ‘‘diṭṭhādīhi suddhī’’ti vadantānaṃ vāde kaṅkhāpahānatthaṃ ‘‘ye kecime’’ti pucchati. Tattha anekarūpenāti kotūhalamaṅgalādināpi. Tattha yatā carantāti tattha sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā guttā viharantā.
49 49. 那时,世尊为了指出那样的清净其实并不存在,便诵出第四首偈颂。显示巴利原文
49. Athassa tathā suddhiabhāvaṃ dīpento bhagavā catutthaṃ gāthamāha.
50 50. 如此闻说“尚未度脱”之后,此时他欲知谁已度脱,便问:“哪些人……”那时,世尊便以度脱瀑流为门,为开示已度脱生与老等者,诵出第六首偈颂。显示巴利原文
50. Evaṃ ‘‘nātariṃsū’’ti sutvā idāni yo atari, taṃ sotukāmo ‘‘ye kecime’’ti pucchati. Athassa bhagavā oghatiṇṇamukhena jātijarātiṇṇe dassento chaṭṭhaṃ gāthamāha.
51 51. 其中,“nivutā”(被覆盖)指被笼罩、被完全缠缚。“Ye sīdhā”(那些 sīdha)即是“ye su idha”,这里的“su”仅是一个小品词。“taṇhaṃ pariññāya”(遍知渴爱)指以三种遍知彻底了知渴爱。其余各处,依前已说之理,义甚明了。显示巴利原文
51. Tattha nivutāti ovuṭā pariyonaddhā. Ye sīdhāti ye su idha, ettha ca su-iti nipātamattaṃ. Taṇhaṃ pariññāyāti tīhi pariññāhi taṇhaṃ parijānitvā. Sesaṃ sabbattha pubbe vuttanayattā pākaṭameva.
52 如此,世尊以阿拉汉果为顶峰圆满了这次开示。开示结束时,难陀对世尊的教导生起欢喜,诵出“我对此欢喜……”的偈颂。此处也同样发生了如前面所说的法现观。显示巴利原文
52. Evaṃ bhagavā arahattanikūṭeneva desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi, desanāpariyosāne pana nando bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandamāno etābhinandāmīti gāthamāha. Idhāpi ca pubbe vuttasadiso eva dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
8. 《黑马咖青年经义释》注释显示巴利原文
8. Hemakamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
53 在第八经《黑马咖经》中——“ye me pubbe viyākaṃsu”(先前曾为我解说的人们):是指婆和利等人,他们以前曾为他解说各自的见解。“huraṃ gotamasāsanā”(异于乔达摩的教法):指乔达摩教法出现之前的那些教说。“sabbaṃ taṃ takkavaḍḍhanaṃ”(这一切都只是寻思的增长):所有那些都只会增长欲寻等不善寻思。显示巴利原文
53. Aṭṭhame hemakasutte – ye me pubbe viyākaṃsūti ye bāvariādayo pubbe mayhaṃ sakaṃ laddhiṃ viyākaṃsu. Huraṃ gotamasāsanāti gotamasāsanato pubbataraṃ. Sabbaṃ taṃ takkavaḍḍhananti sabbaṃ taṃ kāmavitakkādivaḍḍhanaṃ.
“Ye caññe tassa ācariyā”(以及他的其他老师):指除了前面提到的,还有别的一些教导婆和利行仪的老师。“Te sakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ”(他们各自之见):那些老师各自持有的见解。“Sakaṃ khantiṃ”(各自之认可):指他们各自所认可、所容忍的。“Sakaṃ ruciṃ”(各自之喜好):指他们各自内心的偏好。“Vitakkavaḍḍhanaṃ”(寻之增长):即欲寻等种种寻的生起与转起。“Saṅkappavaḍḍhanaṃ”(思惟之增长):即欲思惟等的不断增长。这两个词是总括性的提法。接下来,为了具体显示欲寻等各自的面貌,便通过“kāmavitakkavaḍḍhanaṃ”(增长欲寻)这样的方式,开示了九种寻。显示巴利原文
Ye caññe tassa ācariyāti ye ca aññe tassa bāvariyassa ācāre sikkhāpakā ācariyā. Te sakaṃ diṭṭhinti te ācariyā attano diṭṭhiṃ. Sakaṃ khantinti attano khamanaṃ. Sakaṃ rucinti attano rocanaṃ. Vitakkavaḍḍhananti kāmavitakkādivitakkānaṃ uppādanaṃ punappunaṃ pavattanaṃ. Saṅkappavaḍḍhananti kāmasaṅkappādīnaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ. Imāni dve padāni sabbasaṅgāhikavasena vuttāni. Idāni kāmavitakkādike sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmavitakkavaḍḍhana’’ntiādinā nayena navavitakke dassesi.
54 「Taṇhānigghātanaṃ」(渴爱的摧灭):指渴爱的彻底灭尽。显示巴利原文
54.Taṇhānigghātananti taṇhāvināsanaṃ.
55-6 接着,世尊为了开示此法,便说了「Idha」(在此)等两首偈颂。其中,「Etadaññāya ye satā」(了知此者,彼具念者):是指他们依「一切诸行无常」等方式修观,渐次了知这永恒之句——涅槃,并通过身随观念住等而成为具念者。「Diṭṭhadhammābhinibbutā」(现法般涅槃者):由于已证知法,于现前生命中,依贪等烦恼的灭尽而般涅槃。其余内容,各处皆易明了。显示巴利原文
55-6. Athassa bhagavā taṃ dhammaṃ ācikkhanto ‘‘idhā’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha etadaññāya ye satāti etaṃ nibbānaṃ padamaccutaṃ ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinā (dha. pa. 277; theragā. 676; kathā. 753) nayena vipassantā anupubbena jānitvā ye kāyānupassanāsatiādīhi satā. Diṭṭhadhammābhinibbutāti viditadhammattā diṭṭhadhammā ca rāgādinibbānena ca abhinibbutā. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
就这样,世尊同样以阿拉汉果为究竟而开示此经。开示结束时,与前面诸经一样,亦出现了对法的现证。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca pubbasadiso eva dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
9. 托黛雅青年经义释注显示巴利原文
9. Todeyyamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
57 在第九部《托黛雅经》中,“他的解脱是怎样的?”(vimokkho tassa kīdiso)即问:他所应希求的解脱,是何等样貌?显示巴利原文
57. Navame todeyyasutte – vimokkho tassa kīdisoti tassa kīdiso vimokkho icchitabboti pucchati.
58 此时,为表明他并无其他解脱,世尊诵出第二首偈颂。其中,“他没有别的解脱”(vimokkho tassa nāparo)意即他并无其他解脱。显示巴利原文
58. Idānissa aññavimokkhābhāvaṃ dassento bhagavā dutiyaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha vimokkho tassa nāparoti tassa añño vimokkho natthi.
59 虽已说“爱尽即是解脱”,他仍未善察其义,因而复问:“他是无期望者,还是有所期望?”(nirāsaso so uda āsasāno)。其中,“还是以慧思量”(uda paññakappī)意为:抑或他以等至智等智慧,推量着爱取或见取?显示巴利原文
59. Evaṃ ‘‘taṇhakkhayo eva vimokkho’’ti vuttepi tamatthaṃ asallakkhento ‘‘nirāsaso so uda āsasāno’’ti puna pucchati. Tattha uda paññakappīti udāhu samāpattiñāṇādinā ñāṇena taṇhākappaṃ vā diṭṭhikappaṃ vā kappayati.
60 于是,世尊为了向他阐明此义,诵出了第四首偈颂。其中,「于欲有」(kāmabhave)即指在欲与有之中。显示巴利原文
60. Athassa bhagavā taṃ ācikkhanto catutthaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha kāmabhaveti kāme ca bhave ca.
「于色无所希求」:对于由四种生起因缘所生的色所缘,不以欲贪而有所盼望。对于声等所缘,也是同样的道理。以障碍的意义来说,贪本身即是「系缚物」,称为「贪系缚物」;或是以令人骄慢的意义来说。对于「嗔系缚物」等,也是同样的道理。其余各处,文义都很清楚明了。显示巴利原文
Rūpe nāsīsatīti catusamuṭṭhānike rūpārammaṇe chandarāgavasena na pattheti. Saddhādīsupi eseva nayo. Palibodhaṭṭhena rāgo eva kiñcanaṃ rāgakiñcanaṃ madanaṭṭhena vā. Dosakiñcanādīsupi eseva nayo. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
就这样,世尊同样以阿拉汉果为顶峰,开示了这部经。在开示结束时,对法的现观也如前所述一般发生了。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca pubbasadiso eva dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
10. 劫青年经义释注显示巴利原文
10. Kappamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
61 在第十品“劫经”的解释中——‘于中间流转’:因无有能了知前际与后际尽头的智慧,故说于中间流转。‘住立’:指住立着的众生。‘如是,此苦便不再有’:意为如此,此苦便不再生起。显示巴利原文
61. Dasame kappasuttaniddese – majjhe sarasminti purimapacchimakoṭipaññāṇābhāvato majjhabhūte saṃsāreti vuttaṃ hoti. Tiṭṭhatanti tiṭṭhamānānaṃ. Yathāyidaṃ nāparaṃ siyāti yathā idaṃ dukkhaṃ puna na bhaveyya.
‘来’:从前际来到此处。‘去’:从此处去往他世。‘来与去’:依此二者而说。‘时’:死时。‘趣’:再生。‘有与有’:从有到有。‘死’:从有中死去。‘再生’:死者再投生。‘诞生’:出现。‘破坏’:诸蕴的破坏。‘生’:出生。‘老’:衰败。‘死’:命根的舍离。‘前际不可知’:前际不可得、不可知。后际亦然。显示巴利原文
Āgamananti pubbantato idhāgamanaṃ. Gamananti ito paralokagamanaṃ. Gamanāgamananti tadubhayavasena vuttaṃ. Kālanti maraṇakālaṃ. Gatīti nibbatti. Bhavābhavoti bhavato bhavo. Cuti cāti bhavato cavanañca. Upapatti cāti cutassa upapatti ca. Nibbatti cāti pātubhāvo ca. Bhedo cāti khandhabhedo ca. Jāti cāti jananañca. Jarā cāti hāni ca. Maraṇañcāti jīvitindriyassa cāgo ca. Purimāpi koṭi na paññāyatīti pubbāpi koṭi natthi na saṃvijjati. Tathā pacchimāpi koṭi.
‘有这么多生’:以此为极限的诸生。‘轮转转动’:在轮回中流转。‘此后不再转’:从此不再流转。‘实无有’:如此,即不存在、不可得。‘hi’为语助词。‘无始’:此轮回无有可知之开端。显示巴利原文
Ettakā jātiyoti etaparamā jātiyo. Vaṭṭaṃ vattīti saṃsārapavatti. Tato paraṃ na vattatīti tato uddhaṃ nappavattati. Hevaṃ natthīti evaṃ natthi na saṃvijjati. Hi-iti nipāto. Anamataggoyanti ayaṃ saṃsāro aviditaggo.
“被无明所覆”:即被无明覆盖。“被渴爱所结缚”:即被名为欲贪的渴爱之结所绑缚。“驰骋”:于欲界中一再奔走。“流转”:于色界与无色界中流转。“领受苦”:体验、感受了身体之苦与内心之苦。“猛利”:深重。“灾祸”:指衰败、毁灭。“增广坟场”:令坟场扩大。“足够”:即恰当。“于一切诸行”:对三界中的一切诸行。“厌离”:生起厌倦。“离贪”:生起离贪。“解脱”:获得解脱。“将再转起轮转”:未来将再转起轮回的流转,即三界之轮转。“此后不复转”:从此以后,未来不再转起轮回的流转。“于生之畏”:因出生而生的畏惧。于老、死等之畏,亦应如是了知。显示巴利原文
Avijjānīvaraṇānanti avijjāya āvaritānaṃ. Taṇhāsaṃyojanānanti kāmarāgasaṅkhātataṇhābandhanabaddhānaṃ. Sandhāvatanti kāmadhātuyā punappunaṃ dhāvantānaṃ. Saṃsaratanti rūpārūpadhātuyā saṃsarantānaṃ. Dukkhaṃ paccanubhūtanti kāyikacetasikadukkhaṃ anubhūtaṃ vinditaṃ. Tibbanti bahalaṃ. Byasananti avaḍḍhi vināso. Kaṭasī vaḍḍhitāti susānavaḍḍhitaṃ. Alamevāti yuttameva . Sabbasaṅkhāresūti tebhūmakasaṅkhāresu. Nibbinditunti ukkaṇṭhituṃ. Virajjitunti virāgaṃ uppādetuṃ. Vimuccitunti mocetuṃ. Vaṭṭaṃ vattissatīti saṃsārapavattaṃ tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ anāgate pavattissati. Tato paraṃ na vattissatīti tato uddhaṃ anāgate saṃsārapavattaṃ nappavattissati. Jātibhayeti jātiṃ paṭicca uppajjanakabhaye. Jarābhayādīsupi eseva nayo.
62-3 62-3. 那时,世尊为阐明此义,诵出后面诸偈。第二首偈颂其义即如所说。第三首偈颂中,“无所有”:指与“有所”相对。“无取”:指与“取着”相对,意即止息了“有所”与“取着”。“无上”:指无有任何匹敌、无可相提并论者,即“最胜者”,是说此义。显示巴利原文
62-3. Athassa bhagavā tamatthaṃ byākaronto uparūparigāthāyo abhāsi. Dutiyagāthā vuttatthāyeva. Tatiyagāthāya akiñcananti kiñcanapaṭipakkhaṃ. Anādānanti ādānapaṭipakkhaṃ, kiñcanādānavūpasamanti vuttaṃ hoti. Anāparanti aparapaṭibhāgadīpavirahitaṃ, seṭṭhanti vuttaṃ hoti.
64 64. 第四首偈颂中,“他们不是魔罗的随从”:意即他们不是魔罗的跟班、侍从、弟子。显示巴利原文
64. Catutthagāthāya na te mārassa paddhagūti te mārassa paddhacarā paricārikā sissā na honti.
“将众人诱入罗网而杀害”,故称魔罗。因从事不善业,故称黑暗。于六欲天中为主宰,故称主。已到不善法之尽头,故称达尽头者。不放过恶人,故称那木支。对失念放逸的众生,犹如其亲属,故称放逸者之亲属。余处皆明了可知。显示巴利原文
Mahājanaṃ pāse niyojetvā māretīti māro. Akusalakamme niyuttattā kaṇho. Chasu devalokesu adhipatittā adhipati. Akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ antaṃ gatattā antagū. Pāpajanaṃ na muñcatīti namuci. Sativippavāsappamattapuggalānaṃ ñātakoti pamattabandhu. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
如是,世尊亦以阿拉汉果为顶点开示此经。说法结束时,法现观如前一般生起。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca pubbasadisova dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
第十一、关于《阇都干耳青年经》的释义注释。显示巴利原文
11. Jatukaṇṇimāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
65 65. 第十一经《阇都干耳经》中:他解释“我闻已,英雄,无欲之欲者”——我通过“彼世尊是……”等方式,闻知这位英雄、于诸欲无欲、为无欲之欲者的佛陀。解释“我为此无欲而来”——我为向无欲的世尊请问而来此。解释“俱生眼”——与生俱来的一切知智之眼。解释“如实”——即如实。解释“请为我开示”——他再次恳求而说。恳求者纵说千遍亦无妨,何况两次?显示巴利原文
65. Ekādasame jatukaṇṇisutte – sutvānahaṃ vīra akāmakāminti ahaṃ ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā (pārā. 1; dī. ni. 1.157, 255, 301; a. ni. 6.10; saṃ. ni. 5.997) nayena vīra kāmānaṃ akāmanato akāmakāmiṃ buddhaṃ sutvā. Akāmamāgamanti nikkāmaṃ bhagavantaṃ pucchituṃ āgatomhi. Sahajanettāti sahajātasabbaññutaññāṇacakkhu . Yathātacchanti yathātathaṃ. Brūhi meti puna yācanto bhaṇati. Yācanto hi sahassakkhattumpi bhaṇeyya, ko pana vādo dvikkhattuṃ.
“世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者”诸词之义如前所述。又因具足明与行,故称「明行足」。其中的“明”,指三明或八明。三明应依《怖畏恐惧经》(中部1.34等)所示之理来理解,八明应依《阿摩昼经》(长部1.254等)来理解。彼经中以观智与意所成神通等六神通作总摄,说明了八明。而“行”者,即戒律仪、守护根门、饮食知量、精进警寤、七善法、四种色界禅那,此十五法应当了知。正是这十五法,因圣弟子依之而行,趣向不死,故称为「行」。如经中所说:“摩诃男,于此,圣弟子具戒……”(中部2.24),全部当依《中部》后五十经所示之理来理解。世尊具足了这些明与行,故得名「明行足」。其中,世尊的明具足圆满了其一切知性,行具足圆满了其大悲悯性。他以一切知性了知一切众生之利与不利,以大悲悯性避开不利,引导至于利,此为明行足之所行。因此,他的弟子们成为善行道者,而非恶行道者,因为那些缺失明行者的弟子们,便如同那些行自我折磨等的人一样(巴拉基嘎义注1.1)。显示巴利原文
Itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddhoti imesaṃ padānaṃ attho heṭṭhā vuttova. Vijjāhi pana caraṇena ca sampannattā vijjācaraṇasampanno. Tattha vijjāti tissopi vijjā aṭṭhapi vijjā. Tisso vijjā bhayabheravasutte (ma. ni. 1.34 ādayo) vuttanayena veditabbā, aṭṭha ambaṭṭhasutte (dī. ni. 1.254 ādayo). Tattha hi vipassanāñāṇena manomayiddhiyā ca saha cha abhiññā pariggahetvā aṭṭha vijjā vuttā. Caraṇanti sīlasaṃvaro indriyesu guttadvāratā bhojane mattaññutā jāgariyānuyogo satta saddhammā cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānānīti ime pannarasa dhammā veditabbā. Imeyeva hi pannarasa dhammā yasmā etehi carati ariyasāvako gacchati amataṃ disaṃ, tasmā ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttā. Yathāha – ‘‘idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sīlavā hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.24) sabbaṃ majjhimapaṇṇāsake vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Bhagavā imāhi vijjāhi iminā ca caraṇena samannāgato, tena vuccati vijjācaraṇasampannoti. Tattha vijjāsampadā bhagavato sabbaññutaṃ pūretvā ṭhitā, caraṇasampadā mahākāruṇikataṃ. So sabbaññutāya sabbasattānaṃ atthānatthaṃ ñatvā mahākāruṇikatāya anatthaṃ parivajjetvā atthe niyojeti, yathā taṃ vijjācaraṇasampanno. Tenassa sāvakā suppaṭipannā honti, no duppaṭipannā, vijjācaraṇavipannānañhi sāvakā attantapādayo viya (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.1).
因善美的行走、到达美好的境地、正确地到达,以及正确地言语,故称「善逝」。盖“行走”亦即“去”。而世尊的行走是善美的、清净的、无过失的。那是什么呢?即是圣道。他以这样的行走,不执著地趣向安稳之境,故因善美的行走而称「善逝」。又因他到达了美好的境地——不死涅槃,故由到达美好境地亦名「善逝」。再者,他正确地去了,即通过各道断尽烦恼后,不再退转。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Sobhanagamanattā sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā sammā gatattā sammā ca gadattā sugato. Gamanampi hi gatanti vuccati. Tañca bhagavato sobhanaṃ parisuddhamanavajjaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Ariyamaggo. Tena hesa gamanena khemaṃ disaṃ asajjamāno gatoti sobhanagamanattā sugato. Sundarañcesa ṭhānaṃ gato amataṃ nibbānanti sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattāpi sugato. Sammā ca gato tena tena maggena pahīne kilese puna apaccāgacchanto. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“通过入流道所断除的烦恼,他不再返回、不再复归、不再退转于这些烦恼,故称「善逝」……乃至……通过阿拉汉道所断除的烦恼,他不再返回、不再复归、不再退转于这些烦恼,故称「善逝」”(大义注38;小义注·慈氏青年问释义27)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti sugato…pe… arahattamaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti sugato’’ti (mahāni. 38; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 27).
或者说,他从燃灯佛足下直至菩提座,圆满了三十种波罗蜜,以正确的修行唯作一切世间的利益与安乐,不落常见、断见、欲乐、自苦等边,以此正去故,是为善逝;又,他正确而言说,于适当之处唯说适当之语,以此正说故,亦为善逝。显示巴利原文
Sammā vā gato dīpaṅkarapādamūlato pabhuti yāva bodhimaṇḍā tāva samatiṃsapāramīpūrikāya sammā paṭipattiyā sabbalokassa hitasukhameva karonto sassataṃ ucchedaṃ kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathanti ime ca ante anupagacchanto gatoti sammā gatattāpi sugato. Sammā cesa gadati yuttaṭṭhānesu yuttameva vācaṃ bhāsatīti sammā gadattāpi sugato.
对此,有部可作证明的经——显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ sādhakasuttaṃ –
如来若知某语不实、不真、无益,且不为他人所爱、所悦,即不说此语。如来若知某语真实、如实,却无益,且不为他人所爱、所悦,亦不说此语。而如来若知某语真实、如实、有益,虽不为他人所爱、所悦,如来善知适时,为宣说彼语而开示。如来若知某语不实、不真、无益,却为他人所爱、所悦,不说此语。如来若知某语真实、如实,却无益,却为他人所爱、所悦,亦不说此语。如来若知某语真实、如实、有益,且为他人所爱、所悦,如来善知适时,为宣说彼语而开示。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsati. Yampi tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, tampi tathāgato vācaṃ na bhāsati. Yañca kho tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāya. Yaṃ tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsati. Yampi tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, tampi tathāgato vācaṃ na bhāsati. Yañca kho tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.86).
也应如此了知:由于如此正确地宣说,故名「善逝」。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sammā gadattāpi sugatoti veditabbo.
由于以一切方式了知世间,故名「世间解」。因为世尊从自性、集、灭、导向灭之道这四方面,以一切方式完全地了知、通达、证悟了世间。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Sabbathā viditalokattā pana lokavidū. So hi bhagavā sabhāvato samudayato nirodhato nirodhūpāyatoti sabbathā lokaṃ avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi. Yathāha –
“贤友,我不说‘通过行走便能了知、见到、到达世间之边际’。贤友,我也不说‘未到达世间边际,便能作苦之边际’。然而,贤友,正是在这具有想、具有心的六尺之躯内,我施设世间、世间的集、世间的灭,以及导向世间灭的行道。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yattha kho, āvuso, na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati na cavati na upapajjati, nāhaṃ taṃ gamanena lokassa antaṃ ñāteyyaṃ daṭṭheyyaṃ patteyyanti vadāmi. Na cāhaṃ, āvuso, appatvāva lokassa antaṃ dukkhassa antakiriyaṃ vadāmi. Api cāhaṃ, āvuso, imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca paññapemi lokasamudayañca lokanirodhañca lokanirodhagāminiñca paṭipadaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni. 4.45).
无论何时,终不能以行至世间尽头;
若未达世间尽头,则无有苦之得出离。
是故,彼了知世间者、具眼者、善慧者——已至世间尽、梵行已立者——
了知世间边际之后,寂静者对此世与彼世皆无渴爱。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Gamanena na pattabbo, lokassanto kudācanaṃ; Na ca appatvā lokantaṃ, dukkhā atthi pamocanaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā have lokavidū sumedho, lokantagū vusitabrahmacariyo; Lokassa antaṃ samitāvi ñatvā, nāsīsatī lokamimaṃ parañcā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni. 4.45);
再者,世间有三种:行世间、有情世间、空间世间。其中,在“一世间:一切有情依食而住”(《无碍解道》1.112)所出之处,应理解为行世间;在“世间是常?还是无常?”(《长部》1.421;《中部》1.269;《相应部》4.416;《分别论》937)所出之处,则为有情世间。显示巴利原文
Api ca – tayo lokā saṅkhāraloko sattaloko okāsalokoti. Tattha ‘‘eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.112) āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhāraloko veditabbo. ‘‘Sassato lokoti vā asassato lokoti vā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.421; ma. ni. 1.269; saṃ. ni. 4.416; vibha. 937) āgataṭṭhāne sattaloko.
日月运行之处,光芒照耀的各方,
在这一千个世间,你的威权运行其中。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharanti, disā bhanti virocamānā; Tāva sahassadhā loko, ettha te vattatī vaso’’ti. (ma. ni. 1.503) –
此处“世间”指空间世间。世尊对此空间世间也完全了知。同样,对于行世间,世尊也完全了知,例如:“一世间:一切有情依食而住。二世间:名与色。三世间:三受。四世间:四食。五世间:五取蕴。六世间:内六处。七世间:七识住。八世间:八世间法。九世间:九有情居。十世间:十处。十二世间:十二处。十八世间:十八界。”显示巴利原文
Āgataṭṭhāne okāsaloko. Tampi bhagavā sabbathā avedi. Tathā hissa ‘‘eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā. Dve lokā nāmañca rūpañca. Tayo lokā tisso vedanā. Cattāro lokā cattāro āhārā. Pañca lokā pañcupādānakkhandhā. Cha lokā cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni. Satta lokā satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. Aṭṭha lokā aṭṭha lokadhammā. Nava lokā nava sattāvāsā. Dasa lokā dasāyatanāni. Dvādasa lokā dvādasāyatanāni. Aṭṭhārasalokā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.112) ayaṃ saṅkhāralokopi sabbathā vidito.
然而,因为世尊了知一切众生的习性、随眠、行为与意乐,了知他们是少尘垢还是多尘垢、是利根还是钝根、有善行相还是恶行相、易受教还是难受教、有能力还是无能力,所以他对于有情世间也完全了知。如同了知有情世间一样,空间世间也同样了知。例如,他了知一个轮围世界长度与宽度为一百二十万三千四百五十由旬,其周长——显示巴利原文
Yasmā panesa sabbesampi sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānāti, anusayaṃ jānāti, caritaṃ jānāti, adhimuttiṃ jānāti, apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye, svākāre dvākāre, suviññāpaye duviññāpaye, bhabbe abhabbe satte jānāti. Tasmāssa sattalokopi sabbathā vidito. Yathā ca sattaloko, evaṃ okāsalokopi. Tathā hesa ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ āyāmato ca vitthārato ca yojanānaṃ dvādasa satasahassāni catutiṃsa satāni ca paññāsañca yojanāni. Parikkhepato –
总计十万,乘以三十六为周长;
再增一万,及二百五十。
显示巴利原文 Sabbaṃ satasahassāni, chattiṃsa parimaṇḍalaṃ; Dasa ceva sahassāni, aḍḍhuḍḍhāni satāni ca.
Duve satasahassāni, cattāri nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, saṅkhātāyaṃ vasundharā.
而支撑此大地的——显示巴利原文
Tassāyeva sandhārakaṃ –
Cattāri satasahassāni, aṭṭheva nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, jalaṃ vāte patiṭṭhitaṃ.
此水之支撑者亦是——显示巴利原文
Tassāpi sandhārako –
Nava satasahassāni, māluto nabhamuggato; Saṭṭhi ceva sahassāni, esā lokassa saṇṭhiti.
在如此安立之中,由旬的数目如下:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṇṭhite cettha yojanānaṃ –
八万四千由旬没入大海;
而须弥山王同样高高耸立,高出海面八万四千由旬。
即持双山、持轴山、持辋山、善见山、
持边山、象鼻山与马耳大山。
以八万四千座山峰庄严;
树干周长三五由旬,名为“龙树”。
树干与枝条向四周延展,长达五十由旬;
树冠绵延百由旬,树身亦高达百由旬。
显示巴利原文 Caturāsīti sahassāni, ajjhogāḷho mahaṇṇave; Accuggato tāvadeva, sineru pabbatuttamo. Tato upaḍḍhupaḍḍhena, pamāṇena yathākkamaṃ; Ajjhogāḷhuggatā dibbā, nānāratanacittitā. Yugandharo īsadharo, karavīko sudassano; Nemindharo vinatako, assakaṇṇo giri brahā. Ete satta mahāselā, sinerussa samantato; Mahārājānamāvāsā, devayakkhanisevitā. Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañca pabbato; Yojanānaṃ sahassāni, tīṇi āyatavitthato. Caturāsītisahassehi, kūṭehi paṭimaṇḍito; Tipañcayojanakkhandha-parikkhepā nagavhayā. Paññāsayojanakkhandha-sākhāyāmā samantato; Satayojanavitthiṇṇā, tāvadeva ca uggatā; Jambū yassānubhāvena, jambudīpo pakāsito. (visuddhi. 1.137; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 584);
而阎浮树的尺寸,也正是阿修罗的质多波吒厘树、金翅鸟的木棉树、西牛货洲的柯昙婆树、北俱卢洲的劫树、东胜身洲的尸利沙树,以及三十三天的波利质多罗树的尺寸。因此,古德们这样说道:显示巴利原文
Yañcetaṃ jambuyā pamāṇaṃ, etadeva asurānaṃ cittapāṭaliyā, garuḷānaṃ simbalirukkhassa, aparagoyāne kadambassa, uttarakurūsu kapparukkhassa, pubbavidehe sirīsassa, tāvatiṃsesu pāricchattakassāti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“质多波吒厘树、木棉树、阎浮树,以及诸天的波利质多罗树,
柯昙婆树与劫树,连同尸利沙树,合为第七种。”
八万二千由旬,沉入大海洋;
轮围山石峰,同时高耸而出;
它环抱这一切,安住为世间界。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pāṭalī simbalī jambū, devānaṃ pāricchattako; Kadambo kapparukkho ca, sirīsena bhavati sattamaṃ. ‘‘Dve asīti sahassāni, ajjhogāḷho mahaṇṇave; Accuggato tāvadeva, cakkavāḷasiluccayo; Parikkhipitvā taṃ sabbaṃ, lokadhātumayaṃ ṭhito’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.137; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 584);
其中:月轮直径为四十九由旬,日轮直径为五十由旬。三十三天界广一万由旬;阿修罗界、无间大地狱及赡部洲洲也是如此,各广一万由旬。西牛货洲广七千由旬,东胜身洲也是如此。北俱卢洲广八千由旬。这里的每一个大洲,都有五百个小岛作为附属。这一切合在一起,便是一个轮围界、一个世界界。在这些轮围界之间,有世界中间地狱。如是,无量的轮围界、无量的世界界,世尊以无量的佛智完全了知、遍知、通达。因此,世尊对器世间亦完全了知。正因为如此完全了知一切世间,故称为‘世间解’。显示巴利原文
Tattha candamaṇḍalaṃ ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāsayojanaṃ, tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ dasasahassayojanaṃ, tathā asurabhavanaṃ avīcimahānirayo jambudīpo ca. Aparagoyānaṃ sattasahassayojanaṃ. Tathā pubbavideho. Uttarakuru aṭṭhasahassayojano. Ekameko cettha mahādīpo pañcasatapañcasataparittadīpaparivāro. Taṃ sabbampi ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ ekā lokadhātu. Tadantaresu lokantarikanirayā . Evaṃ anantāni cakkavāḷāni anantā lokadhātuyo bhagavā anantena buddhañāṇena avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi. Evamassa okāsalokopi sabbathā vidito. Evampi sabbathā viditalokattā lokavidū.
‘无上’:由于没有任何人的功德比世尊更为殊胜,因此没有能超越他者,故称为无上。同样,世尊以戒德超越一切世间,以定德、慧德、解脱德、解脱智见德也是如此。以戒德,他无等、无等等、无譬喻、无对手、无敌者;乃至以解脱智见德也是如此。正如所说:‘我不见在天、魔、梵、沙门、婆罗门、天神及人界中,有任何其他较我戒更具足者。’(《相应部》1.173;《增支部》4.21)应当详细阐述。显示巴利原文
Attano pana guṇehi visiṭṭhatarassa kassaci abhāvato natthi etassa uttaroti anuttaro. Tathā hesa sīlaguṇenapi sabbaṃ lokaṃ abhibhavati samādhi…pe… paññā… vimutti… vimuttiñāṇadassanaguṇenapi. Sīlaguṇenapi asamo asamasamo appaṭimo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggalo…pe… vimuttiñāṇadassanaguṇenapi. Yathāha – ‘‘na kho panāhaṃ passāmi sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya attanā sīlasampannatara’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.173; a. ni. 4.21) vitthāro.
应当详细阐述《增上净信经》等(《增支部》4.34;《如是语》90),以及‘我没有老师’等偈颂(《中部》1.285;《大品》11;《论事》405;《弥兰陀问经》4.5.11)。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ aggapasādasuttādīni (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) ‘‘na me ācariyo atthī’’tiādikā (ma. ni. 1.285; mahāva. 11; kathā. 405; mi. pa. 4.5.11) gāthāyo ca vitthāretabbā.
“调御丈夫”:他调御那些应被调御者——即调伏、引导他们。此处“应被调御者”指尚未调伏、堪以调伏的有情,包括畜生、人与非人。正如世尊调御了畜生,如无热恼龙王、小腹龙王、大腹龙王、火顶龙王、烟顶龙王、阿罗婆龙王、财护象等,使其离害,安住于皈依与戒;调御了人,如萨遮迦尼干陀子、阿摩昼青年、沸伽罗娑罗、首那丹达、究罗檀头等;调御了非人,如旷野夜叉、针毛夜叉、佉罗、帝释天王等。世尊以种种调御方便调伏、引导他们。于此当广说《“凯西,我以柔和、以粗暴、亦以柔和与粗暴,调御应调御者”》(《增支部》4.111)一经。而且,世尊亦以教导清净戒、初禅等,并为入流者等开示更上之道,即是在调御已调御者。显示巴利原文
Purisadamme sāretīti purisadammasārathi, dameti vinetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha purisadammāti adantā dametuṃ yuttā tiracchānapurisāpi manussapurisāpi amanussapurisāpi . Tathā hi bhagavatā tiracchānapurisāpi apalālo nāgarājā cūḷodaro mahodaro aggisikho dhūmasikho aravāḷo nāgarājā dhanapālako hatthīti evamādayo damitā nibbisā katā, saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpitā. Manussapurisāpi saccakanigaṇṭhaputtaambaṭṭhamāṇavapokkharasātisoṇadantakūṭadantādayo. Amanussapurisāpi āḷavakasūcilomakharalomayakkhasakkadevarājādayo damitā vinītā vicitrehi vinayanūpāyehi. ‘‘Ahaṃ kho kesi purisadamme saṇhenapi vinemi, pharusenapi vinemi, saṇhapharusenapi vinemī’’ti (a. ni. 4.111) idañcettha suttaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Api ca bhagavā visuddhasīlādīnaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīni sotāpannādīnañca uttarimaggapaṭipadaṃ ācikkhanto dantepi dametiyeva.
又或者,“无上调御丈夫”为一整体义理之辞。世尊调御应被调御者,能令其结跏趺坐,一坐之间,便毫无滞碍地趣向八方。故名为“无上调御丈夫”。于此当广说《“诸比丘,由象师调御之象,唯趣向一方”》(《中部》3.312)一经。显示巴利原文
Atha vā anuttaro purisadammasārathīti ekamevidaṃ atthapadaṃ. Bhagavā hi tathā purisadamme sāreti, yathā ekapallaṅkeneva nisinnā aṭṭha disā asajjamānā dhāvanti. Tasmā ‘‘anuttaro purisadammasārathī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Hatthidamakena, bhikkhave, hatthi dammo sārito ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvatī’’ti idañcettha suttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.312) vitthāretabbaṃ.
“精进者”:以圣道远离一切罪恶。“有能力者”:即堪能。“能散布者”:指能于他人相续中激发精进之人。“于义足够者”:指心堪能胜任。显示巴利原文
Vīriyavāti ariyamaggena sabbapāpakehi virato. Pahūti pabhū. Visavīti parasantāne vīriyuppādako. Alamattoti samatthacitto.
“远离者”:因以圣道远离,故未来不再有结生。“超越一切罪恶”:由于未来无结生,因而超越地狱之苦,安住于彼。“精进住所”:意为精进的住处。“他就是精进者”:那位诸漏尽者当得起“精进者”之称。而“勤勇者”“英雄”“如如者”则是对他的赞叹之词。他因道与禅那的勤勇而为勤勇者;因摧破烦恼敌而为英雄;因无所动摇而为如如——即如如不动,是故这样的他被称为“精进者”。显示巴利原文
Viratoti ariyamaggena viratattā āyatiṃ appaṭisandhiko. Sabbapāpakehi nirayadukkhaṃ aticcāti āyatiṃ appaṭisandhitāya nirayadukkhaṃ aticca ṭhito. Vīriyavāsoti vīriyaniketo. So vīriyavāti so khīṇāsavo ‘‘vīriyavā’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati. Padhānavā vīro tādīti imāni panassa thutivacanāni. So hi padhānavā maggajjhānapadhānena, vīro kilesārividdhaṃsanasamatthatāya, tādi nibbikāratāya pavuccate tathattāti tathārūpo ‘‘vīriyavā’’ti pavuccati.
“那些欲乐者”:指那些希求色等事欲的人。“贪染者”:指被贪染所染的人。“有贪想者”:指具有贪想之想的人。“不于欲中求欲”:即不希求色等事欲。“无欲者”:即远离诸欲者。“出离欲者”:即已出离欲者。显示巴利原文
Te kāmakāminoti ete rūpādivatthukāme icchantā. Rāgarāginoti rāgena rañjitā. Saññāsaññinoti rāgasaññāya saññino. Nakāme kāmetīti rūpādivatthukāme na pattheti. Akāmoti kāmehi virahito. Nikkāmoti nikkantakāmo.
“一切知智”:因为了知涵盖三时的一切所应引导之道,故称一切知者;其体即一切知性;一切知性本身即是智,故名一切知智。此一切知智之眼,亦因连同习气战胜烦恼而成为胜者。此胜者性并非前、亦非后,非在先、非在后,唯于同一刹那、同一时刻生起,超越前际,故说为“生起”。显示巴利原文
Sabbaññutaññāṇanti tiyaddhagataṃ sabbaneyyapathaṃ jānātīti sabbaññū, tassa bhāvo sabbaññutā, sabbaññutā eva ñāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātaṃ nettañca vāsanāya saha kilese parājetvā jitattā jinabhāvo ca apubbaṃ acarimaṃ apure apacchā ekasmiṃ khaṇe ekasmiṃ kāle uppanno pubbantato uddhaṃ pannoti uppanno.
66 “具威者以威力”:因具足威力而称具威者,以其威力征服一切。“我应了知那在此断除生与老之法”:我应就在此处了知那能断除生老之法。显示巴利原文
66.Tejī tejasāti tejena samannāgato tejasā abhibhuyya. Yamahaṃ vijaññaṃ jātijarāya idha vippahānanti yaṃ ahaṃ jātijarāya pahānabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ idheva jāneyyaṃ.
「Jagatī」:指大地。「Sabbaṃ ākāsagataṃ」:指一切在虚空中存在、遍满的事物。「Tamagataṃ」:即那黑暗本身,如同说“落入粪中”、“落入尿中”一样。「Abhivihacca」:即摧毁之后。「Andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā」:指驱散那障碍眼识生起的黑暗。「Ālokaṃ dassayitvā」:指展示光明——让日光显现。「Ākāse」:指无碍的虚空。「Antalikkhe」:指界与界之间、空无实质的空间。「Gaganapathe」:指在天神们通行的道路上行走。「Sabbaṃ abhisaṅkhārasamudayaṃ」:指一切行的集,即一切业行的生起,其义为渴爱。「Kilesatamaṃ avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā」:指将称为烦恼之暗的无明黑暗清除、摧破。「Ñāṇālokaṃ paññālokaṃ dassayitvā」:指展示智的光明、慧的光明。「Vatthukāme parijānitvā」:指通过知遍知与审察遍知,了知显示巴利原文
Jagatīti pathavī. Sabbaṃ ākāsagatanti sakalaṃ ākāse pavattaṃ patthaṭaṃ. Tamagatanti tamameva tamagataṃ andhakāraṃ yathā gūthagataṃ muttagatanti. Abhivihaccāti nāsetvā. Andhakāraṃ vidhamitvāti cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivārakaṃ andhakāraṃ palāpetvā. Ālokaṃ dassayitvāti sūriyālokaṃ dassayitvā. Ākāseti ajaṭākāse. Antalikkheti antaradhātusamatthatucchokāse. Gaganapatheti devatānaṃ gamanamagge gacchati. Sabbaṃ abhisaṅkhārasamudayanti sakalaṃ kammaṃ samudayaṃ uppādaṃ, taṇhanti attho. Kilesatamaṃ avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvāti kilesatamasaṅkhātaṃ aññāṇaṃ avijjandhakāraṃ nīharitvā nāsetvā. Ñāṇālokaṃ paññālokaṃ dassayitvā. Vatthukāme parijānitvāti rūpādivatthukāme ñātatīraṇapariññāya jānitvā. Kilesakāme pahāyāti upatāpanasaṅkhāte kilesakāme pahānapariññāya pajahitvā.
67 于是,世尊为了教导他此法,宣说了以下的偈颂。其中,「nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khemato」:因见出离为安稳,故将涅槃及趣向涅槃之道视为“安稳”。「Uggahitaṃ」:指由渴爱、由邪见而生起的执取。「Nirattaṃ vā」:指应当被舍离、被释放而不再执取之物。「Mā te vijjitthā」:愿你不生起。「Kiñcana」:指贪等能生执着的烦恼,愿你亦无有。显示巴利原文
67. Athassa bhagavā taṃ dhammaṃ ācikkhanto uparūparigāthāyo abhāsi. Tattha nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khematoti nibbānañca nibbānagāminiñca paṭipadaṃ ‘‘khema’’nti disvā. Uggahitanti taṇhāvasena diṭṭhivasena gahitaṃ. Nirattaṃ vāti nirassitabbaṃ vā, muñcitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Mā te vijjitthāti mā te ahosi. Kiñcananti rāgādikiñcanaṃ, tampi te mā vijjittha.
“Muñcitabbanti”:应放舍,放舍后不应再执取。“Vijahitabbanti”:应当舍离。“Vinodetabbanti”:应当驱除。“Byantīkātabbanti”:应当令其彻底灭尽。“Anabhāvaṃ gametabbanti”:应当令其渐次归于无有。显示巴利原文
Muñcitabbanti muñcitvā na puna gahetabbaṃ. Vijahitabbanti cajitabbaṃ. Vinodetabbanti khipitabbaṃ. Byantīkātabbanti vigatantaṃ kātabbaṃ . Anabhāvaṃ gametabbanti anu anu abhāvaṃ gametabbaṃ.
68-9 “Pubbeti”:缘于过去诸行而生起的烦恼。“Brāhmaṇā”:世尊以此称呼阇都干耳。其余各处,义理明晰。显示巴利原文
68-9.Pubbeti atīte saṅkhāre ārabbha uppannakilesā. Brāhmaṇāti bhagavā jatukaṇṇiṃ ālapati. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
如此,世尊同样以阿拉汉果为顶点开示此经。开示终了时,与前述相同,出现了法的现观。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca pubbasadiso eva dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
12. 《跋陀罗弗达青年经》的义释注释显示巴利原文
12. Bhadrāvudhamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
70 70. 在第十二经《跋陀罗弗达经》中:「okañjahanti」指舍弃了执着。「Taṇhacchidanti」指斩断渴爱之身。「Anejanti」指于世间法而不动摇。「Nandiñjahanti」指舍弃对未来色等对象的希求之喜。实际上,那都只是同一个渴爱,此处是以赞叹的方式从不同侧面加以宣说。「Kappañjahanti」指两种意义上的舍弃劫。「Abhiyāceti」指极其恳请。「Sutvāna nāgassa apanamissanti」:意思是,听了您——龙象(佛陀)的话语之后,许多人将从这座石庙离去。显示巴利原文
70. Dvādasame bhadrāvudhasutte – okañjahanti ālayaṃ jahaṃ. Taṇhacchidanti taṇhākāyacchidaṃ. Anejanti lokadhammesu nikkampaṃ. Nandiñjahanti anāgatarūpādipatthanājahaṃ. Ekā eva hi sā taṇhā, thutivasena idha nānappakārato vuttā. Kappañjahanti duvidhaṃ kappajahaṃ. Abhiyāceti ativiya yācāmi. Sutvāna nāgassa apanamissanti itoti nāgassa tava bhagavato vacanaṃ sutvā ito pāsāṇakacetiyato bahujanā pakkamissantīti adhippāyo.
「Ye upayupādānāti」是指由渴爱与见而趋近、执取的对象。「Cetaso adhiṭṭhānāti」是指安住于心识之中。「Abhinivesānusayāti」是指先牢固执取,随后以随眠的方式潜藏。显示巴利原文
Yeupayupādānāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi upagantvā gahitā. Cetaso adhiṭṭhānāti citte patiṭṭhitā. Abhinivesānusayāti patiṭṭhahitvā āgantvā sayitā.
71 71. 「Janapadehi saṅgatāti」是指从鸯伽等地前来此处聚集。「Viyākarohīti」是请宣说法。显示巴利原文
71.Janapadehi saṅgatāti aṅgādīhi janapadehi idha samāgatā. Viyākarohīti dhammaṃ desehi.
“Saṅgatā”指这些刹帝利等聚合为一类。“Samāgatā”指从如上所述之诸地而来,共聚一处。“Samohitā”意为攒聚成堆,亦即会集一处。“Sannipatitā”表示专注之义。显示巴利原文
Saṅgatāti ete khattiyādayo ekībhūtā. Samāgatāti vuttappakārehi janapadehi āgatā. Samohitāti rāsībhūtā. Sannipatitāti adhiyogā.
72 72. 那时,世尊随顺他的意乐而说法,宣说了以下偈颂。其中,“ādānataṇhā”指对色等对象的执取之渴爱,即所谓渴爱取。“Yaṃ yañhi lokasmim upādiyanti”指在诸有、诸趣等之中,无论执取了什么。“Teneva māro anveti jantuṃ”意为:由此取为缘而生起的业行,结生蕴魔便追随彼众生。显示巴利原文
72. Athassa āsayānulomena dhammaṃ desento bhagavā uparūparigāthāyo abhāsi. Tattha ādānataṇhanti rūpādīnaṃ ādāyikaṃ gahaṇataṇhaṃ, taṇhupādānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yaṃ yañhi lokasmimupādiyantīti etesu uddhādibhedesu yaṃ yaṃ gaṇhanti. Teneva māro anvetijantunti teneva upādānapaccayanibbattakammābhisaṅkhāranibbattavasena paṭisandhikkhandhamāro taṃ sattaṃ anugacchati.
73 73. “Tasmā pajānanti”:因此,他以无常等角度了知诸行而见此过患。“Ādānasatte iti pekkhamāno, pajaṃ imaṃ maccudheyye visattanti”:他观察世间一切众生系着于死魔之域——由色等所取具有可执取之义;或者,他观察那些耽着于所取之人,即执取之徒,见彼众生由执取合集故,系着于死魔之域而不能超越,作如是观察已,彼得此中不应于世间执取任何事物。其余各处,文义明了。显示巴利原文
73.Tasmā pajānanti tasmā etamādīnavaṃ aniccādivasena vā saṅkhāre pajānanto. Ādānasatte iti pekkhamāno, pajaṃ imaṃ maccudheyye visattanti ādātabbaṭṭhena ādānesu rūpādīsu satte sabbaloke imaṃ pajaṃ maccudheyye laggaṃ pekkhamāno , ādānasatte vā ādānābhiniviṭṭhe puggale ādānasaṅgahetuñca imaṃ pajaṃ maccudheyye laggaṃ tato vītikkamituṃ asamatthaṃ iti pekkhamāno kiñcanaṃ sabbaloke na upādiyethāti. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
就这样,世尊也以阿拉汉果作为此经的顶点而开示;说法终了时,如同前面一样,同样生起了法的现观。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca pubbasadiso eva dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
13. 《乌达亚青年经》的义释注释显示巴利原文
13. Udayamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
74 74. 在第十三部《乌达亚经》中,「aññāvimokkhanti」:是询问那个依慧力而审察的解脱。显示巴利原文
74. Terasame udayasutte – aññāvimokkhanti paññānubhāvanijjhānaṃ taṃ vimokkhaṃ pucchati.
「以初禅而修禅者」:即与寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性这五支相应的初禅而修习,故称为修禅者。「以第二禅」:即与喜、乐、心一境性相应的第二禅。「以第三禅」:即与乐、心一境性相应的第三禅。「以第四禅」:即与舍、心一境性相应的第四禅。「以有寻有伺之禅而修禅者」:在四支系统和五支系统中,皆以有寻有伺的初禅而修习,故为修禅者。「以无寻唯伺」:在五支系统中,以第二禅。「以无寻无伺」:即第二禅、第三禅等其余诸禅。「以有喜」:即与喜相应的第二禅和第三禅。「以无喜」:即以离喜的其余诸禅。「以乐俱行」:即以与乐相应的第三禅和第四禅。「以舍俱行」:即以第四禅和第五禅。「以空」:即与空解脱相应。「以无相」:即以去除无常相与恒常相而证得的无相之禅而修习,故为修禅者。「以无愿」:即通过净化道支,以耗尽上妙的愿求,依果等至而成就的无愿。「以世间」:即世间的初禅、第二禅、第三禅、第四禅。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamenapi jhānena jhāyīti vitakkavicārapītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttena pañcaṅgikena paṭhamajjhānena jhāyatīti jhāyī. Dutiyenāti pītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttena. Tatiyenāti sukhacittekaggatāsampayuttena. Catutthenāti upekkhācittekaggatāsampayuttena. Savitakkasavicārenapi jhānena jhāyīti catukkanayapañcakanayesu paṭhamajjhānena savitakkasavicārenapi jhānena jhāyatīti jhāyī. Avitakkavicāramattenāti pañcakanaye dutiyena jhānena. Avitakkaavicārenāti dutiyatatiyādiavasesajhānena. Sappītikenāti pītisampayuttena dukatikajhānena. Nippītikenāti pītivirahitena tadavasesajhānena. Sātasahagatenāti sukhasahagatena tikacatukkajhānena. Upekkhāsahagatenāti catukkapañcakena. Suññatenapīti suññatavimokkhasampayuttena. Animittenapīti aniccanimittaṃ dhuvanimittaṃ animittañca ugghāṭetvā paṭiladdhena animittenapi jhānena jhāyatīti jhāyī. Appaṇihitenapīti maggāgamanavasena paṇidhiṃ sodhetvā pariyādiyitvā phalasamāpattivasena appaṇihitenapi. Lokiyenapīti lokiyena paṭhamadutiyatatiyacatutthena.
「以出世间」:指与出世间法相应。「乐于禅那者」:于诸禅那中极生喜乐。「专一修习者」:专心一境,修习投入。「重自利者」:意为重视自身利益;此处的‘ka’音变为‘da’。而所谓「自利」,应知即是阿罗汉果。因为阿罗汉果具有与自身紧密相连之义、不舍自身之义,以及自身之究竟义,故称为自利。通过证入果等至而重视此自利,也有人解作「重涅槃者」。「离尘」:即无有烦恼。「离染」:即烦恼已远离。「无垢」:即烦恼已除;另有读作‘vitarajo’的版本,意义相同。「尘已远离」:因烦恼而远离。「尘已断除」:烦恼已断。「尘已脱离」:从烦恼中解脱。显示巴利原文
Lokuttarenapīti teneva lokuttarasampayuttena. Jhānaratoti jhānesu abhirato. Ekattamanuyuttoti ekattaṃ ekībhāvaṃ anuyutto payutto. Sadatthagarukoti sakatthagaruko, ka-kārassāyaṃ da-kāro kato. Sadatthoti ca arahattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tañhi attūpanibaddhaṭṭhena attānaṃ avijahanaṭṭhena attano paramatthaṭṭhena ca attano atthattā sakatthoti vuccati. Phalasamāpattisamāpajjanavasena sakatthagaruko, ‘‘nibbānagaruko’’ti eke. Arajoti nikkileso. Virajoti vigatakileso. Nirajoti apanītakileso , ‘‘vitarajo’’tipi pāṭho, soyevattho. Rajāpagatoti kilesehi dūrībhūto. Rajavippahīnoti kilesappahīno. Rajavippayuttoti kilesehi mutto.
「在石塔庙」:指石板上方,即宣说《彼岸经》之处。「由于一切热恼止息」:即一切烦恼的热恼皆已止息、灭尽,故他安坐。显示巴利原文
Pāsāṇake cetiyeti pāsāṇapiṭṭhe pārāyanasuttantadesitaṭṭhāne. Sabbossukkapaṭippassaddhattāti sabbesaṃ kilesaussukkānaṃ paṭippassaddhattā, nāsitattā āsīno.
「该作与不该作」:指心中应当这样思惟:‘此应作,此不应作’。「应作与不应作」:指通过身门,此必须作,此不应作,如此即是应作与不应作。「已断」:即已舍离。「得自在者」:即达到纯熟的状态。显示巴利原文
Kiccākiccanti ‘‘idaṃ kattabbaṃ, idaṃ na kattabba’’nti evaṃ manasā cintetabbaṃ. Karaṇīyākaraṇīyanti kāyadvārena avassaṃ idaṃ karaṇīyaṃ, idaṃ na karaṇīyanti evaṃ karaṇīyākaraṇīyaṃ. Pahīnanti vissaṭṭhaṃ. Vasippattoti paguṇabhāvappatto.
75 那时,世尊因乌达亚已证得第四禅,便以他所获禅那之力,从多方面开示其余解脱,因而宣说以下偈颂。其中,“断除欲贪”:即指成就初禅时所断的欲贪,我亦称之为其余解脱。一切句义皆应如此结合理解。显示巴利原文
75. Atha bhagavā yasmā udayo catutthajjhānalābhī, tasmāssa paṭiladdhajhānavasena nānappakārato aññāvimokkhaṃ dassento uparūparigāthamāha. Tattha pahānaṃ kāmacchandānanti yadidaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ nibbattentassa kāmacchandapahānaṃ, tampi aññāvimokkhanti pabrūmi. Evaṃ sabbapadāni yojetabbāni.
心的不适:即心的病态,因为病人被称为“不适者”。律藏中亦言:“尊者,我并非不适。”(pārā. 151)不堪任:即所谓心病的相状,也就是不堪任的相状。低沉:即低沉的相状。因为处于威仪中的心,无法支撑威仪,犹如挂在树上的蝙蝠、悬于桩上的糖块一般低垂,就这种相状而说“低沉”。第二个词是通过加前缀而强化的。萎靡:因不扩展而蜷缩。其余两个是对状态性质的描述。惛沉:如同酥油,因不扩展而以坚固的状态存在。惛沉状态:这是对状态性质的描述。僵硬状态、僵硬性:其义为因不扩展而滞碍。显示巴利原文
Yā cittassa akalyatāti cittassa gilānabhāvo. Gilāno hi akallakoti vuccati. Vinayepi vuttaṃ – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhante, akallako’’ti (pārā. 151). Akammaññatāti cittagelaññasaṅkhātova akammaññatākāro. Olīyanāti olīyanākāro. Iriyāpathikacittañhi iriyāpathaṃ sandhāretuṃ asakkontaṃ rukkhe vagguli viya khīle laggitaphāṇitavārako viya ca olīyati, tassa taṃ ākāraṃ sandhāya ‘‘olīyanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dutiyapadaṃ upasaggavasena vaḍḍhitaṃ. Līnāti avipphārikatāya paṭikuṭitaṃ. Itare dve ākārabhāvaniddesā. Thinanti sappipiṇḍo viya avipphārikatāya ghanabhāvena ṭhitaṃ. Thiyanāti ākāraniddeso. Thiyitabhāvo thiyitattaṃ, avipphāravaseneva thaddhatāti attho (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1162).
76 “舍念清净”:即由第四禅的舍与念所清净。“以法思为先导”:这是说,住于这第四禅解脱后,观察诸禅支而证得的阿罗汉果解脱。因为阿罗汉果解脱的道相应正思惟等法思是其先导,故说“以法思为先导”。“破无明”:这其余解脱,依止于名为破无明的涅槃而生起,因此以因代果而说“破无明”。显示巴利原文
76.Upekkhāsatisaṃsuddhanti catutthajjhānaupekkhāsatīhi saṃsuddhaṃ. Dhammatakkapurejavanti iminā tasmiṃ catutthajjhānavimokkhe ṭhatvā jhānaṅgāni vipassitvā adhigataṃ arahattavimokkhaṃ vadati. Arahattavimokkhassa hi maggasampayuttasammāsaṅkappādibhedo dhammatakko purejavo hoti. Tenāha ‘‘dhammatakkapurejava’’nti. Avijjāya pabhedananti etameva ca aññāvimokkhaṃ avijjāpabhedanasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ nissāya jātattā kāraṇopacārena ‘‘avijjāya pabhedana’’nti brūmīti.
第四禅中的‘舍’:此处,‘舍’指以投生方式而观察,即平等地观察,不偏袒地观察。‘舍性’是对其状态特征的描述。‘完全舍离’是通过附加词缀而得以强化的词。‘心平等性’即心住于一境的状态。‘心轻安性’即心远离了过与不及的状态。‘中舍性’即心处于中道的状态。显示巴利原文
Yā catutthe jhāne upekkhāti ettha upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā, samaṃ passati apakkhapatitā hutvā passatīti attho. Upekkhanāti ākāraniddeso. Ajjhupekkhanāti upasaggavasena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Cittasamatāti cittassekaggabhāvo. Cittappassaddhatāti cittassa ūnātirittavajjitabhāvo. Majjhattatāti cittassa majjhe ṭhitabhāvo.
77 77. 如此,听闻了以破除无明所开示的涅槃之后,他问道:‘那涅槃是通过舍弃什么而被称为涅槃的?’并说出‘何者是结缚’等偈颂。其中,‘kiṃsu saṃyojano’意为‘何者是结缚’。‘vicāraṇanti’意为‘伺察之因’。‘kissassa vippahānenāti’意为‘通过舍弃名为某某的那个法’。显示巴利原文
77. Evaṃ avijjāpabhedavacanena vuttaṃ nibbānaṃ sutvā ‘‘taṃ kissa vippahānena vuccatī’’ti pucchanto ‘‘kiṃsu saṃyojano’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha kiṃsu saṃyojanoti kiṃsaṃyojano. Vicāraṇanti vicāraṇakāraṇaṃ. Kissassa vippahānenāti kiṃnāmakassa assa dhammassa vippahānena.
78 78. 那时,世尊为他解说此义,而说出‘喜结缚’等偈颂。其中,‘vitakkassāti’意为:他的寻,即欲寻等寻。显示巴利原文
78. Athassa bhagavā tamatthaṃ byākaronto ‘‘nandisaṃyojano’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha vitakkassāti kāmavitakkādiko vitakko assa.
79 现在,为了询问通往涅槃之道,世尊说了“于念者如何”等偈颂。其中,“viññāṇanti”意为行作识(即由行作所生的识)。显示巴利原文
79. Idāni tassa nibbānassa maggaṃ pucchanto ‘‘kathaṃ satassā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha viññāṇanti abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ.
那时,世尊为他开示道路,说了“内与”等偈颂。其中,“evaṃ satassāti”意为:如此具念、具正知的人。其余各处义理明晰。显示巴利原文
Athassa maggaṃ kathento bhagavā ‘‘ajjhattañcā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha evaṃ satassāti evaṃ satassa sampajānassa. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
如此,世尊也以阿罗汉果为顶点宣说了此经。说法结束时,如同前述情形,有法现观。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca pubbasadisova dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
第14 《波斯罗学童经》义释注显示巴利原文
14. Posālamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
81 在第十四篇《波斯罗经》中——「他宣说过去」:指彼世尊宣说自己与他人过去之事,即分为「一生」等种种类别的过去。显示巴利原文
81. Cuddasame posālasutte – yo atītaṃ ādisatīti yo bhagavā attano ca paresañca ‘‘ekampi jāti’’ntiādibhedaṃ atītaṃ ādisati.
「一生」:指一个以结生为始、以死亡为终、包含一个有之中的整个蕴相续。此理类推至「二生」等。「在多劫亦然」等句当中:劫在缩减之际,称为坏劫,因那时一切众生都聚集于梵天界;劫在扩展之时,称为成劫,因那时众生从梵天界散开。其中,由于以坏劫为根本,也就包含了坏住劫;由于以成劫为根本,也就包含了成住劫。如此,正如经中所说:「诸比丘,劫有这四种不可计算的阶段。哪四种呢?即坏劫、坏住劫、成劫、成住劫」(《增支部》4.156),这些阶段便都被涵盖进来。至于这里所说的「坏劫、成劫」,是只截取劫的一半来讲;而「坏成劫」则是将整个劫囊括进来而说。若问具体如何随念,即依「我曾在那个地方存在过……」等这一方法随念。这当中,「我在那个地方存在过」:指我在那个坏劫当中,或是在那个有、那个胎、那个趣、那个识住、那个有情居、那个有情身中,曾经存在过。「名字是这样的」:指名为提须,或名为富须。「姓氏是这样的」:指姓迦旃延,或姓显示巴利原文
Ekampi jātinti ekampi paṭisandhimūlakaṃ cutipariyosānaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhasantānaṃ. Esa nayo dvepi jātiyotiādīsu. Anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappetiādīsu pana parihāyamāno kappo saṃvaṭṭakappo, tadā sabbesaṃ brahmaloke sannipatanato. Vaḍḍhamāno kappo vivaṭṭakappo, tadā brahmalokato sattānaṃ vivaṭṭanato. Tattha saṃvaṭṭena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī gahito hoti taṃmūlakattā, vivaṭṭena ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evañhi sati yāni tāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Saṃvaṭṭo saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī vivaṭṭo vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī’’ti vuttāni (a. ni. 4.156), tāni pariggahitāni honti. Saṃvaṭṭakappe vivaṭṭakappeti ca kappassa addhaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappeti sakalaṃ kappaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ anussaratīti ce? Amutrāsintiādinā nayena. Tattha amutrāsinti amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe ahaṃ amumhi bhave vā yoniyā vā gatiyā vā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā vā sattāvāse vā sattanikāye vā āsiṃ. Evaṃnāmoti tisso vā phusso vā. Evaṃgottoti kaccāno vā kassapo vā . Idamassa atītabhave attano nāmagottānussaraṇavasena vuttaṃ. Sace pana tasmiṃ kāle attano vaṇṇasampattiṃ vā lūkhapaṇītajīvitabhāvaṃ vā sukhadukkhabahulataṃ vā appāyukadīghāyukabhāvaṃ vā anussaritukāmo, tampi anussaratiyeva. Tenāha – ‘‘evaṃvaṇṇo evamāyupariyanto’’ti. Tattha evaṃvaṇṇoti odāto vā sāmo vā. Evamāhāroti sālimaṃsodanāhāro vā pavattaphalabhojano vā. Evaṃ sukhadukkhapaṭisaṃvedīti anekappakārena kāyikacetasikānaṃ sāmisanirāmisādippabhedānaṃ vā sukhadukkhānaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ vassasataparamāyupariyanto vā caturāsīti kappasahassaparamāyupariyanto vā.
“他从那里死后,再生到某处”的意思是:我从那个有、那个胎、那个趣、那个识住、那个有情居、那个有情类死去之后,又在另一个名为某某的有、胎、趣、识住、有情居或有情类中再生。“在那里也”是指,随后在那个有、胎、趣、识住、有情居或有情类中,我亦曾存在。关于“名字是这样……”等的解释,方法与前面所说相同。显示巴利原文
So tato cuto amutra udapādinti so ahaṃ tato bhavato yonito gatito viññāṇaṭṭhitito sattāvāsato sattanikāyato vā cuto puna amukasmiṃ nāma bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā udapādiṃ. Tatrāpāsinti atha tatrāpi bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā puna ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmotiādivuttanayameva.
此外,因为“于彼处我曾存有”是顺着次第向上随念,能随念到所愿之量;“他从此处死没后”则是在回转向下之后的省察。因此,关于“于此世投生”,应知这是为了说明此生投生之后紧接着的下一投生处,所以才说“于彼处再生”。而“于彼处也存有”等语句,则是为了显示他在这一世投生的期间,在投生处中对于名姓等的随念。“他从此处死没而后于此世投生”的意思是:我从紧接的投生处死没之后,便转生到此处的某个刹帝利家族或者婆罗门家族之中。显示巴利原文
Api ca – yasmā amutrāsinti idaṃ anupubbena ārohantassa yāvadicchakaṃ anussaraṇaṃ. So tato cutoti paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā idhūpapannoti imissā idhūpapattiyā anantaramevassa upapattiṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya amutra udapādinti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tatrāpāsinti evamādi panassa tatrā imissā upapattiyā antare upapattiṭṭhāne nāmagottādīnaṃ anussaraṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. So tato cuto idhūpapannoti svāhaṃ tato anantarūpapattiṭṭhānato cuto idha asukasmiṃ nāma khattiyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā nibbatto.
“如是”意为如此。“有特征、有所指示”:以名姓为“指示”,以相貌等为“特征”。因为众生通过名姓而被指示为“提舍”、“迦叶”;通过相貌等特征,则被认知为“白皙”、“黝黑”等种种差别。因此,名姓是“指示”,其余特征则是“形相”。“宿住”是指过去生中曾经安住的诸蕴,也就是宿世的居住之处。“曾住”的意思是曾经安住过、经验过,在自己的生命相续中生起后又灭去的那些;或者,指的也就是那些曾经被安住过的法。“曾住”还可以解释为:依所行之境而安住,被自己的识所知、所限定,或者在某些情况下,如断灭轮随念等,为他人的识所知。这些能力唯佛陀所具备。佛陀开示这种宿住。他开示其他众生的过去生,即以“其他众多有情的宿住,从一生……”这样的方式来开示。显示巴利原文
Ititi evaṃ. Sākāraṃ sauddesanti nāmagottavasena sauddesaṃ, vaṇṇādivasena sākāraṃ. Nāmagottena hi satto ‘‘tisso kassapo’’ti uddisiyati, vaṇṇādīhi ‘‘odāto sāmo’’ti nānattato paññāyati. Tasmā nāmagottaṃ uddeso, itare ākārāti. Pubbenivāsanti pubbe atītajātīsu nivuṭṭhakkhandhā pubbenivāso. Nivuṭṭhāti ajjhāvuṭṭhā anubhūtā attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhā, nivuṭṭhadhammā vā. Nivuṭṭhāti gocaranivāsena nivuṭṭhā, attano viññāṇena viññātā paricchinnā, paraviññāṇena viññātāpi vā chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsu. Te buddhānaṃyeva labbhanti. Taṃ pubbenivāsaṃ ādisati katheti. Paresaṃ atītanti aññesaṃ parapuggalānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ ekampi jātintiādinā nayena ādisati.
《大本经》,即与大丈夫的宿世事迹相应之《大本经》。《大善见王经》,即与大善见王的成就相应之《大善见王经》。《大典尊经》,即与大典尊婆罗门的宿世事迹相应之《大典尊经》。《摩伽提婆经》,即与摩伽提婆王的宿世事迹相应之《摩伽提婆经》。所谓“有随念宿住智”,意即具备了能随念过去生的智慧。显示巴利原文
Mahāpadāniyasuttantanti mahāpurisānaṃ apadānaniyuttaṃ mahāpadānasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 2.1 ādayo). Mahāsudassaniyasuttantanti mahāsudassanassa sampattiyuttaṃ mahāsudassanasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 2.241 ādayo). Mahāgovindiyasuttantanti mahāgovindabrāhmaṇassa apadānaniyuttaṃ mahāgovindasuttaṃ (dī. ni. 2.293 ādayo). Māghadeviyasuttantanti maghadevarañño apadānaniyuttaṃ maghadevasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 2.308 ādayo). Satānusāriññāṇaṃ hotīti pubbenivāsānussatisampayuttañāṇaṃ hoti.
“如其欲知”:即他想要知道多少,就将智投向那里,预期“我将知道这些”。此时,他的智慧如同投入薄叶所成容器的光明一样,无有障碍、无有滞碍地行进。因此,他能随念起他想知道的全部内容。“菩提智”:指在菩提树下所生起的智慧。“智生起”:指四种道智的生起。“此是最后生”:依靠此智,在断除了生的根本之后,又进一步生起这样的智慧——“这是我最后一生,如今不再有后有”。“根上下智”:这里将下文“诸有情的”一词引来,应组合理解为“诸有情的根上下智”。“parā”与“aparā”两词,本应说为“parāparāni”,因连声规则而成为“paroparāni”。“paroparā”的状态是“paropariya”,而“paropariya”就是“paropariyatta”。对于可调教的众生,其信等五根的殊胜与低劣状态,称为“根上下”。关于这根上下的智慧,即是“根上下智”。其意为,对于众生根器的殊胜与不殊胜性所具足的智慧。显示巴利原文
Yāvatakaṃ ākaṅkhatīti yattakaṃ ñātuṃ icchati, tattakaṃ jānissāmīti ñāṇaṃ peseti. Athassa dubbalapattapuṭe pakkhandanārādho viya appaṭihataṃ anivāritaṃ ñāṇaṃ gacchati. Tena yāvatakaṃ ākaṅkhati, tāvatakaṃ anussarati. Bodhijanti bodhiyā mūle jātaṃ. Ñāṇaṃ uppajjatīti catumaggañāṇaṃ uppajjati. Ayamantimā jātīti tena ñāṇena jātimūlassa pahīnattā puna ‘‘ayamantimā jāti, natthidāni punabbhavo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31) aparampi ñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇanti ettha upari ‘‘sattāna’’nti padaṃ idheva āharitvā sattānaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇanti yojetabbaṃ. Parāni ca aparāni ca ‘‘parāparānī’’ti vattabbe sandhivasena ro-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘paroparānī’’ti vuccati. Paroparānaṃ bhāvo paropariyaṃ, paropariyameva paropariyattaṃ, veneyyasattānaṃ saddhādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ paropariyattaṃ indriyaparopariyattaṃ, indriyaparopariyattassa ñāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ, indriyānaṃ uttamānuttamabhāvañāṇanti attho. ‘‘Indriyavarovariyattañāṇa’’ntipi pāṭho, varāni ca avarāni ca varovariyāni, varovariyānaṃ bhāvo varovariyattanti yojetabbaṃ. Avariyānīti ca uttamānīti attho. Atha vā – parāni ca oparāni ca paroparāni, tesaṃ bhāvo paropariyattanti yojetabbaṃ. Oparānīti ca orānīti vuttaṃ hoti, lāmakānīti attho ‘‘paroparāyassa samecca dhammā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.5; su. ni. 479) viya. ‘‘Indriyaparopariyatte ñāṇa’’nti bhummavacanenapi pāṭho (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.68).
“如来”:意即如同毗婆尸等过去诸佛那样前来之人;又如他们那样离去之人。“如来力”:指不与其余所共、唯独如来所有之力。或者也可这样解释:如同过去诸佛之力,是由福德、威德与成就所带来,现在也如此获得之力。在此,如来之力有两种,即身力与智力。其中,身力应依象的种姓来了解。关于这一点,古德们曾作如是说。显示巴利原文
Tathāgatassāti yathā vipassiādayo pubbakā isayo āgatā, tathā āgatassa. Yathā ca te gatā, tathā gatassa. Tathāgatabalanti aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ tathāgatasseva balaṃ. Yathā vā pubbabuddhānaṃ balaṃ puññussayasampattiyā āgataṃ, tathā āgatabalantipi attho. Tattha duvidhaṃ tathāgatassa balaṃ kāyabalañca ñāṇabalañca. Tesu kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
黑、恒伽、白、赤铜、金黄,
香、吉祥、金、布萨、六牙——以上这十种。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.22; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.21; vibha. aṭṭha. 760; udā. aṭṭha. 75; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.44);
若按通常的象群算力方式,此力等同千亿头大象之力;若以人力计算,则等同百亿人之力。这便是如来的身力。至于智慧力,则如《大狮子吼经》中所说的十力智、四无畏智、于八众中无有动摇之智、四生判别智、五趣判别智,以及《相应部》中所说的七十三智、七十七智,此外尚有无量千百种智慧。这些统称为智慧力。此处主要所指的,也正是这智慧力。因为智慧,从不可动摇及能作支撑的意义上,便被称为‘力’。显示巴利原文
Yadetaṃ pakatihatthiggaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassassa, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti, idaṃ tāva tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ. Ñāṇabalaṃ pana mahāsīhanāde (ma. ni. 1.146 ādayo) āgataṃ dasabalañāṇaṃ catuvesārajjañāṇaṃ aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampanañāṇaṃ catuyoniparicchedakañāṇaṃ pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ saṃyuttake (saṃ. ni. 2.33-34) āgatāni tesattati ñāṇāni sattasattati ñāṇānīti evaṃ aññānipi anekāni ñāṇasahassāni, etaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ nāma. Idhāpi ñāṇabalameva adhippetaṃ, ñāṇañhi akampiyaṭṭhena upathambhakaṭṭhena ca balanti (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.44) vuttaṃ.
“对众生的依止与随眠智”:此处,因对色、受等蕴有欲贪,众生被系缚,故称为“众生”。世尊曾这样说——显示巴利原文
Sattānaṃ āsayānusaye ñāṇanti ettha rūpādīsu khandhesu chandarāgena sattā visattāti sattā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“罗陀!若于色有欲求、有贪、有喜、有渴爱,便在那里执著、系缚,故称为‘众生’。若于受……于想……于行……于识有欲求、有贪、有喜、有渴爱,便在那里执著、系缚,故称为‘众生’。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Rūpe kho, rādha, yo chando yo rāgo yā nandī yā taṇhā, tatra satto tatra visatto, tasmā ‘satto’ti vuccati . Vedanāya… saññāya… saṅkhāresu… viññāṇe yo chando yo rāgo yā nandī yā taṇhā, tatra satto tatra visatto, tasmā ‘satto’ti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.161; mahāni. 7).
然而,那些只推敲字词的人不审察义理,便认为“这只是一个名称”。审察义理的人则认为,众生因有所执著而称为众生。对这些众生而言,“依止”是他们依止、安住之处,即被邪见或正见、被欲贪等或出离等所修习的心相续的异名。于众生相续中潜伏、随逐的,名为“随眠”,这是指已变得极强的欲贪等的异名。依止与随眠合称“依止与随眠”。应知,因其包含类别,且为并列复合词,故用单数形式。由于性行和意乐皆含摄于依止与随眠之中,因此在总说时,即以依止与随眠智涵摄性行智与意乐智,而说为“依止与随眠智”。显示巴利原文
Akkharacintakā pana atthaṃ avicāretvā ‘‘nāmamattameta’’nti icchanti. Yepi atthaṃ vicārenti, te satvayogena sattāti icchanti. Tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayanti nissayanti etthāti āsayo , micchādiṭṭhiyā sammādiṭṭhiyā vā kāmādīhi nekkhammādīhi vā paribhāvitassa cittasantānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sattasantāne anusenti anupavattantīti anusayā, thāmagatānaṃ kāmarāgādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āsayo ca anusayo ca āsayānusayo. Jātiggahaṇena ca dvandasamāsavasena ca ekavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yasmā caritādhimuttiyo āsayānusayasaṅgahitā, tasmā uddese caritādhimuttīsu ñāṇāni āsayānusayañāṇeneva saṅgahetvā ‘‘āsayānusaye ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
「双神变智」:此处,火光与水柱等相不相先后、同时俱起,故名为“双”;能除遣不信等所对治之法,故名为“神变”;此既是双亦是神变,故称“双神变”。显示巴利原文
Yamakapāṭihīre ñāṇanti ettha aggikkhandhaudakadhārādīnaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ sakiṃyeva pavattito yamakaṃ, assaddhiyādīnaṃ paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ haraṇato pāṭihīraṃ, yamakañca taṃ pāṭihīrañcāti yamakapāṭihīraṃ.
「大悲定智」:当面对他人之苦时,能令善士之心震动,故名“悲”;又能摧坏、灭除他人之苦,故名“悲”;或以悲俱之心遍满苦众生而流布,故名“悲”。因遍满的业用与功德力故,此悲为大,是为“大悲”;诸大悲者等入于此,故为“定”;既是大悲亦是定,故称“大悲定”。有关此大悲定之智,或与之相应之智,即名“大悲定智”。显示巴利原文
Mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyā ñāṇanti ettha paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadayakampanaṃ karotīti karuṇā, kināti vā paradukkhaṃ hiṃsati vināsetīti karuṇā, kirīyati vā dukkhitesu pharaṇavasena pasārīyatīti karuṇā, pharaṇakammavasena kammaguṇavasena ca mahatī karuṇā mahākaruṇā, samāpajjanti etaṃ mahākāruṇikāti samāpatti, mahākaruṇā ca sā samāpatti cāti mahākaruṇāsamāpatti, tassaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyaṃ. Taṃ sampayuttaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ.
「一切知智、无碍智」:此处,因了知含摄五种所导境差别之一切,故称为“一切知者”;一切知者的体性即是“一切知性”;此知性即是智自身,依理应说为“一切知性智”,然则随说为“一切知智”。一切法,如有为、无为等,实皆可摄入行、变异、相、涅槃、施设五种所导之境。以彼智唯依转向而现前,故于他们无所障碍,因此又称“无碍智”。显示巴利原文
Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇanti ettha pañcaneyyapathappabhedaṃ sabbaṃ aññāsīti sabbaññū, sabbaññussa bhāvo sabbaññutā, sabbaññutā eva ñāṇaṃ sabbaññutāñāṇanti vattabbe sabbaññutaññāṇanti vuttaṃ. Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatādibhedā sabbadhammā hi saṅkhāro vikāro lakkhaṇaṃ nibbānaṃ paññattīti pañceva neyyapathā honti. Āvajjanapaṭibaddhattā eva hi natthi tassa āvaraṇanti tadeva anāvaraṇañāṇanti vuccati (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.68).
「一切处无著无碍无障智」:这是于过去、未来、现在三世之中,无有执著,远离系缚,无有障碍,远离对立,无有遮障而现起的智慧。显示巴利原文
Sabbatthaasaṅgamappaṭihatamanāvaraṇañāṇanti ettha atītānāgatapaccuppannesu asaṅgaṃ saṅgavirahitaṃ appaṭihataṃ paṭipakkhavirahitaṃ hutvā pavattaṃ āvaraṇavirahitaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
他也宣示未来:显示巴利原文
Anāgatampi ādisatīti –
在这个贤劫中,曾有三位导师;
我如今是正自觉者,弥勒亦将于未来成为正自觉者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Imasmiṃ bhaddake kappe, tayo āsiṃsu nāyakā; Ahametarahi sambuddho, metteyyo cāpi hessatī’’ti. ca –
诸比丘!人寿八万岁时,名为弥勒的世尊将出现于世间,他是阿拉汉、正自觉者、明行具足。显示巴利原文
‘‘Asītivassasahassāyukesu , bhikkhave, manussesu metteyyo nāma bhagavā loke uppajjissati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno’’ti ca (dī. ni. 3.107) –
诸比丘!那时,名为桑伽的国王,将大镇王所建造的那根柱竖起并居住后,又将该柱施予、散施,并向沙门、婆罗门、贫困者、流浪者、乞求者行布施。随后,他于弥勒世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者座前剃除须发,披上袈裟衣,从俗家出家,过起无家生活。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho, bhikkhave, saṅkho nāma rājā yo so yūpo raññā mahāpanādena kārāpito, taṃ yūpaṃ ussāpetvā ajjhāvasitvā taṃ datvā vissajjitvā samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṃ dānaṃ datvā metteyyassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa santike kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajissatī’’ti ca (dī. ni. 3.108) –
于未来世,将有一位名为“骨声”的独觉佛出现(《弥林达问经》4.1.3),又说:“将有一位名为‘善意王’的独觉佛出现”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anāgate aṭṭhissaro nāma paccekasambuddho bhavissatī’’ti (mi. pa. 4.1.3) ca, ‘‘sumanissaro nāma paccekasambuddho bhavissatī’’ti ca –
他以这样的方式,讲述了提婆达多等人的未来。他也指示当下,这自不待言。显示巴利原文
Ādinā nayena devadattādīnaṃ anāgataṃ ācikkhati. Paccuppannampi ādisatīti idaṃ pākaṭameva.
82 “已超越色想者”:指已超越色想的人。“舍弃一切身者”:意指以彼分断与镇伏断而舍弃一切色身的人,即已舍断色有结生者。“见无所有者”:指通过观察识的无有而见到“无所有”,即是证得无所有处定的人。“我问能者之智”:此处以“能者”称谓世尊。我问:那样的人,其智应是如何?“应如何引导”:他应如何被引导,方能令更上的智慧生起?显示巴利原文
82.Vibhūtarūpasaññissāti samatikkantarūpasaññissa. Sabbakāyappahāyinoti tadaṅgavikkhambhanavasena sabbarūpakāyapahāyino, pahīnarūpabhavapaṭisandhikassāti adhippāyo. Natthi kiñcīti passatoti viññāṇābhāvadassanena ‘‘natthi kiñcī’’ti passato, ākiñcaññāyatanalābhinoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ñāṇaṃ sakkānupucchāmīti sakkāti bhagavantaṃ ālapanto āha. Tassa puggalassa ñāṇaṃ pucchāmi, kīdisaṃ icchitabbanti. Kathaṃ neyyāti kathañca so netabbo, kathamassa uttariñāṇaṃ uppādetabbanti.
什么是色想?在此,“色想”是指以想为主而说的色界禅那及其所缘。色界禅那亦称为“色”,如“有色者见诸色”等所說。其所属的所缘也称作“色”,如“于外见诸色,有美有丑”等所說。因此,这里“于色有想”即是色想,如此以想为主,这是对色界禅那的称法。所谓“以色为想者”即是色想,意思是“以色为名”。须知,这也是对地遍等分类及其所缘的称法。然而在这里,是特指依善、果报、唯作而说的十五种禅那所含摄的色想。“入色界定者”:指进入色界善禅定的人。“生起者”:指依果报禅那而生起于该有的人。“现法乐住者”:指就在此有身中,进入唯作禅那并以乐而住的人。“于无色定”:指空无边处定等。“已获得者”:指已生起无色定并安住的人。“色想已远离”:指色想已经离去、消失、破坏。另有一异读作‘Abhāvitā’,这同样是一种好的读法。显示巴利原文
Katamārūpasaññāti ettha rūpasaññāti saññāsīsena vuttarūpāvacarajhānañceva tadārammaṇañca. Rūpāvacarajhānampi hi rūpanti vuccati ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 248; paṭi. ma. 1.209). Tassa ārammaṇampi ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passati suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 223). Tasmā idha rūpe saññā rūpasaññāti evaṃ saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Rūpaṃ saññā assāti rūpasaññā, rūpamassa nāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ pathavīkasiṇādibhedassa tadārammaṇassa cetaṃ adhivacananti veditabbaṃ. Idha pana kusalavipākakiriyavasena pañcadasajhānasaṅkhātā rūpasaññā eva adhippetā . Rūpāvacarasamāpattiṃsamāpannassa vāti rūpāvacarakusalajjhānasamāpattiṃ samāpannassa. Upapannassa vāti vipākajjhānavasena tasmiṃ bhave upapannassa. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vāti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve kiriyājhānaṃ samāpajjitvā sukhaṃ uppādetvā viharantassa. Arūpasamāpattiyoti ākāsānañcāyatanādīni. Paṭiladdhassāti uppādetvā ṭhitassa. Rūpasaññā vibhūtā hontīti rūpasaññā apagatā honti. Vigatāti vināsitā. ‘‘Abhāvitā’’tipi pāṭho, sundaro.
“以彼分超越”:指以彼分舍断的方式而超越。“以镇伏断舍断”:指以证得无色禅那而通过镇伏予以舍断。“他的色身”:指那位证得无色定者——即无色界众生的色界身。显示巴利原文
Tadaṅgasamatikkamāti tadaṅgappahānavasena atikkamena. Vikkhambhanappahānena pahīnoti arūpajjhānapaṭilābhena vikkhambhanena pahīno. Tassa rūpakāyoti tassa arūpasamāpattipaṭilābhino arūpapuggalassa rūpāvacarakāyo.
“无所有处”:这里,“他没有任何东西”即无所有,意思是说,他连丝毫的积聚残余都没有,故说为“无所”。无所有的状态即是“无所有”,这是空无边处识已离去的增语。这个“无所有”作为依止处之义,即是此想所缘的处所,因此称为无所有处。实际上,这是以在虚空中转起的识之消逝为所缘的禅那的增语。“入识无边处定,已念知者”:即于念知的状态下,进入该识无边处定。“从彼出定”:于念知的状态下,从该定中出来。“就彼识”:即那个在虚空中转起的广大识。“使非有”:破坏它。“使消失”:以种种方式消灭它。“使隐没”:令它不复可见。显示巴利原文
Ākiñcaññāyatananti ettha nāssa kiñcananti akiñcanaṃ, antamaso saṅgamattampi assa avasiṭṭhaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Akiñcanassa bhāvo ākiñcaññaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇāpagamassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, taṃ ākiñcaññaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena imissā saññāya āyatananti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ, ākāse pavattitaviññāṇāpagamārammaṇassa jhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ sato samāpajjitvāti taṃ viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ satokārī hutvā samāpajjitvā. Tato vuṭṭhahitvāti satokārī hutvā tāya samāpattiyā vuṭṭhāya. Taññeva viññāṇanti taṃ ākāse pavattitaṃ mahaggataviññāṇaṃ. Abhāvetīti vināseti. Vibhāvetīti vividhā nāseti. Antaradhāpetīti adassanaṃ gameti.
「应如何被引导」(kathaṃso netabbo):应以何等方式了知那位众生。「应被调伏」(vinetabbo):应以种种方式了知。「应被随顺」(anunetabbo):应反复以心使之通达。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃso netabboti so puggalo kenappakārena jānitabbo. Vinetabboti nānāvidhena jānitabbo. Anunetabboti punappunaṃ cittena kathaṃ gamayitabbo.
于是,世尊针对那样的众生,显示了自己无碍的智慧,为开示此智而说出偈颂。其中,「知一切识住的如来」(viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo sabbā, abhijānaṃ tathāgato):以行(造作)有四种,以结生有七种——如此了知一切识住的,即是如来。「知彼住立」(tiṭṭhantamenaṃ jānāti):以业行方式,了知这位众生住立——了知‘未来他将成为如此趣向者’。「已倾向」(adhimutta):已倾向于无所有处等。「以彼为皈依」(tapparāyaṇa):成为以彼为本质者。显示巴利原文
Athassa bhagavā tādise puggale attano appaṭihatañāṇataṃ pakāsetvā taṃ ñāṇaṃ byākātuṃ gāthamāha. Tattha viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo sabbā, abhijānaṃ tathāgatoti abhisaṅkhāravasena catasso paṭisandhivasena sattāti evaṃ sabbā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo abhijānanto tathāgato. Tiṭṭhantamenaṃ jānātīti kammābhisaṅkhāravasena tiṭṭhametaṃ puggalaṃ jānāti – ‘‘āyatiṃ ayaṃ evaṃgatiko bhavissatī’’ti. Dhimuttanti ākiñcaññāyatanādīsu adhimuttaṃ. Tapparāyaṇanti tammayaṃ.
“识住”:是结生识的住处,即具有识的蕴。其中,“例如”是一个表示举例的虚词,意为“如同人类”。因为在无量的轮围世界中,有无量的人类,其容貌、体形等,即使找两个人,也没有完全相同的。纵然某些地方有双胞胎在肤色或形体上相似,他们在顾盼等神态上也总是不同。因此说他们是“异身”。但他们的结生想可能有三因、二因或无因,所以又说“异想”。“一类天”:指六欲界天。在这些天中,有些天的身色为蓝色,有些为黄色等。他们的想可能是三因或二因,但不是无因。“一类堕处者”:指已从四恶趣中脱离的众生,如富那婆薮之母——女夜叉、爱母、福善、法护等,以及其他住在宫殿中的饿鬼。他们的身,因肤色有白、黑、芒果树色等,体态有瘦、胖、粗、长等,故各不相同;想则如同人类,有三因、二因、无因的差别。然而他们不像天那样有大威德,而像可怜的人那样少威德,难以获得衣食,被痛苦逼迫而生存。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti paṭisandhiviññāṇassa ṭhānāni saviññāṇakā khandhā eva. Tattha seyyathāpīti nidassanatthe nipāto yathā manussāti attho. Aparimāṇesupi hi cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇānaṃ manussānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena dvepi ekasadisā natthi. Yepi hi katthaci yamakabhātaro vaṇṇena vā saṇṭhānena vā sadisā honti. Tepi ālokitavilokitādīhi visadisāva honti. Tasmā ‘‘nānattakāyā’’ti vuttā. Paṭisandhisaññā pana nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi ahetukāpi hoti. Tasmā ‘‘nānattasaññino’’ti vuttā. Ekacce ca devāti cha kāmāvacaradevā. Tesu hi kesañci kāyo nīlo hoti, kesañci pītakādivaṇṇo. Saññā pana nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi hoti, ahetukā na hoti. Ekacce ca vinipātikāti catuapāyavinimuttā punabbasumātā yakkhinī piyaṅkaramātā phussamittā dhammaguttāti evamādayo aññe ca vemānikā petā. Etesañhi odātakāḷamaṅguracchavisāmavaṇṇādivasena ceva kisathūlarassadīghavasena ca kāyo nānā hoti, manussānaṃ viya tihetukaduhetukāhetukavasena saññāpi. Te pana devā viya na mahesakkhā, kapaṇamanussā viya appesakkhā dullabhaghāsacchādanā dukkhapīḷitā viharanti. Ekacce kāḷapakkhe dukkhitā juṇhapakkhe sukhitā honti, tasmā sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā vinipātikāti vuttā. Ye panettha tihetukā, tesaṃ dhammābhisamayopi hoti piyaṅkaramātādīnaṃ viya.
“梵身天”:指梵众天、梵辅天和大梵天。“初生者”:他们全部是由初禅投生的。然而,梵众天是由下品初禅投生,梵辅天是由中品初禅投生,大梵天是由上品初禅投生。因此,他们的身体彼此有差异,而想都是基于同一初禅而相同,所以称为“身异想一”。与诸天相同,四恶趣的众生也是如此。在地狱中,有些众生的身体只有一牛呼大,有些有半由旬,有些有三牛呼,而提婆达多的身体则有一百由旬。畜生中,有的很小,有的很大。在饿鬼界中,有的身高六十肘,有的身高八十肘,有的是金色,有的相貌丑陋。黑闇天的阿修罗也是这样。而且,这里还有一种名为“长脊鬼”的,据说其身长甚至达到六十由旬。然而,所有这些恶趣众生的想都是不善异熟无因的。因此,恶趣众生也被列入“身异想一”之中。显示巴利原文
Brahmakāyikāti brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmāno. Paṭhamābhinibbattāti te sabbepi paṭhamajjhānena nibbattā. Brahmapārisajjā pana parittena, brahmapurohitā majjhimena, kāyova nesaṃ vipphārikataro hoti. Mahābrahmāno paṇītena, kāyo pana nesaṃ ativipphārikataro hoti. Iti te kāyassa nānattā, paṭhamajjhānavasena saññāya ekattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññinoti vuttā. Yathā ca te, evaṃ catūsu apāyesu sattā. Nirayesu hi kesañci gāvutaṃ, kesañci aḍḍhayojanaṃ, kesañci tigāvutaṃ attabhāvo hoti, devadattassa pana yojanasatiko jāto. Tiracchānesupi keci khuddakā honti, keci mahantā. Pettivisayesupi keci saṭṭhihatthā, keci asītihatthā honti, keci suvaṇṇā, keci dubbaṇṇā. Tathā kālakañcikā asurā. Api cettha dīghapiṭṭhikapetā nāma saṭṭhiyojanikāpi honti. Saññā pana sabbesampi akusalavipākāhetukāva hoti. Iti āpāyikāpi nānattakāyā ekattasaññinoti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti.
“发光天”:犹如火炬的火花,光明从他们的身体断断续续地飘散遍满,所以称为“发光天”。在他们之中,按照五法来分,修习下品的第二禅那和第三禅那而生者,称为“少光天”;修习中品而生者,称为“无量光天”;修习上品而生者,称为“发光天”。但在这里是依最高的界限而总括了一切。因为所有这些天的身量都同样广大,而想则有“有寻有伺”与“无寻无伺”的差别,所以会有不同。显示巴利原文
Ābhassarāti daṇḍaukkāya acci viya etesaṃ sarīrato ābhā chijjitvā chijjitvā patantī viya sarati visaratīti ābhassarā. Tesu pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyajjhānadvayaṃ parittaṃ bhāvetvā upapannā parittābhā nāma honti. Majjhimaṃ bhāvetvā upapannā appamāṇābhā nāma honti. Paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā upapannā ābhassarā nāma honti. Idha pana ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sabbe gahitā. Sabbesañhi tesaṃ kāyo ekavipphārova hoti, saññā pana avitakkavicāramattā ca avitakkaavicārā cāti nānā.
遍净天(Subhakiṇhā):意为“被净色所遍满”,即由清净之色与身光之色融合为同一体性。这些天的光明并非如光音天那般断断续续地放射。依四法论中的第三禅,或五法论中的第四禅,由下、中、上品禅那之力,分别生为少净天、无量净天与遍净天。因此,应知他们身相相同,且依第四禅的想而有相同的想。广果天亦属于第四识住。无想有情由于没有心识,故不归入此处,而归入众生居。显示巴利原文
Subhakiṇhāti subhena vokiṇṇā, subhena sarīrappabhāvaṇṇena ekagghanāti attho. Etesañhi na ābhassarānaṃ viya chijjitvā chijjitvā pabhā gacchatīti. Catukkanaye tatiyassa pañcakanaye catukkassa parittamajjhimapaṇītassa jhānassa vasena parittasubhaappamāṇasubhasubhakiṇhā nāma hutvā nibbattanti. Iti sabbepi te ekattakāyā ceva catutthajjhānasaññāya ekattasaññino cāti veditabbā. Vehapphalāpi catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitimeva bhajanti. Asaññasattā viññāṇābhāvā ettha saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti, sattāvāsesu gacchanti.
净居天安住于还灭分,并非一切时皆存在;在无佛出世的百劫、千劫乃至无数劫期间,他们不会出现。只有在万六千劫内有佛陀出世时,他们才会出现。他们犹如世尊转法轮时之蕴的住处(般涅槃后不再转生)。因此,他们既不归属于识住,也不归属于众生居。然而,大尸婆长老依据《中部·根修习经》中“舍利弗,我在这般长久的时间里,除了净居天之外,从未住过这样的住处,这实属难得”的这一段话,提出“净居天也归属于第四识住和第四众生居”的观点。此说因未被经典所否定,故为所认可。显示巴利原文
Suddhāvāsā vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitā, na sabbakālikā, kappasatasahassampi asaṅkhyeyyampi buddhasuññe loke na uppajjanti. Soḷasakappasahassabbhantare buddhesu uppannesuyeva uppajjanti. Dhammacakkapavattissa (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) bhagavato khandhāvārasadisā honti. Tasmā neva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ, na ca sattāvāsaṃ bhajanti. Mahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘na kho pana so, sāriputta, āvāso sulabharūpo, yo mayā anāvuṭṭhapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehīti iminā suttena (ma. ni. 1.160) suddhāvāsāpi catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ catutthasattāvāsañca bhajantī’’ti vadati, taṃ appaṭibāhitattā suttassa anuññātaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.7.44-45; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.21).
“超越一切色想”:在此,“一切”(sabbaso)是指以一切方式,或毫无遗漏地全部。“色想”(rūpasaññānaṃ)是以“想”为首而说的色界禅那及其所缘。因为色界禅那在“有色者见色”等经文中也被称作“色”,而该禅那的所缘在“于外见色,有美有丑”等经文中也被称作“色”。因此,这里以“对于色而有想,故为色想”的方式,将此作为以色想为首而说的色界禅那的别名。因缘取彼色而生想,故称色想,意即以色为名。应知这也随顺于遍、等等差别,而作为该禅那所缘的代称。显示巴利原文
Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamāti ettha sabbasoti sabbākārena, sabbāsaṃ vā anavasesānanti attho. Rūpasaññānanti saññāsīsena vuttarūpāvacarajjhānānañceva tadārammaṇānañca. Rūpāvacarajjhānampi hi rūpanti vuccati ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 248; paṭi. ma. 1.209), tassa ārammaṇampi ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passati suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 223). Tasmā idha ‘‘rūpe saññā rūpasaññā’’ti evaṃ saññāsīsena vuttarūpāvacarajjhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Rūpaṃ saññā assāti rūpasaññā, rūpamassa nāmanti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ pathavīkasiṇādibhedassa tadārammaṇassa cetaṃ adhivacananti veditabbaṃ.
“超越”(samatikkamā):即由离染、由灭而超越。这句话是什么意思呢?对于依善、异熟、唯作分类的十五种禅那色想,以及依地遍等分类的八种所缘色想,以一切方式、毫无遗漏地,由离染、由灭——亦即以离染为因、以灭为因——进入并安住于空无边处。因为,若不超越一切色想,便不可能进入并安住于该处。对此,若于所缘未得离染,便不可能有想的超越;当想被超越时,所缘也就同时被超越了。因此,虽然没有直接说超越所缘——显示巴利原文
Samatikkamāti virāgā nirodhā ca. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Etāsaṃ kusalavipākakiriyavasena pañcadasannaṃ jhānasaṅkhātānaṃ rūpasaññānaṃ etesañca pathavīkasiṇādivasena aṭṭhannaṃ ārammaṇasaṅkhātānaṃ rūpasaññānaṃ sabbākārena anavasesānaṃ vā virāgā ca nirodhā ca virāgahetu ceva nirodhahetu ca ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Na hi sakkā sabbaso anatikkantarūpasaññena etaṃ upasampajja viharitunti. Tattha yasmā ārammaṇe avirattassa saññāsamatikkamo na hoti, samatikkantāsu ca saññāsu ārammaṇaṃ samatikkantameva hoti. Tasmā ārammaṇasamatikkamaṃ avatvā –
因此,《分别论》中说:“其中,何等为色想?入色界等至者、生于色界者、体验现法乐住者的想、了知、了知性,这些即称为色想。若已超越、完全超越、彻底超越这些色想,即说为‘超越一切色想’。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamā rūpasaññā? Rūpāvacarasamāpattiṃ samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā saññā sañjānanā sañjānitattaṃ, imā vuccanti rūpasaññāyo. Imā rūpasaññāyo atikkanto hoti vītikkanto samatikkanto, tena vuccati sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā’’ti –
如是,《分别论》中唯说超越想。然而应知,由于这些等至须由超越所缘而证得,并非如同初禅等仍依于同一所缘,因此这里也以超越所缘为依据来作义释。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vibhaṅge (vibha. 602) saññānaṃyeva samatikkamo vutto. Yasmā pana ārammaṇasamatikkamena pattabbā etā samāpattiyo, na ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe paṭhamajjhānādīni viya, tasmā ayaṃ ārammaṇasamatikkamavasenāpi atthavaṇṇanā katāti veditabbā.
“除遣有对想”:因与眼等感官基、色等所缘碰撞而生起的想,名为“有对想”,这是色想等的别名。如经中说:“其中,何谓有对想?色想、声想、香想、味想、触想,这些称为有对想。”应知这十种有对想——包括五种善异熟与五种不善异熟——皆被除去、断除,不再生起,令其止息。显示巴利原文
Paṭighasaññānaṃatthaṅgamāti cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ rūpādīnaṃ ārammaṇānañca paṭighātena uppannā saññā paṭighasaññā, rūpasaññādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘tattha katamā paṭighasaññā? Rūpasaññā saddasaññā gandhasaññā rasasaññā phoṭṭhabbasaññā, imā vuccanti paṭighasaññāyo’’ti (vibha. 603). Tāsaṃ kusalavipākānaṃ pañcannaṃ akusalavipākānaṃ pañcannanti sabbaso dasannaṃ paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā pahānā asamuppādā, appavattiṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
虽然入初禅等定者确实也不生起这些想——因那时心不依五门转起——然而,正如在别处已断除的乐与苦在第四禅中仍被提及,又如第三道所断的有身见等仍被提及一样,在此处提及它们,旨在策励对此禅那的勤修,或为赞叹此禅那的功德。再者,尽管入色界定时它们不存在,但这种不存在并非出于已断除——因为色界修习并不导向离色,而这些想的转起是依赖于色的;但此处的无色修习却是导向离色的。因此,在这里说它们“已断除”是恰当的。不仅是可以如此说,而且必须如此确信。正因为它们在之前未被断除,世尊才说“入初禅者,声音是其刺”。而在这里,正因它们已断除,才说无色定是不动、寂静的解脱,并说:“阿罗罗·伽蓝入无色定时,有五百辆车经过、靠近、驶过,他既没看见,也没听到声音。”显示巴利原文
Kāmañcetā paṭhamajjhānādīni samāpannassāpi na santi, na hi tasmiṃ samaye pañcadvāravasena cittaṃ pavattati, evaṃ santepi aññattha pahīnānaṃ sukhadukkhānaṃ catutthajjhāne viya sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ tatiyamagge viya ca imasmiṃyeva jhāne ussāhajananatthaṃ imassa jhānassa pasaṃsāvasena etāsaṃ ettha vacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Atha vā – kiñcāpi tā rūpāvacaraṃ samāpannassa na santi, atha kho na pahīnattā na santi, na hi rūpavirāgāya rūpāvacarabhāvanā saṃvattati, rūpāyattā ca etāsaṃ pavatti, ayaṃ pana bhāvanā rūpavirāgāya saṃvattati . Tasmā tā ettha ‘‘pahīnā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Na kevalañca vattuṃ, ekaṃseneva evaṃ dhāretumpi vaṭṭati. Tāsañhi ito pubbe appahīnattāyeva ‘‘paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpannassa saddo kaṇṭako’’ti (a. ni. 10.72) vutto bhagavatā. Idha ca pahīnattāyeva arūpasamāpattīnaṃ āneñjatā santavimokkhatā ca vuttā – ‘‘āḷāro ca kālāmo arūpaṃ samāpanno pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni nissāya nissāya atikkantāni neva addasa, na pana saddaṃ assosī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.192).
“对种种想不作意”:是指对在种种不同的所缘境域中转起的想,或是指对种种不同类别的想不作意。因为以下这些——显示巴利原文
Nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārāti nānatte gocare pavattānaṃ saññānaṃ, nānattānaṃ vā saññānaṃ. Yasmā hi etā –
其中,什么是“种种想”?未得定者处于意界或意识界时,所有的想、了知、了知的状态,这些便称为种种想。(《分别论》604)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamā nānattasaññā? Asamāpannassa manodhātusamaṅgissa vā manoviññāṇadhātusamaṅgissa vā saññā sañjānanā sañjānitattaṃ, imā vuccanti nānattasaññāyo’’ti (vibha. 604) –
正如《分别论》中所详细分别的,这里所指的正是那些未得定者所含摄于意界及意识界的想。这些想在色、声等种种不同、自性各异的所缘中生起。又因为这四十四种想——即八欲界善想、十二不善想、十一欲界善异熟想、二不善异熟想、十一欲界唯作想——种类繁多、自性各异、互不相似,故称为「种种想」。而「对这一切种种想全然不作意」,是指不转向它们、不对它们作意、不令它们现起、不观察它们。正因他确实不转向、不作意、不观察它们,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vibhaṅge vibhajitvā vuttāva idha adhippetā asamāpannassa manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātusaṅgahitā saññā rūpasaddādibhede nānatte nānāsabhāve gocare pavattanti. Yasmā cetā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalasaññā dvādasa akusalasaññā ekādasa kāmāvacarakusalavipākasaññā dve akusalavipākasaññā ekādasa kāmāvacarakiriyasaññāti evaṃ catucattālīsampi saññā nānattā nānāsabhāvā aññamaññaṃ asadisā, tasmā ‘‘nānattasaññā’’ti vuttā. Tāsaṃ sabbaso nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā anāvajjanā asamannāhārā apaccavekkhaṇā. Yasmā tā nāvajjati na manasikaroti na paccavekkhati, tasmāti vuttaṃ hoti.
在此,之前的「色想」与「嗔想」,即使在由此禅那所投生的生存界中都已不存在,更何况正在那生存界中安住于此禅那的时刻。因此,对它们说「超越」与「灭没」,实际上只是说它们全然无有。然而,对于「种种想」,由于八欲界善想、九唯作想、十不善想——这二十七种想,在由此禅那所投生的生存界中依旧存在,因此应知,对它们说的是「不作意」。因为即使在那里,安住此禅那的禅修者也是通过「不作意」它们而安住的;若转而作意它们,便不再是入定者了。简而言之,这里应如是解:「超越色想」此句,指对一切色界法的舍断;「灭没嗔想、不作意种种想」此句,指对一切欲界心心所的舍断与不作意。显示巴利原文
Yasmā cettha purimā rūpasaññā paṭighasaññā ca iminā jhānena nibbatte bhavepi na vijjanti, pageva tasmiṃ bhave imaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇakāle, tasmā tāsaṃ ‘‘samatikkamā atthaṅgamā’’ti dvedhāpi abhāvoyeva vutto. Nānattasaññāsu pana yasmā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalasaññā nava kiriyasaññā dasa akusalasaññāti, imā sattavīsati saññā iminā jhānena nibbatte bhave vijjanti, tasmā tāsaṃ ‘‘amanasikārā’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tatrāpi hi imaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharanto tāsaṃ amanasikārāyeva upasampajja viharati, tā pana manasikaronto asamāpanno hotīti. Saṅkhepato cettha ‘‘rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā’’ti iminā sabbarūpāvacaradhammānaṃ pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā’’ti iminā sabbesaṃ kāmāvacaracittacetasikānañca pahānaṃ amanasikāro ca vuttoti veditabbo (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.213).
世尊便以“超越十五种色想”“灭没十种有对想”“于四十四种异相不作意”这三句,赞叹空无边处定。若问为何如此?这既是为激发听法者的精进,也是为了诱引他们。因为,若有些愚人可能这样想:“导师教导我们证得空无边处定,可证得这一定到底有何意义?有何功德?”为了避免他们生起这样的念头,世尊便以此方式赞叹此定的功德。他们听闻之后,便会如是思惟:“听说此定如此寂静、如此殊胜,我们也应当证得它。”如此,他们便会为证得此定而精进努力。显示巴利原文
Iti bhagavā pannarasannaṃ rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamena dasannaṃ paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamena catucattālīsāya nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārenāti tīhi padehi ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā vaṇṇaṃ kathesi. Kiṃ kāraṇāti ce? Sotūnaṃ ussāhajananatthañceva palobhanatthañca. Sace hi keci apaṇḍitā vadeyyuṃ – ‘‘satthā ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ nibbattethāti vadati, ko nu kho etāya nibbattitāya attho, ko ānisaṃso’’ti. ‘‘Te evaṃ vattuṃ mā labhantū’’ti imehi ākārehi samāpattiyā vaṇṇaṃ kathesi. Tañhi nesaṃ sutvā evaṃ bhavissati – ‘‘evaṃ santā kira ayaṃ samāpatti evaṃ paṇītā, nibbattessāma na’’nti, athassā nibbattanatthāya ussāhaṃ karissantīti.
而为了诱引他们,世尊宣说此定的功德,犹如一位卖刺毒的商人。所谓“刺毒商人”,即是指卖糖的商贩。据说,他将糖、糖浆、糖块、砂糖等装上货车,运至边地的村落,高声叫卖:“来买刺毒!来买刺毒!”村民听后心想:“毒这东西极为猛烈,谁吃了便会丧命;刺也能刺死人。两者都如此可怕,买来有何益处?”于是便纷纷关上家门,连孩童也都避开。商人见此情形,心想:“这些村民不懂买卖之道,我须用些方法让他们来买。”于是,他改口高声叫卖:“来买这极为甘甜之物!来买这极为可口之物!糖、糖浆、砂糖,以贱价便能买到,即使用微末的小钱也能换来!”村民听后,都兴高采烈地跑来,以高价竞相购买。显示巴利原文
Palobhanatthañcāpi tesaṃ etissā vaṇṇaṃ kathesi visakaṇṭakavāṇijoviya, visakaṇṭakavāṇijo nāma guḷavāṇijo vuccati. So kira guḷaphāṇitakhaṇḍasakkarādīni sakaṭena ādāya paccantagāmaṃ gantvā ‘‘visakaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhatha, visakaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti ugghosesi. Taṃ sutvā gāmikā ‘‘visaṃ nāma kakkhaḷaṃ, yo naṃ khādati, so marati, kaṇṭakopi vijjhitvā māreti, ubhopete kakkhaḷā, ko ettha ānisaṃso’’ti gehadvārāni thakesuṃ, dārake ca palāpesuṃ. Taṃ disvā vāṇijo ‘‘avohārakusalā ime gāmikā, handa ne upāyena gaṇhāpemī’’ti ‘‘atimadhuraṃ gaṇhatha, atisāduṃ gaṇhatha, guḷaṃ phāṇitaṃ sakkaraṃ samagghaṃ labbhati, kūṭamāsakakūṭakahāpaṇādīhipi labbhatī’’ti ugghosesi. Taṃ sutvā gāmikā haṭṭhapahaṭṭhā nikkhantā bahumpi mūlaṃ datvā gahesuṃ.
在这里,商人大喊“来买刺毒啊”,正如世尊所说“你们应当证得空无边处定”。村民心想“这两样东西都如此可怕,买了有何益处”,则正如听法者心想“世尊吩咐我们证得空无边处定,这到底有何功德?我们并不知晓它的殊胜”。其后,商人又说“来买这极为甘甜之物”等,便如同世尊开示超越色想等功德。因为听法者听闻这些功德后,如同村民以高价买糖一般,心被功德吸引,于是发起大精进,为证得此定而努力。因此,世尊正是为了激发精进并诱引他们,而宣说了这些。显示巴利原文
Tattha vāṇijassa ‘‘visakaṇṭakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti ugghosanaṃ viya bhagavato ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ nibbattethā’’ti vacanaṃ. ‘‘Ubhopete kakkhaḷā, ko ettha ānisaṃso’’ti gāmikānaṃ cintanaṃ viya ‘‘bhagavā ‘ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ nibbattethā’ti āha, ko nu kho ettha ānisaṃso, nāssa guṇaṃ jānāmā’’ti sotūnaṃ cintanaṃ. Athassa vāṇijassa ‘‘atimadhuraṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādivacanaṃ viya bhagavato rūpasaññāsamatikkamanādikaṃ ānisaṃsappakāsanaṃ. Idañhi sutvā te bahumpi mūlaṃ datvā gāmikā viya guḷaṃ ‘‘iminā ānisaṃsena palobhitacittā mahantampi ussāhaṃ katvā imaṃ samāpattiṃ nibbattessantī’’ti ussāhajananatthaṃ palobhanatthañca kathesi.
「往生空无边处者」:此处,因其无有边际,故名「无边」。虚空无有边际,故称「空无边」;此空无边本身即是「空无边」。以此作为所依之处,对此禅那及其相应法而言,它便是「处」,犹如诸天的天处,故说「空无边处」。这是抽去遍相后虚空的别名。在那里证得禅那,并以结生而往生空无边处有的有情,即名「往生空无边处者」。以下,我们将只解说其中的差别。显示巴利原文
Ākāsānañcāyatanūpagāti ettha nāssa antoti anantaṃ, ākāsaṃ anantaṃ ākāsānantaṃ, ākāsānantaṃ eva ākāsānañcaṃ, taṃ ākāsānañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa devānaṃ devāyatanamivāti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ. Kasiṇugghāṭimākāsassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tattha jhānaṃ nibbattetvā paṭisandhivasena ākāsānañcāyatanabhavaṃ upagatā ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ito paresu visesamattameva vaṇṇayissāma (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 265, 1436-7).
「超越空无边处」:此处,依前所说之理,空无边处因“以此为所依处”之义,故禅那本身亦名空无边处;所缘亦据同理而称空无边处。如此,此禅那与所缘二者,须以令其不现行、不作意的方式,真实超越之后,方能进入并安住于识无边处。当知,“超越空无边处”一语,是合此禅那与所缘二者而说。显示巴利原文
Ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkammāti ettha tāva pubbe vuttanayena ākāsānañcaṃ āyatanamassa adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti jhānampi ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ, vuttanayeneva ārammaṇampi. Evametaṃ jhānañca ārammaṇañcāti ubhayampi appavattikaraṇena ca amanasikaraṇena ca samatikkamitvāva yasmā idaṃ viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharitabbaṃ, tasmā ubhayampetaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkammā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
「往生识无边处者」:此处,因作意“无有边际”,故无边际,即是“无边的”(ananta)。无边的本身即是“ānañcaṃ”。识为无边,然不说“viññāṇānañca”而说“viññāṇañca”——此是此处约定俗成的说法。此识无边本身,以“所依处”义而称为“处”,故名「识无边处」。在那里证得禅那、往生识无边处有的有情,即名「往生识无边处者」。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇañcāyatanūpagāti ettha pana ‘‘ananta’’nti manasikātabbavasena nāssa antoti anantaṃ, anantameva ānañcaṃ, viññāṇaṃ ānañcaṃ ‘‘viññāṇānañca’’nti avatvā ‘‘viññāṇañca’’nti vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha ruḷhīsaddo. Tadeva viññāṇañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatananti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ. Tattha jhānaṃ nibbattetvā viññāṇañcāyatanabhavaṃ upagatā viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā.
“超越识无边处”:此处亦如前说之理,因识无边为其所依处,故禅那本身亦名识无边处;所缘亦依同理称为识无边处。如是,禅那与所缘二者,皆须令其不再生起、不再作意,予以真实超越之后,方能到达并安住于无所有处。因此当知,合此二义,故说“超越识无边处”。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkammāti etthapi pubbe vuttanayeneva viññāṇañcaṃ āyatanamassa adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti jhānampi viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ, vuttanayeneva ca ārammaṇampi. Evametaṃ jhānañca ārammaṇañcāti ubhayampi appavattikaraṇena ca amanasikaraṇena ca samatikkamitvāva yasmā idaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharitabbaṃ, tasmā ubhayampetaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā ‘‘viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkammā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“往生无所有处者”:此处,若无一物即名“无所”,意谓连丝毫残余也不存在。“无所”之状态即是“无所有”,这是空无边处识灭去的同义语。此无所有,以所依处之义而称为“处”,故为“无所有处”。在那里生起禅那后,往生至无所有处有者,即“往生无所有处者”。“这是第七识住”——意即了知这是结生识的第七个住处。至于非想非非想处,不仅想极其微细,识亦同样极其微细,因而既不能说“有识”,也不能说“无识”,故未列入识住之中。显示巴利原文
Ākiñcaññāyatanūpagāti ettha pana nāssa kiñcananti akiñcanaṃ, antamaso bhaṅgamattampi assa avasiṭṭhaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Akiñcanassa bhāvo ākiñcaññaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇāpagamassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākiñcaññaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatananti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ. Tattha jhānaṃ nibbattetvā ākiñcaññāyatanabhavaṃ upagatā ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ sattamaviññāṇaṭṭhitīti imaṃ sattamaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa ṭhānaṃ jānāti . Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ yatheva saññāya, evaṃ viññāṇassāpi sukhumattā neva viññāṇaṃ nāviññāṇaṃ, tasmā viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu na vuttaṃ.
“非实”:指不符合事实的说法,如“色是我”等言。因其为颠倒,故不真实;因其依于邪见,故带来无义。又一种解释:“非实”指不存在、无实体,如对并非贼的人说:“这是你偷来的,并非你家中财产。”“不实”:指所呈现的样貌与事实不符,别有其相。“带来无义”:指不依于此世的利益或他世的利益。对于此类不导向解脱的言论,如来不作回答。真实、如实却带来无义的,是国王论等畜生论,如来亦不回答。真实、如实且能带来利益的,是依于圣谛的言谈,如来对此知时而答。所谓知时,意即在第三种回答中,如来为解答彼问,了知时机;即了知大众能领受、把握之时,依托适当的因缘与时机,方作回答。这便是其义。显示巴利原文
Abhūtanti abhūtatthaṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ attā’’tiādivacanaṃ. Taṃ vipallāsabhāvato atacchaṃ. Diṭṭhinissayato anatthasañhitaṃ. Atha vā abhūtanti asantaṃ avijjamānaṃ. Acorasseva ‘‘idaṃ te corikāya ābhataṃ, na idaṃ tuyhaṃ ghare dhana’’ntiādivacanaṃ. Atacchanti atathākāraṃ aññathā santaṃ. Anatthasañhitanti na idhalokatthaṃ vā paralokatthaṃ vā nissitaṃ. Na taṃ tathāgato byākarotīti taṃ aniyyānikakathaṃ tathāgato na katheti. Bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasañhitanti rājakathāditiracchānakathaṃ. Bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasañhitanti ariyasaccasannissitaṃ. Tatra kālaññū tathāgato hotīti tasmiṃ tatiyabyākaraṇe tassa pañhassa byākaraṇatthāya tathāgato kālaññū hoti. Mahājanassa ādānakālaṃ gahaṇakālaṃ jānitvā sahetukaṃ sakāraṇaṃ katvā yuttapattakāleyeva byākarotīti attho.
在适当时机而说的,称为「应时说者」;说真实自性的,称为「实说者」;说最上义(涅槃)的,称为「义说者」;说道果之法的,称为「法说者」;说律仪等律的,称为「律说者」。这里所说的「见」,是指在无量世间界中,无量众生眼门现前的一切色所缘,他于一切方式完全了知、完全看见。当他如此了知与看见时,无论从可意、不可意等角度,还是从见、闻、觉、识等所得句的角度,例如「什么是那种色,即色处?依四大种所造,有颜色相貌,可见,有对碍,青、黄……」以众多名目、十三个回合、五十二种方式进行分析,这一切都完全如实,毫无虚假。此理同样适用于耳门等处。为显示现前声音等种种差别,故说「所见、所闻」。其中:「所见」指色处;「所闻」指声处;「所觉」指因直接接触而领纳的香处、味处、触处;「所识」指苦、乐等法所缘;「所得」指由寻求而得,或未寻求而得;「所遍求」指对所得或未所得者进行寻索;「以意遍行」指以心随后游历。显示巴利原文
Yuttapattakāle vadatīti kālavādī. Bhūtaṃ sabhāvaṃ vadatīti bhūtavādī. Paramatthaṃ nibbānaṃ vadatīti atthavādī. Maggaphaladhammaṃ vadatīti dhammavādī. Saṃvarādivinayaṃ vadatīti vinayavādī. Tattha diṭṭhanti aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ cakkhudvāresu āpāthaṃ āgacchantaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbākārato jānāti passati. Evaṃ jānatā passatā ca tena taṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasena vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu labbhamānakapadavasena vā ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ? Yaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 617-618) nayena anekehi nāmehi terasahi vārehi dvipaññāsāya nayehi vibhajjamānaṃ tathameva hoti vitathaṃ natthi. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi. Āpāthamāgacchantesu saddādīsu tesaṃ vividhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ suta’’nti āha. Tattha diṭṭhanti rūpāyatanaṃ. Sutanti saddāyatanaṃ. Mutanti patvā gahetabbato gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ. Viññātanti sukhadukkhādidhammārammaṇaṃ. Pattanti pariyesitvā vā apariyesitvā vā pattaṃ. Pariyesitanti pattaṃ vā apattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ. Anuvicaritaṃ manasāti cittena anusañcaritaṃ.
「如来所正觉」:以此说明如下:在无量世间界中,当青、黄等色所缘现前于含天世间的眼门时,了知该众生在此刹那见如是色所缘后,生起悦意、不悦意或中舍之心——如是种种,如来皆已如此正觉。同样,在无量世间界中,当大鼓声、腰鼓声等声所缘现前于含天世间的耳门时;当根香、皮香等香所缘现前于鼻门时;当根味、茎味等味所缘现前于舌门时;当硬、软等归属地界、火界、风界的触所缘现前于身门时,了知该众生在此刹那触如是触所缘后,生起悦意、不悦意或中舍之心——如是种种,如来皆已如此正觉。同样,在无量世间界中,当苦、乐等种种法所缘现前于含天世间的意门时,了知该众生在此刹那识别如是法所缘后,生起悦意、不悦意或中舍之心——如是种种,如来皆已如此正觉。显示巴利原文
Tathāgatena abhisambuddhanti iminā etaṃ dasseti – yañhi aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa nīlaṃ pītakantiādi rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma rūpārammaṇaṃ disvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jāto’’ti sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatassa evaṃ abhisambuddhaṃ. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa bherisaddo mudiṅgasaddotiādi saddārammaṇaṃ sotadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, mūlagandho tacagandhotiādi gandhārammaṇaṃ ghānadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, mūlaraso khandharasotiādi rasārammaṇaṃ jivhādvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, kakkhaḷaṃ mudukantiādi pathavīdhātutejodhātuvāyodhātubhedaṃ phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ kāyadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ phusitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jāto’’ti sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatassa evaṃ abhisambuddhaṃ. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa sukhadukkhādibhedaṃ dhammārammaṇaṃ manodvārassa āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma dhammārammaṇaṃ vijānitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jāto’’ti sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatassa evaṃ abhisambuddhaṃ.
纯陀!这些众生所有见、闻、觉、识的,其中没有任何是如来未曾经见、未曾闻、未曾觉、未曾识的。然而,对于这广大人群,有遍求而不得者,亦有不遍求而不得者;有遍求而得者,亦有不遍求而得者。但对如来而言,没有任何一法未经智慧亲证、未曾到达。因此,才称为「如来」——意思是,世间以如是方式而行,如来即如实到达,故称如来。经中所说「已正觉」,与「行」一词同义。依此道理,应当理解所有段落结尾处「如来」一词的含义。显示巴利原文
Yañhi, cunda, imesaṃ sattānaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ, tattha tathāgatena adiṭṭhaṃ vā asutaṃ vā amutaṃ vā aviññātaṃ vā natthi, imassa pana mahājanassa pariyesitvā apattampi atthi, apariyesitvā apattampi atthi, pariyesitvā pattampi atthi, apariyesitvā pattampi atthi, sabbampi tathāgatassa asampattaṃ nāma natthi ñāṇena asacchikataṃ. Tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatīti yaṃ tathā lokena gataṃ, tassa tatheva gatattā tathāgatoti vuccatīti. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘abhisambuddha’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ gatasaddena ekatthaṃ. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu tathāgatoti nigamassa attho veditabbo (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.188; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.23).
纯陀!如来于证得无上正自觉的那一夜,与入于无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜,在此二夜之间,所说、所谈、所开示的一切,皆完全如实,无有错谬,因此称为如来。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṃ etasmiṃ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati, sabbaṃ taṃ tatheva hoti, no aññathā, tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti –
这里的意思是:世尊于菩提树下,坐于不败之座,摧破三魔而证无上正自觉的那一夜,以及于双沙罗树间,入无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜——在此两夜之间的四十五年中,无论是初期的菩提、中期的菩提还是后期的菩提,世尊所说过的一切法,修多罗、祇夜……乃至……吠陀罗,所有那些法,从义理到文句都无懈可击,既不欠缺也不多余,一切行相圆满具足。它们能镇伏贪的骄慢,能镇伏瞋、痴的骄慢;其中连毫毛尖许的偏差都没有。所有这一切,如同以同一印章所盖的印痕,如同以同一量器所量出的分量,如同以同一杆秤所称出的重量,完全如实,全无虚妄。因此说:‘纯陀!如来……一切皆是如实,非不如是,因此称为如来。’这里的‘行’(gata)字,即是‘语’(gada)的意思。显示巴利原文
Ettha yaṃ rattiṃ bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe apparājitapallaṅke nisinno tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ madditvā anuttarasammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, yañca rattiṃ yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇe kāle paṭhamabodhiyāpi majjhimabodhiyāpi pacchimabodhiyāpi yaṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthato ca byañjanato ca anupavajjaṃ anūnamanadhikaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ rāgamadanimmadanaṃ dosamohamadanimmadanaṃ natthi, tattha vāḷaggamattampi avakkhalitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekamuddikāya lañchitaṃ viya, ekanāḷiyā mitaṃ viya, ekatulāya tulitaṃ viya ca tathameva hoti vitathaṃ natthi. Tenāha – ‘‘yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato…pe… sabbaṃ taṃ tathameva hoti, no aññathā tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti. Gadaattho hi ettha gatasaddo.
再者:‘āgadana’(语说)即是‘āgado’(语),意思为言说。因为他的语如实无颠倒,所以将da音转为ta音,成为‘gato’(行)。应在这一意义上,了知‘如来’(tathāgato)这个词的词源构造。显示巴利原文
Api ca – āgadanaṃ āgado, vacananti attho. Tatho aviparīto āgado assāti da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā gatoti evametasmiṃ atthe padasiddhi veditabbā.
“纯陀!如说而行……称为如来”——在此,世尊的身体随顺其语言,语言也随顺其身体,因此世尊是如说而行、如行而说者。对于如此成就之人,如其语言,身体也如是而转;如其身体,语言也如是而转。因此称为“如来”(tathāgato),即“如此而往”之义。当知此处的词源如此成立。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathāvādī, cunda…pe… vuccatī’’ti ettha bhagavato vācāya kāyo anulometi kāyassapi vācā, tasmā bhagavā yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī ca hoti, evaṃbhūtassa cassa yathā vācā, kāyopi tathā gato pavattoti attho. Yathā ca kāyo, vācāpi tathā gatā pavattāti tathāgatoti evamettha padasiddhi veditabbā.
“阿毗浮”(Abhibhū),意为“未被征服”(anabhibhūto):从最高的有顶天向下,直至最下的无间地狱,于无量世间界中,他以戒、定、慧、解脱征服一切众生,无人能与他相提并论或加以衡量。他是无可称量、不可计量的无上者,是王中之王、天中之天,是超越一切帝释的帝释,超越一切梵天的梵天。“Aññadatthu”是表达决定义的不变词。“Dakkhati”意为“看见”。因为“行使自在”,故称为“自在者”(vasavattī)。显示巴利原文
Abhibhū anabhibhūtoti upari bhavaggaṃ heṭṭhā avīcipariyantaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sabbasatte abhibhavati sīlenapi samādhināpi paññāyapi vimuttiyāpi na tassa tulā vā pamāṇaṃ vā atthi. Atulo appameyyo anuttaro rājarājā devadevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā. Aññadatthūti ekaṃsatthe nipāto. Dakkhatīti daso. Vasaṃ vattetīti vasavattī.
在这里,应当这样理解词源:如同无病之药(agado),什么是此处的无病呢?那就是说法之庄严与功德之积聚。因为这位大威神力的医者,凭其天药降伏了一切外道及包含天神在内的世间,犹如以天药降伏蛇群。如此,于降伏一切世间中,他以如实不颠倒的说法庄严与功德积聚为“无病”(āgado),故将da字转为ta字,便称为“如来”(tathāgato)。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ padasiddhi veditabbā – agado viya agado, ko panesa? Desanāvilāso ceva puññussayo ca. Tena hesa mahānubhāvo bhisakko dibbāgadena sappe viya sabbaparappavādino sadevakañca lokaṃ abhibhavati. Iti sabbalokābhibhavane tatho aviparīto desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññussayo ca agado assāti da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti veditabbo (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7).
“仅知此处之义”(idhatthaññeva jānāti),即依业行而说:由不善业行(非福行)而仅知此处之义。“身体破裂,死后”(kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā),指所执取的五蕴破裂,从死亡之后。“恶趣”(apāya)等词之中,由于缺少名为增长的安乐,故为恶趣;是苦的去处、苦的皈依所,故为苦趣;造作极重恶业者堕在此处,故为堕处;无乐之意、无甘美之意,故为地狱。他将投生到那恶趣……那地狱,即依结生而生起。“畜生道”(tiracchānayoni):横向而行者为畜生,其生处即畜生道,即那畜生道。“饿鬼界”(pettivisaya):已得彼身之众生的领域,即饿鬼界,即那饿鬼界。因心意殊胜而称为人,于人中。此后,此处所说依业行,应取依福行的意义来理解。显示巴利原文
Idhatthaññeva jānāti kammābhisaṅkhāravasenāti apuññābhisaṅkhāravasena idhatthaññeva jānāti. Kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇāti upādinnakhandhabhedā maraṇato paraṃ. Apāyantiādīsu vuḍḍhisaṅkhātasukhasātato ayā apetattā apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati. Dukkarakārino ettha vinipatantīti vinipāto. Niratiaṭṭhena nirassādaṭṭhena nirayo. Taṃ apāyaṃ…pe… nirayaṃ. Upapajjissatīti paṭisandhivasena uppajjissati. Tiracchānayoninti tiriyaṃ añcantīti tiracchānā, tesaṃ yoni tiracchānayoni, taṃ tiracchānayoniṃ. Pettivisayanti paccabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ visayoti pettivisayo, taṃ pettivisayaṃ. Manaso ussannatāya manussā , tesu manussesu. Ito paraṃ kammābhisaṅkhāravasenāti ettha puññābhisaṅkhāravasena attho gahetabbo.
“以漏尽”(āsavānaṃ khayā),即由诸漏的灭尽。“无漏心解脱”(anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ),即远离诸漏的阿拉汉果定。“慧解脱”(paññāvimutti),即阿拉汉果的智慧。应当了知:阿拉汉果定是由离贪而成就的心解脱,阿拉汉果慧是由离无明而成就的慧解脱。又有一说:对于爱欲型者,依安止禅那之力镇伏烦恼后所证得的阿拉汉果,称为离贪心解脱;对于见型者,仅生起近行定,随后作观而证得的阿拉汉果,称为离无明慧解脱。或者,相对于欲贪,不来果是离贪心解脱;而阿拉汉果则从一切方面离无明,故为慧解脱。显示巴利原文
Āsavānaṃ khayāti āsavānaṃ vināsena. Anāsavaṃ cetovimuttinti āsavavirahitaṃ arahattaphalasamādhiṃ. Paññāvimuttinti arahattaphalapaññaṃ. Arahattaphalasamādhi rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, arahattaphalapaññā avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Taṇhācaritena vā appanājhānabalena kilese vikkhambhetvā adhigataṃ arahattaphalaṃ rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, diṭṭhicaritena upacārajjhānamattaṃ nibbattetvā vipassitvā adhigataṃ arahattaphalaṃ avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti. Anāgāmiphalaṃ vā kāmarāgaṃ sandhāya rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, arahattaphalaṃ sabbappakārato avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti.
“倾向无所有处”(ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ dhimuttaṃ),即由解脱(vimokkha)而倾向。问:应从何等意义上理解解脱(vimokkha)?答:以倾向(adhimuccana)的意义。此倾向义又是什么呢?即从敌对法善为解脱的意义,也是依于所缘中的乐着而善为解脱的意义。如同在父亲怀中放松了所有肢节的小孩安然入睡一般,以无拘无束、坦然无虑的方式安住于所缘,这便是所言的意思。以这样的解脱而“倾向”(adhimutta)。从识无边处解脱之后,即以无虑的方式倾向、贴近于无所有处。“于彼倾向”(tatrādhimuttaṃ),即贴近于彼定。“彼倾向”(tadadhimuttaṃ),即倾向彼禅那。“以彼为主导”(tadādhipateyyaṃ),即以彼禅那为最上。所说的“色倾向”(rūpādhimutta)等,是依于五种欲乐而说。显示巴利原文
Ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ dhimuttanti vimokkhenāti kenaṭṭhena vimokkho veditabboti? Adhimuccanaṭṭhena. Ko ayaṃ adhimuccanaṭṭho nāma? Paccanīkadhammehi ca suṭṭhu vimuccanaṭṭho, ārammaṇe ca abhirativasena suṭṭhu vimuccanaṭṭho, pitu aṅke vissaṭṭhaaṅgapaccaṅgassa dārakassa sayanaṃ viya aniggahitabhāvena nirāsaṅkatāya ārammaṇe pavattīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evarūpena vimokkhena dhimuttanti. Viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ muñcitvā ākiñcaññāyatane nirāsaṅkavasena dhimuttaṃ allīnaṃ. Tatrādhimuttanti tasmiṃ samādhimhi allīnaṃ. Tadadhimuttanti tasmiṃ jhāne adhimuttaṃ. Tadādhipateyyanti taṃ jhānaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ. Rūpādhimuttotiādīni pañca kāmaguṇagarukavasena vuttāni. Kulādhimuttotiādīni tīṇi khattiyādikulagarukavasena vuttāni. Lābhādhimuttotiādīni aṭṭha lokadhammavasena vuttāni. Dhīvarādhimuttotiādīni cattāri paccayavasena vuttāni. Suttantādhimuttotiādīni piṭakattayavasena vuttāni. Āraññakaṅgādhimuttotiādīni dhutaṅgasamādānavasena vuttāni. Paṭhamajjhānādhimuttotiādīni paṭilābhavasena vuttāni.
“业为终依”(kammaparāyaṇaṃ),是就“行”(abhisaṅkhāra)而说的。“果报为终依”(vipākaparāyaṇaṃ),是就“转起”(pavatti)而说的。“业重”(kammagarukaṃ),指以“思”(cetanā)为重。“结生重”(paṭisandhigarukaṃ),指以“再生”(upapatti)为重。显示巴利原文
Kammaparāyaṇanti abhisaṅkhāravasena. Vipākaparāyaṇanti pavattivasena. Kammagarukanti cetanāgarukaṃ. Paṭisandhigarukanti upapattigarukaṃ.
84 84. “知道无所有处的生起”(ākiñcaññāsambhavaṃ ñatvā):从无所有处定(ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpatti)出起后,知道能产生无所有处的业行(abhisaṅkhāra),心想:“这是个障碍(palibodha)。”“知道喜的结缚”(nandisaṃyojanaṃ iti):知道那称为第四无色贪(arūparāga)的喜(nandī)也是结(saṃyojana)。“此后在那里观察”(tato tattha vipassati):然后从无所有处定出起后,以无常等观照那定(samāpatti)。“这智慧对他来说真实不虚”(etaṃ ñāṇaṃ tathaṃ tassā):这位补特伽罗(puggala)如此观察后,次第生起的阿拉汉智(arahattañāṇa)是不颠倒的。“对已住于圆满者”(vusīmato):即对于已经住于圆满的人。其余各处,意思都很容易明白。显示巴利原文
84.Ākiñcaññāsambhavaṃ ñatvāti ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattito vuṭṭhahitvā ākiñcaññāyatanajanakakammābhisaṅkhāraṃ ñatvā ‘‘kinti palibodho aya’’nti. Nandisaṃyojanaṃ itīti yā catutthaarūparāgasaṅkhātā nandī tañca saṃyojanaṃ ñatvā. Tato tattha vipassatīti atha tattha ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattito vuṭṭhahitvā taṃ samāpattiṃ aniccādivasena vipassati. Etaṃ ñāṇaṃ tathaṃ tassāti etaṃ tassa puggalassa evaṃ vipassato anukkamena uppannaṃ arahattañāṇaṃ aviparītaṃ. Vusīmatoti vusitavantassa. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
同样地,世尊也是以阿拉汉的顶峰(arahattanikūṭa)来开示这部经的。开示结束时,法现观(dhammābhisamaya)的情形也与前面所述相似。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca pubbasadiso eva dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
在《正法灯明》(Saddhammappajjotikā)的小义释注疏中显示巴利原文
Saddhammappajjotikāya cūḷaniddesa-aṭṭhakathāya
15. 摩伽罗阇童子经义释注释显示巴利原文
15. Mogharājamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
85 在第十五首《摩伽罗阇经》中:“dvāhanti”意为“两次,我”。因为他先前在《阿耆多经》和《提舍弥勒经》的结尾两次问世尊,而世尊等待他的诸根成熟,并未解答。所以他说:“dvāhaṃ sakkaṃ apucchissaṃ”(我两次问释迦)。而“yāvatatiyañca devīsi, byākarotīti me sutaṃ”的意思是:第三次,如法地请问后,那位清净的天仙——世尊、正自觉者给予了回答,这是我这样听闻的。据说他就是在瞿陀伐利河岸边这样听闻的。因此说“byākarotīti me sutaṃ”(给予回答,我闻)。这首偈颂的义释中,那些需要解释的内容,前面都已经说过了。显示巴利原文
85. Pannarasame mogharājasutte – dvāhanti dve vāre ahaṃ. So hi pubbe ajitasuttassa (su. ni. 1038 ādayo) ca tissametteyyasuttassa (su. ni. 1046 ādayo) ca avasāne dvikkhattuṃ bhagavantaṃ pucchi, bhagavā panassa indriyaparipākaṃ āgamayamāno na byākāsi. Tenāha – ‘‘dvāhaṃ sakkaṃ apucchissa’’nti. Yāvatatiyañca devīsi, byākarotīti me sutanti yāvatatiyañca sahadhammikaṃ puṭṭho visuddhidevabhūto isi bhagavā sammāsambuddho byākarotīti evaṃ me sutaṃ. Godhāvarītīreyeva kira so evamassosi. Tenāha – ‘‘byākarotīti me suta’’nti. Imissā gāthāya niddese yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayaṃ eva.
86 “此世间”指的是人界。“他世间”指的是除人界之外的其他世间。“含天神的世间”是指除梵天界之外、包含化生天及世间所认定的一切天神的其余世间。或者,所谓“梵天界是含天神的世间”等说法,只不过是为了显示“含天神的世间”这一说法的示例而已。依此,凡是如此所描述的世间,都应当被了知。显示巴利原文
86.Ayaṃ lokoti manussaloko. Paro lokoti taṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso. Sadevakoti brahmalokaṃ ṭhapetvā avaseso upapattidevasammutidevayutto. ‘‘Brahmaloko sadevako’’ti etaṃ vā ‘‘sadevako loko’’tiādinayanidassanamattaṃ. Tena sabbopi tathāvuttappakāraloko veditabbo.
87 “如此最胜见者”意为:这样一位拥有最胜明见的圣者,也就是他有能力彻见含天神的世间中众生的意乐、意解、趣向与归宿等。显示巴利原文
87.Evaṃ abhikkantadassāvinti evaṃ aggadassāviṃ, sadevakassa lokassa ajjhāsayādhimuttigatiparāyaṇādīni passituṃ samatthanti dasseti.
88 「应观世间为空」的意思是:应当以两种方式观察世间为空——或以观察诸行非自主地生灭,或以观察诸行空虚无实。「拔出我见」是指:拔除有身见。显示巴利原文
88.Suññato lokaṃ avekkhassūti avasiyapavattasallakkhaṇavasena vā tucchasaṅkhārasamanupassanāvasena vāti dvīhākārehi suññato lokaṃ passa. Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhaccāti sakkāyadiṭṭhiṃ uddharitvā.
「Lujjati」即破坏、败坏。「眼」即能看。此眼:在具足辅助条件的眼珠中,被白色巩膜围绕的黑眼珠正中央,正对所缘而立,于被称为“视网膜”之处,作为色身形态生起的部位,相应成就眼识等的依处与门而安住。「色」即显色,意为它们呈现种种颜色变化,从而进入心中。从眼生起的识,或属于眼、依止于眼的识,名为「眼识」。从眼生起的触,名为「眼触」。「以眼触为缘」是指:以与眼识相应的触为缘。「感受」即领纳,也就是「受」。令其生起的对象快乐,故为「乐」,即令生起乐受的对象快乐;又或者能善巧地咀嚼、拔除身心的病痛,故为「乐」。令其生起的对象痛苦,故为「苦」,即令生起苦受的对象痛苦。不苦不乐的,名为「不苦不乐」,此中“不”字依连声规则而说。此眼触,对于与自己相应的受,以俱生、相互、依止、异熟、食、相应、有、不离这八种方式为缘;对于与领受心相应的受,以无间、等无间、亲依止、无、不离这五种方式为缘。显示巴利原文
Lujjatīti bhijjati. Cakkhatīti cakkhu. Tadetaṃ sasambhāracakkhuno setamaṇḍalaparikkhittassa kaṇhamaṇḍalassa majjhe abhimukhe ṭhitānaṃ sarīrasaṇṭhānuppattidesabhūte diṭṭhamaṇḍale cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Rūpayantīti rūpā, vaṇṇavikāramāpajjantā hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsentīti attho. Cakkhuto pavattaṃ viññāṇaṃ , cakkhussa vā cakkhusannissitaṃ vā viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Cakkhuto pavatto samphasso cakkhusamphasso. Cakkhusamphassapaccayāti cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaphassapaccayā. Vedayitanti vindanaṃ, vedanāti attho. Tadeva sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassa uppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khādati, khanati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ. Yassa uppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti attho. Na dukkhaṃ na sukhanti adukkhamasukhaṃ. Ma-kāro sandhipadavasena vutto. So pana cakkhusamphasse attanā sampayuttāya vedanāya sahajātaaññamaññanissayavipākaāhārasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena aṭṭhadhā paccayo hoti, sampaṭicchanasampayuttāya anantarasamanantarūpanissayanatthivigatavasena pañcadhā, santīraṇādisampayuttānaṃ upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti.
「耳」即能听。此耳:在具足辅助条件的耳孔内部,布满细软褐毛、形如指套之处,相应成就耳识等的依处与门而安住。「声」即被发出,意为所说之音。「鼻」即能嗅。此鼻:在具足辅助条件的鼻孔内部,形如山羊足之处,相应成就鼻识等的依处与门而安住。「香」即显示香气,亦即显示其来源。「舌」即召唤生命,或以品尝义而称为舌。此舌:在具足辅助条件的舌头上,避开舌尖、舌根和舌两侧的过近处,于舌面中央,形如裂开的莲花瓣着附之处,相应成就舌识等的依处与门而安住。「味」即有情品尝之物,令有情迷醉。显示巴利原文
Suṇātīti sotaṃ, taṃ sasambhārasotabilassa anto tanutambalomācite aṅgulivedhakasaṇṭhāne padese sotaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Saddīyantīti saddā, udāharīyantīti attho. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ, taṃ sasambhāraghānabilassa anto ajapadasaṇṭhāne padese ghānaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Gandhiyantīti gandhā, attano vatthuṃ sūciyantīti attho. Jīvitaṃ avhāyatīti jivhā, sāyanaṭṭhena vā jivhā. Sā sasambhārajivhāya atiaggamūlapassāni vajjetvā uparimatalamajjhe bhinnauppaladalaggasaṇṭhāne padese jivhāviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānā tiṭṭhati. Rasanti te sattāti rasā, assādentīti attho.
「身」:是诸漏法生起之处;“生起之处”即指它们产生的处所。在这身体中,凡有执取的生命活动之处,身净色大都依彼而成就身识等的依处与门而安住。“Phusiyanti”意为被触及,故名为「触」。“Manati”意为了知,故名为「意」,即识知之义。「法」:是持守自相的事物。这里的「意」特指包含转向作用的有分心;「法」指除涅槃外其余诸法所缘的种种法;「意识」指速行意识;「意触」是与彼意识相应的触。此触对于与己相应的受,除异熟缘之外,以其余七缘为缘;而对于那些无间等的关系,这些法对其他名法唯以亲依止为缘。显示巴利原文
Kucchitānaṃ āsavadhammānaṃ āyoti kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. So yāvatā imasmiṃ kāye upādinnapavatti nāma atthi, tattha yebhuyyena kāyappasādo kāyaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamāno tiṭṭhati. Phusiyantīti phoṭṭhabbā. Manatīti mano, vijānātīti attho. Attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Manoti sahāvajjanabhavaṅgaṃ. Dhammāti nibbānaṃ muñcitvā avasesā dhammārammaṇadhammā. Manoviññāṇanti javanamanoviññāṇaṃ. Manosamphassoti taṃsampayutto phasso, so sampayuttāya vedanāya vipākapaccayavajjehi sesehi sattahi paccayehi paccayo hoti. Anantarāya teheva sesānaṃ upanissayeneva paccayo hoti.
“或以无自主转起之伺察的方式”:即观察并非自主而生起的诸行,也就是以洞察的方式去看。“于色中不得自在”:于色法中,不能获得自在主宰的权力。于受等名法,道理也是如此。显示巴利原文
Avasiyapavattasallakkhaṇavasena vāti avaso hutvā pavattasaṅkhāre passanavasena olokanavasenāti attho. Rūpe vaso na labbhatīti rūpasmiṃ vasavattibhāvo issarabhāvo na labbhati. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
“诸比丘,此身非汝所有”:若执有“我”,方有“我所”之名,然“我”实不存在,故说“诸比丘,此身非汝所有”。“亦非他人所有”:“他人”是指其他众生的“我”。若彼“他我”存在,方有“他人所有”可言,而彼“他我”亦不存在,故说“亦非他人所有”。“诸比丘,这是旧业”:此并非直接就是旧业本身,而是说此身由旧业所生。因此,这是依缘起的假说而作如此表述。至于“所造作”等词,也只是随顺业的假说,依于前词的定性而说。在此处的实际含义是:「所造作」应解为由诸缘所造作;「所策思」应解为以思为因、以思为根;「应受的」应解为感受的依处。显示巴利原文
Nāyaṃ, bhikkhave, kāyo tumhākanti attani sati attaniyaṃ nāma hoti, attāyeva ca natthi. Tasmā ‘‘nāyaṃ, bhikkhave, kāyo tumhāka’’nti āha. Nāpi aññesanti añño nāma paresaṃ attā. Tasmiṃ sati aññesaṃ nāma siyā, sopi natthi. Tasmā ‘‘nāpi aññesa’’nti āha. Purāṇamidaṃ, bhikkhave, kammanti nayidaṃ purāṇakammameva, purāṇakammanibbatto panesa kāyo. Tasmā paccayavohārena evaṃ vutto. Abhisaṅkhatantiādi kammavohārasseva vasena purimaliṅgasabhāvatāya vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha attho – abhisaṅkhatanti paccayehi katoti daṭṭhabbo. Abhisañcetayitanti cetanāvatthuko, cetanāmūlakoti daṭṭhabbo. Vedaniyanti vedanāya vatthūti daṭṭhabbo.
“于色中不得精髓”:即于色中,不得常等精髓;于受等蕴亦然。“色无精髓、缺精髓”:即色无精髓,全无精髓可得,亦“离精髓”,即从精髓中脱离。“以常为精髓”:指超越坏灭而相续之常为精髓。因无任何常之精髓可得,故以常为精髓时,不得精髓。“以乐为精髓”:指超越住立之乐而相续之乐为精髓。因无任何乐之精髓可得,故以乐为精髓时,不得精髓。“以我为精髓”:即以我、我所为精髓。“以常”:因无超越坏灭而相续之常,故以常不得。“以恒”:虽于存续当下亦依缘而转,毫无坚固可得,故以恒不得。“以永恒”:因无任何法于一切时不间断而有,故以永恒不得。“以不变化法”:因诸法于老坏中无不变之性,故以不变化法不得。显示巴利原文
Rūpe sāro na labbhatīti rūpasmiṃ niccādisāro na labbhati. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Rūpaṃ assāraṃ nissāranti rūpaṃ assāraṃ sāravirahitañca. Sārāpagatanti sārato apagataṃ. Niccasārasārena vāti bhaṅgaṃ atikkamitvā pavattamānena niccasārena vā. Kassaci niccasārassa abhāvato niccasārena sāro natthi. Sukhasārasārena vāti ṭhitisukhaṃ atikkamitvā pavattamānassa kassaci sukhasārassa abhāvato sukhasārasārena vā. Attasārasārena vāti attattaniyasārasārena vā. Niccena vāti bhaṅgaṃ atikkamitvā pavattamānassa kassaci niccassa abhāvato niccena vā. Dhuvena vāti vijjamānakālepi paccayāyattavuttitāya thirassa kassaci abhāvato dhuvena vā. Sassatena vāti abbocchinnassa sabbakāle vijjamānassa kassaci abhāvato sassatena vā. Avipariṇāmadhammena vāti jarābhaṅgavasena avipariṇāmapakatikassa kassaci abhāvato avipariṇāmadhammena vā.
“眼空于我或我所”:即眼空于那些被计执为“作者、受者、自在主宰”的我,亦空于名为我所的资具——那仅因有“我”此有身的存在,而被执为“我所有”之物。一切眼等世间法聚,于其中既无我,亦无我所,故说为“空”,此即其义。出世间法亦同空于我及我所,可说“无不空之法”;这里是指,于所缘法中,我与我所的精髓不存在。再者,世间所言“空屋”“空瓶”,非谓屋瓶自身无有,而是指其中无有它物。世尊所阐明者正是此义:“凡于中无者,即以此无而说其为空;凡于中尚有余者,即了知‘此存在’。”于义理书及声韵书中,此亦是同一意涵。因此,于此经中,唯是开示无我相。“无自在者”:即因无自在力,不能自在掌控。“非欲作者”:即不能以不欲、不乐的方式自行造作。“无立足者”:即不能安住,以无立足处故。“不自主者”:即不能随己意而转起。“从他者”:即无常,依于诸缘而转起。“远离者”显示巴利原文
Cakkhusuññaṃ attena vā attaniyena vāti ‘‘kārako vedako sayaṃvasī’’ti evaṃ parikappikena attanā vā attābhāvatoyeva attano santakena parikkhārena ca suññaṃ. Sabbaṃ cakkhādilokiyadhammajātaṃ yasmā attā ca ettha natthi, attaniyañca ettha natthi, tasmā ‘‘suñña’’nti vuccatīti attho . Lokuttarāpi dhammā attattaniyehi suññāyeva, suññātītadhammā natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmiṃ dhamme attattaniyasārassa natthibhāvo vutto hoti. Loke ca ‘‘suññaṃ gharaṃ suñño ghaṭo’’ti vutto gharassa ghaṭassa ca natthibhāvo na hoti, tasmiṃ ghaṭe ca aññassa natthibhāvo vutto hoti. Bhagavatā ca iti yampi koci tattha na hoti, tena taṃ suññaṃ. Yaṃ pana tattha avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti, taṃ santaṃ idamatthīti pajānātīti ayamevattho vutto. Tathā ñāyaganthe saddaganthe ca ayamevattho. Iti imasmiṃ sutte anattalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ. Anissariyatoti attano issariye avasavattanato. Akāmakāriyatoti attano akāmaṃ arucikaraṇavasena. Apāpuṇiyatoti ṭhātuṃ patiṭṭhābhāvato. Avasavattanatoti attano vase avattanato. Paratoti aniccato paccayāyattavuttito. Vivittatoti nissarato.
“纯净”:指排除了所谓自在天、时间、自然等造物主因素,纯粹依于诸缘而转起的存在,此即名为纯净。亦即排除了我所,唯是纯净的法聚。“纯净见缘起,纯净见行相续”:即纯净地见知诸行相续——那无间相续的诸行。如此纯净见者,其有关行等的这些语句,被郑重地重复两遍或三遍。如此见者,于死无有恐惧。“村长”:此为称呼。将“世间视为等同草薪”:此执取蕴所成之世间,当以慧观之如同草薪时。譬如林间,他人取用草、薪等物,不生于“取我、我所”之想;或彼草、薪自衰自灭,亦不生“我衰矣”“我所衰矣”之念。同样,于此身衰败或灭去时,若人不作“我”“我所”破裂之见,唯以慧如视草薪而观,是则名为以慧视世间如草薪。“不希求其他任何东西”:即“除无结生之涅槃外”,除了无结生的涅槃,不希求其他任何生存或有身。显示巴利原文
Suddhanti kevalaṃ issarakālapakatīhi vinā kevalaṃ paccayāyattapavattivasena pavattamānaṃ suddhaṃ nāma. Attaniyavirahito suddhadhammapuñjoti ca. Suddhaṃ dhammasamuppādaṃ, suddhaṃ saṅkhārasantatinti suddhaṃ passantassa jānantassa saṅkhārānaṃ santatiṃ abbocchinnasaṅkhārasantatiṃ. Tatheva suddhaṃ passantassa saṅkhārādīni, ekaṭṭhāni ādarena dvattikkhattuṃ vuttāni. Evaṃ passantassa maraṇamukhe bhayaṃ na hoti. Gāmaṇīti ālapanaṃ. Tiṇakaṭṭhasamaṃ lokanti imaṃ upādinnakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ lokaṃ. Yadā tiṇakaṭṭhasamaṃ paññāya passati. Yathā araññe tiṇakaṭṭhādīsu gaṇhantesu attānaṃ vā attaniyaṃ vā gaṇhātīti na hoti, tesu vā tiṇakaṭṭhādīsu sayameva nassantesupi vinassantesupi attā nassati, attaniyo nassatīti na hoti. Evaṃ imasmiṃ kāyepi nassante vā vinassante vā attā vā attaniyaṃ vā bhijjatīti apassanto paññāya tiṇakaṭṭhasamaṃ passatīti vuccati. Nāññaṃ patthayate kiñci, aññatrappaṭisandhiyāti paṭisandhivirahitaṃ nibbānaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ bhavaṃ vā attabhāvaṃ vā na pattheti.
「遍求色」(Rūpaṃ samannesatīti):即遍求色的精要。「(此是)我」(ahanti vā):此是就‘见’而言。「(此是)我的」(mamanti vā):此是就‘爱’而言。「(我)是」(asmīti vā):此是就‘慢’而言。「这些对他都不存在」(Tampi tassa na hotīti):即此三种(见、爱、慢),于那位补特伽罗皆不存在。显示巴利原文
Rūpaṃ samannesatīti rūpassa sāraṃ pariyesati. Ahanti vāti diṭṭhivasena. Mamanti vāti taṇhāvasena. Asmīti vāti mānavasena. Tampi tassa na hotīti taṃ tividhampi tassa puggalassa na hoti.
「在此」(idhāti):这是一个指示处所的不变化词。此词有时是就‘世间’而说,如云:‘于此,如来出现于世’(《相应部》3.78;《增支部》4.33)。有时是就‘教法’而说,如云:‘诸比丘,于此即是沙门,于此即是第二沙门’(《中部》1.139;《长部》2.214)。有时是就‘空间’而说,如云:——显示巴利原文
Idhāti desāpadese nipāto, svāyaṃ katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.78; a. ni. 4.33). Katthaci sāsanaṃ . Yathāha – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; dī. ni. 2.214). Katthaci okāsaṃ. Yathāha –
我立于此之时,身为天神,正念现前;复得寿命,贤者,你当如是知。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato;
有时它仅作为填充语句之用,如经中所说:“比丘们,我于此已饱食,得满足。”(《中部》1.30)然而在此处,应当了知这是就“世间”而说的。对于“无闻凡夫”一词,在此应知:由于他缺乏“教”与“证”,因此称为“无闻”。也就是说,对于这样一个人,他在蕴、界、处、缘起、念处等法上,既没有通过学习与询问来决断义理、遮止邪见的“教”,也因尚未证得由行道所应证得的法,故没有“证”。此人由于缺少教与证,便被了知为“无闻”。而此人——显示巴利原文
Punarāyu ca me laddho, evaṃ jānāhi mārisā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.369);
“凡夫”:因他们滋生诸多烦恼等,由这些原因,故称为“凡夫”。显示巴利原文
Katthaci padapūraṇamattameva. Yathāha – ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’ti (ma. ni. 1.30). Idha pana lokaṃ upādāya vuttoti veditabbo. Assutavā puthujjanoti ettha pana āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo ‘‘assutavā’’iti. Yassa hi khandhadhātuāyatanapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānādīsu uggahaparipucchāvinicchayarahitattā diṭṭhipaṭisedhako neva āgamo, paṭipattiyā adhigantabbassa anadhigatattā neva adhigamo atthi, so āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo ‘‘assutavā’’ iti. Svāyaṃ –
“凡夫”也可解释为:因为他被包含在凡夫这一群体之中,所以此人属于“广大的人群”。
显示巴利原文 Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano;
他由于生起种种、各式各样的烦恼等因,而成为凡夫。正如经中所说:“生种种烦恼故,称凡夫;种种未破除之有身见者,称凡夫;种种仰望众多导师面庞者,称凡夫;未从一切诸趣出离者,称凡夫;造作种种不同诸行者,称凡夫;为种种不同暴流所漂者,称凡夫;为种种不同热恼所烧者,称凡夫;为种种不同炽热所燃者,称凡夫;于五欲功德深深染着、渴望、执取、沉醉、投入、黏着、被黏住、被系缚者,称凡夫;为五种盖所遮蔽、包围、覆盖、封闭、覆藏、隐藏者,称凡夫。”或者,由于归属于那些为数众多、不可胜数、背离圣法、行持卑劣法的种种人,故亦名凡夫。又因这个人单为一类,与那些具足戒、闻等功德的圣者们相分离,故亦名凡夫。如是,由‘无闻凡夫’二词所指的那类人——显示巴利原文
Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130);
他正是通过生起种种、各式各样的烦恼等因而成为凡夫。正如经中所说:“生种种烦恼故,称凡夫;种种未破除之有身见者,称凡夫;种种仰望众多导师面庞者,称凡夫;未从一切诸趣出离者,称凡夫;造作种种不同诸行者,称凡夫;为种种不同暴流所漂者,称凡夫;为种种不同热恼所烧者,称凡夫;为种种不同炽热所燃者,称凡夫;于五欲功德深深染着、渴望、执取、沉醉、投入、黏着、被黏住、被系缚者,称凡夫;为五种盖所遮蔽、包围、覆盖、封闭、覆藏、隐藏者,称凡夫。”(《大义释》51, 94)或者,由于归属于那些为数众多、不可胜数、背离圣法、行持卑劣法的种种凡……显示巴利原文
So hi puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādīhipi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Yathāha – puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā , puthu avihatasakkāyadiṭṭhikāti puthujjanā, puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikāti puthujjanā, puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti puthujjanā, puthu nānābhisaṅkhāre abhisaṅkharontīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāoghehi vuyhantīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāsantāpehi santappentīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāpariḷāhehi pariḍayhantīti puthujjanā, puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattā giddhā gadhitā muñchitā ajjhosannā laggā laggitā palibuddhāti puthujjanā, puthu pañcahi nīvaraṇehi āvuṭā nivuṭā ovuṭā pihitā paṭicchannā paṭikujjitāti puthujjanā (mahāni. 51, 94), puthūnaṃ vā gaṇanapathamatītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjanā, puthuva ayaṃ visuṃyeva saṅkhyaṃ gato, visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi janotipi puthujjano. Evametehi ‘‘assutavā puthujjano’’ti dvīhi padehi ye te –
太阳族的佛陀曾说有两种凡夫;其中,这里应理解为那盲目的凡夫。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.61; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1007) –
此处「善士」应理解为指独觉佛与如来弟子。因与出世间功德相应,是贤善之人,故称善士。或可说,前述一切圣者皆属此二称谓。佛陀既是圣者亦是善士,独觉佛与佛弟子亦复如是。如经中说:显示巴利原文
Dve puthujjanā vuttā, tesu andhaputhujjano vutto hotīti veditabbo.
此处「善士」应理解为指独觉佛与如来弟子。因与出世间功德相应,是贤善之人,故称善士。或可说,前述一切圣者皆属此二称谓。佛陀既是圣者亦是善士,独觉佛与佛弟子亦复如是。如经中说:显示巴利原文
Ariyānaṃ adassāvītiādīsu ariyāti ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye iriyanato, sadevakena ca lokena araṇīyato buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca buddhasāvakā ca vuccanti, buddhā eva vā idha ariyā. Yathāha – ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… tathāgato ariyoti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1098).
知恩、感恩、具智慧,有善友且忠诚坚定,对受苦者恭敬行事——这样的人,被称为善士。显示巴利原文
Sappurisāti ettha pana paccekabuddhā tathāgatasāvakā ca ‘‘sappurisā’’ti veditabbā. Te hi lokuttaraguṇayogena sobhanā purisāti sappurisā. Sabbeva vā ete dvidhāpi vuttā. Buddhāpi hi ariyā ca sappurisā ca paccekabuddhāpi buddhasāvakāpi. Yathāha –
“坚固友善之人”指的就是佛弟子。从知恩等角度而言,独觉佛、佛陀也是如此。凡是习惯于不见这些圣者,且不乐于亲近、闻法的人,应知他就是“不见圣者”。不见有两种:以眼不见,以慧不见。此处所指,是以慧不见。因为以肉眼或天眼见圣者,即使见到也不算真正见到,这些眼睛只能摄取外表的色相,并不能触及圣者的真实境界。狗、豺狼等虽也有眼能见圣者,却并非真正的圣者之见者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro, kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hoti;
这里有一个事例:据说在质多山住着一位漏尽长老,他的侍者是一位年老的比丘。一天,这位侍者随长老一同去乞食,拿着长老的钵与衣跟在后面,问道:“尊者,所谓的圣者是什么样子呢?”长老回答:“有些年迈之人,捧着圣者的钵与衣,如法随侍而行,却全然不知圣者。贤友,圣者确实难以了解。”虽被告知,他仍未能明白。因此,以眼见到并不算真正的见到,唯有以慧见到才算真正见到。正如经文所说:“够了,婆迦梨!你看这腐坏的身体有什么用?婆迦梨,见法者即见到我。”(《相应部》3.87)所以,即使以眼见到圣者,若不以智慧照见圣者们所见的无常等相,未亲身证得圣者们所证得的法,即因未见到成就圣者的法与圣者的真实状态,当知这就是“不见圣者”。显示巴利原文
Dukhitassa sakkacca karoti kiccaṃ, tathāvidhaṃ sappurisaṃ vadantī’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1007);
事实上,仅凭“善知识与坚固的忠诚”这句话,便已被称为佛弟子。以知恩等功德而言,独觉佛与佛陀皆可称为佛陀。对于这些圣者,若有人习性不亲近,且于亲近一事不作善行,当知此人即是“不见圣者”。此种“不见”有两种:以眼不见者与以智不见者。此处所指的是以智不见者。因为即使以肉眼或天眼见到圣者,仍可说未曾得见:他们的眼只执取色相,而不以圣者之特质为所缘。即使是狗、豺狼等也以眼看见圣者,但它们并非圣者的“见者”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’’ti ettāvatā hi buddhasāvako vutto. Kataññutādīhi paccekabuddhā buddhāti, yo imesaṃ ariyānaṃ adassanasīlo, na ca dassane sādhukārī, so ariyānaṃ adassāvīti veditabbo. So cakkhunā adassāvī, ñāṇena adassāvīti duvidho, tesu ñāṇena adassāvī idha adhippeto. Maṃsacakkhunā hi dibbacakkhunā vā ariyā diṭṭhāpi adiṭṭhāva honti tesaṃ cakkhunā vaṇṇamattagahaṇato, na ariyabhāvagocarato. Soṇasiṅgālādayopi cakkhunā ariye passanti, na ca te ariyānaṃ dassāvino.
此处有一事例为证:据说,质多山有一位漏尽长老,其侍者是一位年长的出家比丘。一日,侍者随长老入村托钵,后持长老衣钵从后随行,途中问长老:“尊者,所谓圣者,是何等样人呢?”长老答道:“此处有些人虽已年老,持圣者衣钵,履行义务与规矩,乃至与圣者共住游行,却仍然不识圣者。贤友,圣者实难了知。”虽如此说,侍者仍未领悟。因此,仅以眼见,并非真见;唯以智见,方为真见。正如世尊所说:“婆迦梨,够了!见此臭秽之身何用?婆迦梨,见法者即见我。”故应知,若人虽以眼见,却未以智慧见圣者所见之无常等相,未证圣者所证之法,因其根本未见解脱成圣之法,未见圣性本身,他便名为“不见圣者”。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ vatthu – cittalapabbatavāsino kira khīṇāsavattherassa upaṭṭhāko vuḍḍhapabbajito ekadivasaṃ therena saddhiṃ piṇḍāya caritvā therassa pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā piṭṭhito āgacchanto theraṃ pucchi – ‘‘ariyā nāma, bhante, kīdisā’’ti? Thero āha – ‘‘idhekacco mahallako ariyānaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vattapaṭipattiṃ katvā saha carantopi neva ariye jānāti, evaṃ dujjānā, āvuso, ariyā’’ti. Evaṃ vuttepi so neva aññāsi. Tasmā cakkhunā dassanaṃ na dassanaṃ, ñāṇena dassanameva dassanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘alaṃ te, vakkali, kiṃ te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena, yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.87). Tasmā cakkhunā passantopi ñāṇena ariyehi diṭṭhaṃ aniccādilakkhaṇaṃ apassanto, ariyānaṃ adhigatañca dhammaṃ anadhigacchanto, ariyakaradhammānaṃ ariyabhāvassa ca adiṭṭhattā ‘‘ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti veditabbo.
“对圣法不精通”:指对念处等种种圣法不熟练、不善巧。而“于圣法未调伏”者,则──显示巴利原文
Ariyadhammassa akovidoti satipaṭṭhānādibhede ariyadhamme akusalo. Ariyadhamme avinītoti ettha pana –
Duvidho vinayo nāma, ekamekettha pañcadhā; Abhāvato tassa ayaṃ, ‘‘avinīto’’ti vuccati. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.uragasuttavaṇṇanā; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1007);
这里,律有两种:抑制律与断律。在这两种律中,每一种又分为五种。抑制律有五种:戒抑制、念抑制、智抑制、忍抑制、精进抑制。断律也有五种:彼分断、镇伏断、正断、止息断、出离断。显示巴利原文
Ayañhi saṃvaravinayo pahānavinayoti duvidho vinayo. Ettha ca duvidhepi vinaye ekamekopi vinayo pañcadhā bhijjati. Saṃvaravinayopi hi sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidho. Pahānavinayopi tadaṅgappahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidho.
此处,“以此巴帝摩卡律仪而具足、完全具足”(《分别论》511),此为戒防护;“他守护眼根,于眼根中得防护”(《中部》1.295;《相应部》4.239;《增支部》3.16),此为念防护。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto’’ti (vibha. 511) ayaṃ sīlasaṃvaro. ‘‘Rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) ayaṃ satisaṃvaro.
“世间中存在的那些流,(阿耆多啊——世尊说道:)
念是它们的防护;
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā,) Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ;
我宣说诸流的防护,以智慧关闭诸流。」(见《经集》1041;《小部·阿耆多童子问义释》4;《导论》11,45;《法集论注释》1007)——这是指「智防护」。显示巴利原文
Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhiyyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1041; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 4; netti. 11, 45; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1007) –
这是「智防护」。「他能忍耐寒冷、炎热等」(见《中部》1.24;《增支部》4.114;6.58),这是「忍辱防护」。「他不容忍已生起的欲贪寻思」(见《中部》1.26;《增支部》4.114;6.58),这是「精进防护」。而所有这些「防护」,各各因能防护应被防护者——即应被调伏的身恶行等——而称为「防护」;因能调伏他们,故称为「律」。当知所谓防护律,即如此分为五种。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ñāṇasaṃvaro. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.24; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ khantisaṃvaro. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ vīriyasaṃvaro. Sabbopi cāyaṃ saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ vinetabbānañca kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato ‘‘saṃvaro’’, vinayanato ‘‘vinayo’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ tāva saṃvaravinayo pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo.
同样地,在名色分别等观智中,由于他们观智处于对立面,犹如灯光驱散黑暗,即以各各观智断除各各无益之法。此即:以名色确定,断除有身见;以缘把握,断除无因见与非因见;其后,再以度疑,断除疑结;以聚思惟,断除「我、我所」执;以道非道知见清净,断除执非道为道;以见生起,断除断见;以见灭去,断除常见;以见恐怖,断除对恐怖事的无怖想;以见过患,断除享乐想;以厌离随观,断除乐着;以欲解脱智,断除不欲解脱;以舍智,断除不中舍;以随顺智,断除对法住与涅槃的违逆;以种姓智,断除执取诸行相。凡此种种,皆称为「彼分断」。显示巴利原文
Tathā yaṃ nāmarūpaparicchedādīsu vipassanāñāṇesu paṭipakkhabhāvato dīpālokeneva tamassa, tena tena vipassanāñāṇena tassa tassa anatthassa pahānaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīnaṃ, tasseva aparabhāgena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvassa, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhaye abhayasaññāya, ādīnavadassanena assādasaññāya, nibbidānupassanāya abhiratisaññāya , muñcitukamyatāñāṇena amuñcitukāmatāya, upekkhāñāṇena anupekkhāya, anulomena dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ nibbāne ca paṭilomabhāvassa, gotrabhunā saṅkhāranimittaggāhassa pahānaṃ. Etaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ nāma.
然而,通过近行定与安止定等种种差别之定,制止诸盖等法之转起与修习,犹如以杖击打水面浮苔一般,断除那些种种盖障等法,这称为“镇伏断”。通过修习四种圣道,在各自证得该道者的相续中,依“为断除诸恶见”等所说之理(《法集论》277;《分别论》628),令属于集之部分的烦恼群永不生起而断除,这称为“正断”。在果之刹那,烦恼的止息状态,这称为“止息断”。由于出离一切有为法,断除一切有为法的涅槃,这称为“出离断”。而这一切断,因以舍离之义为断,以调伏之义为律,故总称为“断律”;或因其具有彼彼断,能生起彼彼律,故称为“断律”。应知,断律亦如此分为五种。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattibhāvanivāraṇato ghaṭappahāreneva udakapiṭṭhe sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, etaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato attano attano santāne ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277; vibha. 628) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhiyassa kilesagaṇassa accantaappavattibhāvena pahānaṃ, idaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ kilesānaṃ, etaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pahīnasabbasaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ, etaṃ nissaraṇappahānaṃ nāma. Sabbampi cetaṃ pahānaṃ yasmā cāgaṭṭhena pahānaṃ, vinayanaṭṭhena vinayo, tasmā ‘‘pahānavinayo’’ti vuccati. Taṃ taṃ pahānavato vā tassa tassa vinayassa sambhavatopetaṃ ‘‘pahānavinayo’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ pahānavinayopi pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.uragasuttavaṇṇanā; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130).
如是,此律略说为二种,依差别分则为十种。由于防护已坏,应断者未断,故无闻凡夫不具此律;因其不具,故被称为“未调伏者”。“未见善士者、于善士法不巧熟者、于善士法未调伏者”等,其理亦同。因此诸义理无有差别,如所说:“他们圣者,即是他们善士;他们善士,即是他们圣者。彼圣者之法,即是彼善士之法;彼善士之法,即是彼圣者之法。他们圣律,即是他们善士律;他们善士律,即是他们圣律。或言圣,或言善士,或言圣法,或言善士法,或言圣律,或言善士律,这些皆是同一、同义、相同、同等、同类,即是彼。”显示巴利原文
Evamayaṃ saṅkhepato duvidho bhedato ca dasavidho vinayo bhinnasaṃvarattā, pahātabbassa ca appahīnattā yasmā etassa assutavato puthujjanassa natthi, tasmā abhāvato tassa ayaṃ ‘‘avinīto’’ti vuccatīti. Eseva nayo sappurisānaṃ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido, sappurisadhamme avinītoti etthapi. Ninnānākaraṇañhi etamatthato. Yathāha – ‘‘yeva te ariyā, teva te sappurisā. Yeva te sappurisā, teva te ariyā. Yo eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo, so eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo. Yo eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo, so eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo. Yeva te ariyavinayā, teva te sappurisavinayā. Yeva te sappurisavinayā, teva te ariyavinayā. Ariyeti vā, sappuriseti vā, ariyadhammeti vā, sappurisadhammeti vā, ariyavinayeti vā, sappurisavinayeti vā esese eke ekaṭṭhe same samabhāge tajjāte taññevāti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1007; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130).
“观色为我”:此处,有人观色为我,认为“彼色即是我,我即是彼色”,将色与我看作无二无别。譬如有人观察燃烧的油灯,认为“彼焰即是彼色,彼色即是彼焰”,将焰与色看作无二无别;同样地,此处有人观色为我……乃至……如是,以“我”之见观见于色。或“我拥有色”:执取无色为“我”,如树有影,观彼拥有色者为“我”。或“我中有色”:执取无色为“我”,如花有香,观色在我中。或“色中有我”:执取无色为“我”,如宝珠在箧中,观我在色中。于受、想、行、识等,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti idhekacco rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, ‘‘yaṃ rūpaṃ, so ahaṃ, yo ahaṃ, taṃ rūpa’’nti rūpañca attānañca advayaṃ samanupassati. Seyyathāpi telappadīpassa jhāyato ‘‘yā acci, so vaṇṇo. Yo vaṇṇo, sā accī’’ti acciñca vaṇṇañca advayaṃ samanupassati, evameva idhekacco rūpaṃ attato…pe… samanupassatīti (paṭi. ma. 1.130-131) evaṃ rūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti diṭṭhipassanāya passati. Rūpavantaṃ vā attānanti arūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā chāyāvantaṃ rukkhaṃ viya taṃ rūpavantaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti samanupassati. Attani vā rūpanti arūpameva ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā pupphasmiṃ gandhaṃ viya attani rūpaṃ samanupassati. Rūpasmiṃ vā attānanti arūpameva ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā karaṇḍake maṇiṃ viya taṃ attānaṃ rūpasmiṃ samanupassati. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
其中,“观色为我”只是将纯粹的色称为“我”。在“我拥有色、色在我中、我在色中”以及“观受为我、观想为我、观行为我、观识为我”(《无碍解道》1.131)这七处,是将无色称为“我”。而“我拥有受、受在我中、我在受中”等,在其余四蕴各各以三种方式,共成十二处,所说的则是色与非色混合之我。其中,观色为我、观受为我、观想为我、观行为我、观识为我,此五处被判为断灭见;其余各处被判为常见。如此,此处有十五种有见与五种无有见。当知这一切唯是道障,而非天障,为初道所断。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti suddharūpaṃyeva ‘‘attā’’ti kathitaṃ. ‘‘Rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ. Vedanaṃ attato… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.131) imesu sattasu ṭhānesu arūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti kathitaṃ, ‘‘vedanāvantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā vedanā, vedanāya vā attāna’’nti evaṃ catūsu khandhesu tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasena dvādasasu ṭhānesu rūpārūpamissako attā kathito. Tattha rūpaṃ attato samanupassati. Vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatīti pañcasu ṭhānesu ucchedadiṭṭhi kathitā. Avasesesu sassatadiṭṭhi. Evamettha pannarasa bhavadiṭṭhiyo pañca vibhavadiṭṭhiyo honti. Tā sabbāpi maggāvaraṇā, na saggāvaraṇā, paṭhamamaggavajjhāti veditabbā.
“住阿兰若者”:即住于林野。“于林中”:在大而幽深的林中。“行脚者”:于各处游历而行。“安稳而行”:无畏、无顾虑而行。“已非猎人所能及”:已不在猎鹿人的面前。“令魔穷尽”:令烦恼魔或天子魔穷尽。“摧破其依处”:摧破、灭尽烦恼的依处。“已达魔目不能及”:到达魔不能见之处。“已非猎物所及”:已到达魔的对面。其余各处皆明了。显示巴利原文
Āraññikoti araññe nivāsaṃ. Pavaneti mahante gambhīravane. Caramānoti tahiṃ tahiṃ vicaramāno. Vissattho gacchatīti nibbhayo nirāsaṅko carati. Anāpāthagato luddassāti migaluddassa parammukhagato. Antamakāsi māranti kilesamāraṃ vā devaputtamāraṃ vā antaṃ akāsi. Apadaṃ vadhitvāti kilesapadaṃ hantvā nāsetvā. Māracakkhuṃ adassanaṃ gatoti mārassa adassanavisayaṃ patto. Anāpāthagatoti mārassa parammukhaṃ patto. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
如是,世尊同样以阿罗汉果为究竟来开示此经。说法终了时,亦如前文所说,有同等的法现证。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā idampi suttaṃ arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca vuttasadisoyeva dhammābhisamayo ahosīti.
16. 宾耆耶童子经义释的注释显示巴利原文
16. Piṅgiyamāṇavasuttaniddesavaṇṇanā
89 在第十六品《宾耆耶经》的义释中:「我已老迈,羸弱,容色褪去」:据说这位婆罗门被衰老所征服,从出生以来已有一百二十岁,身体虚弱,心里想着「我要把脚踩在这里」,脚却落到了别处,原本的肤色也已败坏。因此他说:「我已老迈,羸弱,容色褪去」。「莫令我于中途愚痴而死」:意思是,不要让我在未亲自证得您的教法之前,便于途中成为无智之人而死去。「在此,从生与老中出离」:就在您足下的此处,或是在石塔庙之处,请您为我开示那从生与老中彻底舍离的涅槃法味,我渴望了知。显示巴利原文
89. Soḷasame piṅgiyasuttaniddese – jiṇṇohamasmi abalo vītavaṇṇoti so kira brāhmaṇo jarābhibhūto vīsavassasatiko jātiyā, dubbalo ca ‘‘idha pādaṃ karissāmī’’ti aññatreva karoti, vinaṭṭhapurimachavivaṇṇo ca. Tenāha – ‘‘jiṇṇohamasmi abalo vītavaṇṇo’’ti. Māhaṃnassaṃ momuho antarāvāti māhaṃ tuyhaṃ dhammaṃ asacchikatvā antarā eva avidvā hutvā anassiṃ. Jātijarāya idha vippahānanti idheva tava pādamūle pāsāṇake cetiye vā jātijarāya vippahānaṃ nibbānaṃ dhammarasaṃ ahaṃ vijaññaṃ, taṃ me ācikkha.
「Abalo」:指缺乏力量者。「Dubbalo」:指力量虚弱者。「Appabalo」:指力量微薄者。「Appathāmo」:指精进微薄者。「Vītavaṇṇo」:指容色已褪,即肤色已变。「Vigatavaṇṇo」:指容色已失,即肤色已无。「Vigacchitavaṇṇo」:指容色正消,即肤色远不如前。「Yā sā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhā」:意为先前那副美好的容貌,也就是往昔阶段曾有的那副美好、端严的容貌,如今已消失、不见。「Ādīnavo pātubhūto」:指过患显现,即灾祸显露。另有一解,抛开“Yā sā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhā”这句经文,将“yā subhā assā”释为“其美妙”。显示巴利原文
Abaloti balavirahito. Dubbaloti dubbalabalo. Appabaloti parittabalo. Appathāmoti parittavīriyo. Vītavaṇṇoti parivattitachavivaṇṇo. Vigatavaṇṇoti apagatachavivaṇṇo. Vigacchitavaṇṇoti dūrībhūtachavivaṇṇo. Yā sā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhāti yā sā subhā sundarā purimakāle sati, sā vaṇṇanibhā etarahi antarahitā vigatā. Ādīnavo pātubhūtoti upaddavo pāturahosi. ‘‘Yā sā purimā subhā vaṇṇanibhā’’ti pāṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘yā subhā assā’’ti eke vaṇṇayanti.
「Asuddhā」:不清净,即因翳膜等障碍而不清净。「Avisuddhā」:不纯净,即因昏暗等状况而不纯净。「Aparisuddhā」:不遍净,即因全方位被白翳膜等所包裹而不完全清净。「Avodātā」:不洁白,即不清澈,看似清澈而实非如此。「No tathā cakkhunā rūpe passāmi」:意为我不复以眼如是见色。如同过去以净眼明见、观察色所缘那般,如今我已无法再以那种方式去见了。对于耳等的不清净,亦同此理。「Māhaṃ nassaṃ」:意为“愿我不灭”,即“愿我不毁”。显示巴利原文
Asuddhāti paṭalādīhi asuddhā. Avisuddhāti timirādīhi avisuddhā. Aparisuddhāti samantato phoṭapaṭalādīhi pariyonaddhattā aparisuddhā. Avodātāti nappasannā pasannasadisā. No tathā cakkhunā rūpe passāmīti yathā porāṇacakkhunā rūpārammaṇaṃ passāmi olokemi, tathā tena pakārena idāni na passāmi. Sotaṃ asuddhantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Māhaṃ nassanti ahaṃ mā vinassaṃ.
90 此时,由于宾耆耶对身体尚存爱著,故说出“我已衰老”等语。为此,世尊为令他舍断对身体的染著,开示了“见诸色中受苦者”这一偈颂。其中,“于色”指以色为因、以色为缘;“受苦”指被造作等所摧残。“众生于色中遭受破坏”是说,人们确实只因眼病等色法而遭受破坏与折磨。显示巴利原文
90. Idāni yasmā piṅgiyo kāye sāpekkhatāya ‘‘jiṇṇohamasmī’’tiādimāha . Tenassa bhagavā kāye sinehappahānatthaṃ ‘‘disvāna rūpesu vihaññamāne’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha rūpesūti rūpahetu rūpapaccayā. Vihaññamāneti kammakāraṇādīhi upahaññamāne. Ruppanti rūpesūti cakkhurogādīhi ca rūpahetuyeva janā ruppanti bādhiyanti.
haññanti,意为被杀害,即遭受打击。vihaññanti,意为被恼害,即遭受折磨。upavihaññanti,意为被进一步恼害,即遭受断手断足等苦。upaghātiyanti,意为被杀伤,即遭受死亡。kuppanti,意为被扰动,即被弄得天翻地覆。pīḷayanti,意为被压迫,即遭遇毁坏。ghaṭṭayanti,意为被撞击,即受到冲撞。byādhitā,指患病者,内心被恐惧笼罩。domanassitā,指陷入忧恼者,内心遭受破坏。vemāne,指正在消亡者,正在毁灭。显示巴利原文
Haññantīti ghaṭīyanti. Vihaññantīti vihesiyanti. Upavihaññantīti hatthapādacchedādiṃ labhanti. Upaghātiyantīti maraṇaṃ labhanti. Kuppantīti parivattanti. Pīḷayantīti vighātaṃ āpajjanti. Ghaṭṭayantīti ghaṭṭanaṃ pāpuṇanti. Byādhitāti bhītā. Domanassitāti cittavighātaṃ pattā. Vemāneti nassamāne.
91 如是,宾耆耶听闻世尊开示通往阿拉汉果的修行方法后,因年迈体衰,未能证得殊胜境界。于是他再以这首“四方”开头的偈颂赞叹世尊,并祈请说法。显示巴利原文
91. Evaṃ bhagavatā yāva arahattaṃ, tāva kathitaṃ paṭipattiṃ sutvā piṅgiyo jarādubbalatāya visesaṃ anadhigantvā ca puna ‘‘disā catasso’’ti imāya gāthāya bhagavantaṃ thomento desanaṃ yācati.
92 于是,世尊再次为他开示直达阿拉汉果的修行之道,宣说了“被渴爱征服的”这一偈颂。显示巴利原文
92. Athassa bhagavā punapi yāva arahattaṃ, tāva paṭipadaṃ dassento ‘‘taṇhādhipanne’’ti gāthamāha.
「Taṇhādhipanne」指被渴爱征服的人,即被渴爱淹没而安住者。「Taṇhānuge」指追随渴爱者,即与渴爱结伴同行之人。「Taṇhānugate」指被渴爱紧紧追随者,即被渴爱所尾随之人。「Taṇhānusaṭe」指追逐渴爱而奔驰者,即与渴爱一同奔跑之人。「Taṇhāya panne」指陷没于渴爱者,即沉没在渴爱之中之人。「Paṭipanne」指陷入渴爱者,即被渴爱所覆盖之人。「Abhibhūte」指被彻底压倒者,即被碾碎之人。「Pariyādinnacitte」指心被完全劫夺者,即善心已被夺走之人。显示巴利原文
Taṇhādhipanneti taṇhāya vimuccitvā ṭhite. Taṇhānugeti taṇhāya saha gacchante. Taṇhānugateti taṇhāya anubandhante. Taṇhānusaṭeti taṇhāya saha dhāvante. Taṇhāya panneti taṇhāya nimugge. Paṭipanneti taṇhāya avatthaṭe. Abhibhūteti maddite. Pariyādinnacitteti pariyādiyitvā gahitakusalacitte.
「Santāpajāte」指生起热恼的人,即心中生起炽热苦恼者。「Ītijāte」指生起灾祸的人,即疾病生起者。「Upaddavajāte」指生起险难的人,即过患生起者。「Upasaggajāte」指生起逼恼的人,即苦迫生起者。显示巴利原文
Santāpajāteti sañjātacittasantāpe. Ītijāteti roguppanne. Upaddavajāteti ādīnavajāte. Upasaggajāteti uppannadukkhajāte.
Virajaṃ vītamalaṃ:此处“virajaṃ”意为离尘,即已远离贪等烦恼之尘;“vītamalaṃ”意为离垢,即已远离贪等烦恼之垢。贪等烦恼,因其覆盖义而称为尘,因其染污义而称为垢。“Dhammacakkhu”(法眼):在某些地方指第一道智,某些地方指前三种道智,某些地方也指第四道智。然而在此处,对于那一千位结发外道而言,是指第四道智;对于宾耆耶而言,则只是第三道智。“凡是集起之法,皆是灭尽之法”——这便是依观而生起的法眼,此即其义。其余各处意义明了。显示巴利原文
Virajaṃ vītamalanti ettha virajanti vigatarāgādirajaṃ. Vītamalanti vītarāgādimalaṃ. Rāgādayo hi ajjhottharaṇaṭṭhena rajo nāma, dūsaṭṭhena malaṃ nāma. Dhammacakkhunti katthaci paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ , katthaci ādīni tīṇi maggañāṇāni, katthaci catutthamaggañāṇampi. Idha pana jaṭilasahassassa catutthamaggañāṇaṃ. Piṅgiyassa tatiyamaggañāṇameva. Yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhammanti vipassanāvasena evaṃ pavattassa dhammacakkhuṃ udapādīti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.
就这样,世尊以阿拉汉果为顶点宣说了这部经。开示结束时,宾耆耶安住于不还果。据说他在中途思惟:“我的舅父婆和利没能听到如此辩才纷呈的开示。”由于这份情感的牵挂而心思散乱,他未能证得阿拉汉。然而,他的弟子们——那一千位结发外道——证得了阿拉汉。他们全都手持神通化现的钵与衣,成为善来比丘。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ idampi suttaṃ bhagavā arahattanikūṭeneva desesi, desanāpariyosāne ca piṅgiyo anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāsi. So kira antarantarā cintesi – ‘‘evaṃ vicitrapaṭibhānaṃ nāma desanaṃ na labhati mayhaṃ mātulo bāvarī savanāyā’’ti. Tena sinehavikkhepena arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ nāsakkhi. Antevāsikā panassa sahassajaṭilā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Sabbeva iddhimayapattacīvaradharā ehibhikkhuno ahesunti.
第十七章:彼岸道赞颂偈的注疏解释显示巴利原文
17. Pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesavaṇṇanā
93 93. 此后,结集者们为赞叹说法,而说出“世尊说此”等语。其中,“说此”即宣说了这部《彼岸道》。“侍从十六人”:指与婆和利的侍从宾耆耶一起的十六人;或指世尊的侍从有十六人,故称“侍从十六人”。那些婆罗门在那里,于十六个方位——前方、后方、左侧、右侧各坐六由旬,直线距离十二由旬。“被请”:即被恳求。显示巴利原文
93. Ito paraṃ saṅgītikārā desanaṃ thomentā ‘‘idamavoca bhagavā’’tiādimāhaṃsu. Tattha idamavocāti idaṃ pārāyanaṃ avoca. Paricārakasoḷasānanti bāvarissa paricārakena piṅgiyena saha soḷasānaṃ, buddhassa vā bhagavato paricārakānaṃ soḷasānanti paricārakasoḷasānaṃ. Te eva ca brāhmaṇā tattha soḷasasu disāsu purato ca pacchato ca vāmapassato ca dakkhiṇapassato ca cha cha yojanā nisinnā ujukena dvādasayojanikā ahosi. Ajjhiṭṭhoti yācito.
94-97 “了知义”:指了知句义。“了知法”:指了知法句。“彼岸道”:如此安立此法门的名称后,称扬那些婆罗门的名字,而说:“阿耆多……乃至……至最胜佛。”其中,“具足行”:指具足作为涅槃基础的巴帝摩卡戒等。“仙”:指大仙。显示巴利原文
94-97.Atthamaññāyāti pāḷiatthamaññāya. Dhammamaññāyāti pāḷimaññāya. Pārāyananti evaṃ imassa dhammapariyāyassa adhivacanaṃ āropetvā tesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ nāmāni kittayanto ‘‘ajito…pe… buddhaseṭṭhamupāgamu’’nti āhaṃsu. Tattha sampannacaraṇanti nibbānapadaṭṭhānabhūtena pātimokkhasīlādinā sampannaṃ. Isinti mahesiṃ.
在义注中,“前往”指来到近前;“靠近”指去到不远之处;“亲近”指坐于近旁;“遍问”指提出遍问;“遍持”指衡量、思量;有些人则说是“质问”。显示巴利原文
Niddese upāgamiṃsūti samīpaṃ gamiṃsu. Upasaṅkamiṃsūti avidūraṭṭhānaṃ gamiṃsu. Payirupāsiṃsūti samīpe nisīdiṃsu. Paripucchiṃsūti paripucchaṃ āhariṃsu. Parigaṇhiṃsūti tulayiṃsu. ‘‘Codayiṃsū’’ti keci.
“戒行成就”:指最上等的戒行成就,即以道所圆满的戒。显示巴利原文
Sīlācāranibbattīti uttamasīlācāranibbatti, maggena nipphannasīlanti attho.
“甚深”:这是遮止浅显状态的说法。“难见”:因甚深故难见,须经艰辛方能得见,非轻易可见。唯其难见,故“难觉”,须经艰辛方能觉悟,非轻易可觉。“寂静”:即寂灭。“殊胜”:即无热恼。此二词专指出世间法而言。“非寻思所行”:不可由逻辑思辨涉入、洞察,唯以智慧可涉入。“微细”:即极微细。“智者所证知”:为那些正行修习的智者所应证知。显示巴利原文
Gambhīreti uttānabhāvapaṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Duddaseti gambhīrattā duddase, dukkhena daṭṭhabbe, na sakkā sukhena daṭṭhuṃ. Duddasattāva duranubodhe, dukkhena avabujjhitabbe, na sakkā sukhena avabujjhituṃ. Santeti nibbute. Paṇīteti atappake. Idaṃ dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atakkāvacareti takkena na avacaritabbe na ogāhitabbe ñāṇeneva avacaritabbe. Nipuṇeti saṇhe. Paṇḍitavedanīyeti sammā paṭipannehi paṇḍitehi veditabbe.
98 “令满足”:使其获得满足。“令悦”:在他们心中生起种种喜悦。“令净信”:令他们心中生起净信。“令成就”:使其成就,得以成功。“使悦意”:以喜悦之力令自心得悦。显示巴利原文
98.Tosesīti tuṭṭhiṃ āpādesi. Vitosesīti vividhā tesaṃ somanassaṃ uppādesi. Pasādesīti tesaṃ cittappasādaṃ akāsi . Ārādhesīti ārādhayi siddhiṃ pāpesi. Attamane akāsīti somanassavasena sakamane akāsi.
99 此后,“行梵行”:即修习了圣道之梵行。显示巴利原文
99. Tato paraṃ brahmacariyamacariṃsūti maggabrahmacariyaṃ acariṃsu.
101 因此,“pārāyana”的意思即是:那个作为彼岸的涅槃之依处。显示巴利原文
101.Tasmā pārāyananti tassa pārabhūtassa nibbānassa āyatananti vuttaṃ hoti.
《彼岸道随喜偈颂释义》的说明。显示巴利原文
18. Pārāyanānugītigāthāniddesavaṇṇanā
102 “Pārāyanamanugāyissaṃ”(我将随喜彼岸道)——与此相关的背景是:当世尊开示《彼岸道》时,一万六千位结发者证得阿拉汉果,其余一亿四千万天人与人众皆得法现观。对此,古德曾有言曰:显示巴利原文
102.Pārāyanamanugāyissanti assa ayaṃ sambandho – bhagavatā hi pārāyane desite soḷasasahassajaṭilā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, avasesānañca cuddasakoṭisaṅkhānaṃ devamanussānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
“在那石座祥瑞之地,彼岸道大集会中;”
佛陀令一亿四千万众生得饮不死甘露。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tato pāsāṇake ramme, pārāyanasamāgame; Amataṃ pāpayī buddho, cuddasa pāṇakoṭiyo’’ti. (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.1138);
说法结束后,各处来集的人们依世尊的威神力,各自在原来的村庄、城镇等处显现。世尊也在众多比丘的围绕下——其中有一万六千位侍者比丘等——回到舍卫城。宾耆耶在那里礼敬世尊后,说:‘世尊,请允许我前往告知婆和利:佛陀已经出世,因为我曾答应过他。’得到世尊的许可后,他先以智行到达瞿陀婆利河岸,再步行前往隐修处。婆和利婆罗门正坐在那里眺望着来路,远远看见宾耆耶已经除去行李和发髻等物,穿着比丘的僧衣走来,便断定:‘佛陀已出现于世间。’宾耆耶走近后,婆和利问道:‘宾耆耶,佛陀出现于世间了吗?’宾耆耶回答:‘是的,婆罗门,出现了。他坐于石座支提处,为我们开示了法,我这就为您开示。’于是,婆和利便与随从们一起,以隆重的供养恭敬供养他之后,为他铺设了座位。宾耆耶坐下后,便开始说:‘Pārāyanamanugāyissaṃ’等。显示巴利原文
Niṭṭhitāya pana dhammadesanāya tato tato āgatā manussā bhagavato ānubhāvena attano attano gāmanigamādīsveva pāturahesuṃ. Bhagavāpi sāvatthimeva agamāsi paricārakasoḷasādīhi anekehi bhikkhusahassehi parivuto. Tattha piṅgiyo bhagavantaṃ vanditvā āha – ‘‘gacchāmahaṃ, bhante, bāvarissa buddhuppādaṃ ārocetuṃ, paṭissutañhi tasseva mayā’’ti. Atha bhagavatā anuññāto ñāṇagamaneneva godhāvarītīraṃ gantvā pādagamanena assamābhimukho agamāsi. Tamenaṃ bāvarī brāhmaṇo maggaṃ olokento nisinno dūratova taṃ khārijaṭādivirahitaṃ bhikkhuvesenāgacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘buddho loke uppanno’’ti niṭṭhamagamāsi. Sampattañcāpi naṃ pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ, piṅgiya, buddho loke uppanno’’ti? ‘‘Āma, brāhmaṇa, uppanno, pāsāṇake cetiye nisinno amhākaṃ dhammaṃ desesi, tamahaṃ tuyhaṃ desessāmī’’ti. Tato bāvarī mahatā sakkārena sapariso taṃ pūjetvā āsanaṃ paññāpesi. Tattha nisīditvā piṅgiyo ‘‘pārāyanamanugāyissa’’ntiādimāha.
其中,“anugāyissaṃ”(我将随喜)意为“我将随唱”,即我将随唱世尊所宣说的法。“yathā addakkhi”(如其照见),即如世尊以自证的正等觉及不共智所照见。“nikkāmo”(离欲),指已断除欲贪的人。另有一读作“nikkamo”,义为具足精进;或指从一切不善法中出离的人。“nibbano”(无林),指远离了烦恼丛林的人,或远离了渴爱的人。“为何会说妄语?”此句意指,那些能令人说妄语的烦恼,于彼(佛陀)已完全断尽。这是为了激发那位婆罗门对法生起欣乐。显示巴利原文
Tattha anugāyissanti bhagavato gītaṃ anugāyissaṃ. Yathāddakkhīti yathā sāmaṃ saccābhisambodhena asādhāraṇañāṇena ca addakkhi. Nikkāmoti pahīnakāmo. ‘‘Nikkamo’’tipi pāṭho, vīriyavāti attho. Nikkhanto vā akusalapakkhā. Nibbanoti kilesavanavirahito, taṇhāvirahito eva vā. Kissa hetu musā bhaṇeti yehi kilesehi musā bhaṇeyya, ete tassa pahīnāti dasseti. Etena brāhmaṇassa savane ussāhaṃ janeti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.1138).
“amalo”(无垢),指远离烦恼垢染。“vimalo”(离垢),指已除遣烦恼垢染。“nimmalo”(净垢),指由断除烦恼垢染而得清净。“malāpagato”(垢远离),指烦恼垢染已远逝而安住。“malavippahīno”(舍垢),指已断舍烦恼垢染。“malavimutto”(脱垢),指从烦恼中解脱。“sabbamalavītivatto”(超越一切垢),指已超越包括习气在内的一切烦恼垢染。“te vanā”(那些林),指上述种种烦恼。显示巴利原文
Amaloti kilesamalavirahito. Vimaloti vigatakilesamalo. Nimmaloti kilesamalasuddho. Malāpagatoti kilesamalā dūrībhūto hutvā carati. Malavippahīnoti kilesamalappahīno. Malavimuttoti kilesehi vimutto. Sabbamalavītivattoti vāsanādisabbakilesamalaṃ atikkanto. Te vanāti ete vuttappakārā kilesā.
103 “Vaṇṇūpasaṃhitaṃ”,意指与功德(guṇa)相应。显示巴利原文
103. Vaṇṇūpasaṃhitanti guṇūpasaṃhitaṃ.
104 “Saccavhayoti”,指佛陀确实以“真实”为名号,与真实相应。“Brahmeti”,是对那位婆罗门的称呼。显示巴利原文
104.Saccavhayoti buddho hi sacceneva avhānena nāmena yutto. Brahmeti taṃ brāhmaṇaṃ ālapati.
此处,所谓“世间”,即因具有“毁坏”之义而称为“世间”。世间的一种是“有世间”,即三界中的果报。因为它“存在”,故称为“有”;此“有”本身就是世间,因此叫作“有世间”。其中,“有世间”与“生起世间”各自又分为两种。“有世间”依成就与衰败分为两种,“生起世间”也依成就的生起与衰败的生起分为两种。其中,成就的“有世间”即指善趣世间。因为感得可意的果报,是一个美好的世间,故称为“成就”;又因为其存在,故也称为“有”;成就本身就是有,即“成就有”;此即是世间,故称“成就有世间”。成就的“生起世间”是指能投生善趣的业。因为果报从它生起,故称为“生起”;能招感成就的生起,便是“成就的生起”;而这成就的生起本身即是世间,即“成就生起的世间”。显示巴利原文
Tattha lokoti lujjanaṭṭhena loko. Eko loko bhavalokoti tebhūmakavipāko. So hi bhavatīti bhavo, bhavo eva loko bhavaloko. Bhavaloko ca sambhavaloko cāti ettha ekeko dve dve hoti. Bhavaloko hi sampattibhavavipattibhavavasena duvidho. Sambhavalokopi sampattisambhavavipattisambhavavasena duvidho. Tattha sampattibhavalokoti sugatiloko. So hi iṭṭhaphalattā sundaro lokoti sampatti, bhavatīti bhavo, sampatti eva bhavo sampattibhavo, so eva loko sampattibhavaloko. Sampattisambhavalokoti sugatūpagaṃ kammaṃ. Tañhi sambhavati etasmā phalanti sambhavo, sampattiyā sambhavo sampattisambhavo, sampattisambhavo eva loko sampattisambhavalokoti.
衰败的“有世间”是指恶趣世间。因为它感得不可意的果报,是一个丑陋的世间,故称为“衰败”;又因为它存在,故也称为“有”;衰败本身就是有,即“衰败有”;此衰败有本身就是世间,即“衰败有世间”。衰败的“生起世间”是指能投生恶趣的业。因为果报从它生起,故称为“生起”;能招感衰败的生起,便是“衰败的生起”;此衰败的生起本身即是世间,即“衰败生起的世间”。“三受”即乐受、苦受、不苦不乐受,这些唯属于世间。“食”意为缘。因为缘能“带来”自己的果,故称为“食”。食有四种:段食、触食、意思食、识食。段食:因需依靠物质而被做成团状,故称“段食”;因能被吞咽,故是“食”;这是以米饭、面饼等为物质基础的食素而得名。它能摄取以食素为第八的色法,故称为“食”。触食:指眼触等六种触,能带来三种受,故称为“食”。意思食:指与意相应的思,并非有情的思,故称“意思食”,犹如“心一境性”的称呼一样;或说与意相应的思,就叫“意思食”,如同“良骏马车”的譬喻;也就是三界中善与不善的思。显示巴利原文
Vipattibhavalokoti apāyaloko. So hi aniṭṭhaphalattā virūpo lokoti vipatti, bhavatīti bhavo, vipatti eva bhavo vipattibhavo, vipattibhavo eva loko vipattibhavaloko. Vipattisambhavalokoti apāyūpagaṃ kammaṃ. Tañhi sambhavati etasmā phalanti sambhavo, vipattiyā sambhavo vipattisambhavo, vipattisambhavo eva loko vipattisambhavalokoti. Tisso vedanāti sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā lokiyā eva. Āhārāti paccayā. Paccayā hi attano phalaṃ āharantīti āhārā. Kabaḷīkārāhāro phassāhāro manosañcetanāhāro viññāṇāhāroti cattāro. Vatthuvasena kabaḷīkattabbattā kabaḷīkāro, ajjhoharitabbattā āhāro, odanakummāsādivatthukāya ojāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sā hi ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharatīti āhāro. Cakkhusamphassādiko chabbidho phasso tisso vedanā āharatīti āhāro. Manaso sañcetanā na sattassāti manosañcetanā yathā cittekaggatā, manasā vā sampayuttā sañcetanā manosañcetanā yathā ājaññaratho, tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā. Sā hi tayo bhave āharatīti āhāro. Viññāṇanti ekūnavīsatibhedaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tañhi paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti āhāro.
“取蕴”:以“取”为所缘活动范围的蕴,即取蕴,此处应知为词中间省略音节而连音。或者,指由“取”所产生的蕴,犹如草火、谷壳火的譬喻。或者,指受“取”摆布的蕴,犹如国王随从人员的譬喻。或者,指以“取”为来源的蕴,犹如花树、果树的譬喻。而“取”则有四种,即欲取、见取、戒禁取、我语取。从含义上说,强烈地执取,就是“取”。取蕴包括五种:色取蕴、受取蕴、想取蕴、行取蕴、识取蕴。“六内处”指:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、意处。“七识住”则如前文所述方法了知。“八世间法”也是如此。再者——利、衰、称、讥、毁、誉、乐、苦,这八种法在世间的运转中,恒常随逐流转,故是世间的法,因此称为“世间法”。无有一有情能从这些法中解脱,即使诸佛也同样会遇到。正如经文所说:显示巴利原文
Upādānakkhandhāti upādānagocarā khandhā upādānakkhandhā, majjhe padalopo daṭṭhabbo. Upādānasambhūtā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā tiṇaggi, thusaggi. Upādānavidheyyā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā rājapuriso. Upādānappabhavā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā puppharukkho, phalarukkho. Upādānāni pana kāmupādānaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ attavādupādānanti cattāri. Atthato pana bhusaṃ ādānanti upādānaṃ. Rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandhoti pañca. Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanānīti cakkhāyatanaṃ, sotāyatanaṃ, ghānāyatanaṃ, jivhāyatanaṃ, kāyāyatanaṃ, manāyatanaṃ. Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo vuttanayā eva. Tathā aṭṭhalokadhammā. Api ca – lābho, alābho, yaso, ayaso, nindā, pasaṃsā, sukhaṃ, dukkhanti ime aṭṭha lokappavattiyā sati anuparivattanadhammakattā lokassa dhammāti lokadhammā. Etehi mutto satto nāma natthi, buddhānampi hontiyeva. Yathāha –
诸比丘,此八种世间法随世间而转,世间亦随此八种世间法而转。哪八种?即利与衰……乃至……苦与乐。诸比丘,此八种世间法随世间而转,世间亦随此八种世间法而转。(《增支部》8.6)显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattati. Katame aṭṭha? Lābho ca alābho ca…pe… sukhañca dukkhañca. Ime kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭha lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca ime aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattatī’’ti (a. ni. 8.6).
其中,“随转”意为跟随、不舍弃,即不从世间退却。“利”:对出家人,指衣服等利养;对在家人,指钱财、谷物等的获得。当此利得不到时,便称“衰”,即非利、无利;但不应认为它必须显现为具体之物才能被了知。“称”:即拥有追随者、眷属。此称得不到时,便是“讥”。“毁”:指说不好的话、诽谤。“誉”:指说赞叹的话。“乐”:指属于欲界的身体快乐与心理快乐。“苦”:对凡夫、入流者和一来者,包括身苦与心苦;对不来者与阿拉汉,则唯有身苦。“众生居”:指众生的住所,即居住之处;而这些正是前文所揭示的那些蕴。在七识住的基础上,加无想有情与非想非非想处,共为九众生居。“十处”:即眼处、色处、耳处、声处、鼻处、香处、舌处、味处、身处、触处,这十种。“十二处”:于十处上,加意处与法处,成十二处。“十八界”:即眼界、色界、眼识界……乃至……意界、法界、意识界,于每一对处与识中各分三种,共有十八界。显示巴利原文
Tattha anuparivattantīti anubandhanti nappajahanti, lokato na nivattantīti attho. Lābhoti pabbajitassa cīvarādi, gahaṭṭhassa dhanadhaññādilābho. Soyeva alabbhamāno lābho alābho na lābho alābhoti vuccati, no ca attābhāvappattito pariññeyyo siyā. Yasoti parivāro. Soyeva alabbhamāno yaso ayaso. Nindāti avaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Pasaṃsāti vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Sukhanti kāmāvacarakāyikacetasikaṃ. Dukkhanti puthujjanasotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ, anāgāmiarahantānaṃ kāyikameva. Sattāvāsāti sattānaṃ āvāsā, vasanaṭṭhānānīti attho. Tāni pana tathā pakāsitā khandhā eva. Sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu asaññasattena ca nevasaññānāsaññāyatanena ca saddhiṃ nava sattāvāsā. Dasāyatanānīti cakkhāyatanaṃ, rūpāyatanaṃ, sotāyatanaṃ, saddāyatanaṃ, ghānāyatanaṃ, gandhāyatanaṃ, jivhāyatanaṃ, rasāyatanaṃ, kāyāyatanaṃ, phoṭṭhabbāyatananti evaṃ dasa. Dvādasāyatanānīti manāyatanadhammāyatanehi saddhiṃ evaṃ dvādasa. Aṭṭhārasa dhātuyoti cakkhudhātu, rūpadhātu, cakkhuviññāṇadhātu…pe… manodhātu, dhammadhātu, manoviññāṇadhātūti ekekasmiṃ tīṇi tīṇi katvā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo.
“同类名称”:指他们具有同一类、同一功德赞叹的名称。“以同类名来称呼”:即用那赞叹同一功德的名称来称呼。“以真实同类名来称呼”:即用不虚妄、同一功德的赞叹名称,也就是用不颠倒的名称来称呼。显示巴利原文
Sadisanāmoti tesaṃ sadisanāmo ekaguṇavaṇṇanāmo. Sadisavhayoti ekaguṇavaṇṇanāmena avhāyano. Saccasadisavhayoti avitathaekaguṇavaṇṇanāmena aviparītena avhāyano.
「已往见」:即已前往、拜会。「已亲近」:即前往后依止、承事。「已极度亲近」:即以恭敬、承事之心而深切依止、承事。显示巴利原文
Āsitoti upasaṅkamito. Upāsitoti upagantvā sevito. Payirupāsitoti bhattivasena atīva sevito.
105 「小树林」:指一片小小的林地。「应依止多果的丛林而住」:即应当往赴种种花果等丰饶具足的丛林,依之而住。「于少智者」:指巴婆利等智慧浅少之人。「大湖」:指如无热恼池等那样的大水聚。显示巴利原文
105.Kubbanakanti parittavanaṃ. Bahupphalaṃ kānanamāvaseyyāti anekaphalādivikatibharitakānanaṃ āgamma vaseyya. Appadasseti bāvarippabhutike parittapaññe. Mahodadhinti anotattādiṃ mahantaṃ udakarāsiṃ.
「Appadassā」:指见解低劣者。「Parittadassā」:指见解极低劣者。「Thokadassā」:指见解比低劣更差、至极低劣者。「Omakadassā」:指见解卑下者。「Lāmakadassā」:指见解不殊胜、非上首者。「Chatukkadassā」:指见解非最上者。「Appamāṇadassa」:指超越了一切限量,照见无量的涅槃之见者。「Aggadassa」:依“于最上者生净信”等语,指照见最上法者。「Seṭṭhadassa」:因彼为正自觉者,乃两足中之最殊胜者,故其见为最殊胜之见。「Viseṭṭhadassa」等四词,为通过前缀加强语义。「Asama」:指无有其等伦者,即不与人等同,此一切知者。「Asamasama」:指彼与无等伦的过去诸佛等齐,故为无等等者。「Appaṭisama」:指全无与自己相似者,即无有等同者。「Appaṭibhāga」:指无有对映,犹如无影像般,即无可映照者。「Appaṭipugga」:指无有可比拟之人,即无匹敌者。显示巴利原文
Appadassāti mandadassino. Parittadassāti atimandadassino. Thokadassāti parittatopi atiparittadassino. Omakadassāti heṭṭhimadassino. Lāmakadassāti appadhānadassino. Chatukkadassāti na uttamadassino. Appamāṇadassanti pamāṇaṃ atikkamitvā appamāṇaṃ nibbānadassaṃ. Aggadassanti ‘‘aggato ve pasannāna’’ntiādinā (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) nayena aggadhammadassaṃ. Seṭṭhadassanti sambuddho dvipadaseṭṭhoti seṭṭhadassaṃ. Viseṭṭhadassantiādīni cattāri upasaggena vaḍḍhitāni. Asamanti na samaṃ asamaṃ sabbaññuṃ. Asamasamanti asamehi atītabuddhehi samaṃ asamasamaṃ. Appaṭisamanti attano sadisavirahitaṃ. Appaṭibhāganti attano paṭibimbavirahitaṃ. Appaṭipuggalanti paṭimallapuggalavirahitaṃ. Devātidevanti visuddhidevānampi atidevaṃ. Abhimaṅgalasammataṭṭhena usabhaṃ. Achambhitaṭṭhena purisasīhaṃ. Niddosaṭṭhena purisanāgaṃ. Uttamaṭṭhena purisājaññaṃ. Aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci paccatthikena paccāmittena akampiye acalaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhanaṭṭhena purisanisabhaṃ. Dhammadesanādhuravahanaṭṭhena purisadhorayhaṃ.
“Mānasakaṃ vā sara”,指经过心意构思而建造的湖,或仅以此命名的湖。而“无热恼池”(Anotattaṃ vā daha)之名是这样来的:日月在南行或北行时,若从山间经过,便会照耀此湖;若径直而行,便不会照到它,因此此湖被称为“无热恼”。这里所说的正是这样一个无热恼池。“Akkhobhaṃ amitodaka”指不可动摇、水量无量的巨大水体。同样地——这是比喻的联结——佛陀、世尊也是如此不可动摇,如牛王一般,无论以何种方式都无法使祂动摇。“Amitateja”指不可限量的智慧光辉。“Pabhinnañāṇa”指通过十力智等各方面而展现出种种分别的智慧。“Vivaṭacakkhu”指具足遍照一切的眼,即一切眼。显示巴利原文
Mānasakaṃ vā saranti manasā cintetvā kataṃ pallaṃ vā nāmameva vā. Anotattaṃ vā dahanti candimasūriyā dakkhiṇena vā uttarena vā gacchantā pabbatantarena taṃ obhāsenti, ujuṃ gacchantā na obhāsenti, tenevassa ‘‘anotatta’’nti saṅkhā udapādi. Evarūpaṃ anotattaṃ vā dahaṃ. Akkhobhaṃ amitodakanti cāletuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ aparimitaṃ udakajalarāsiṃ. Evamevāti opammasaṃsandanaṃ, buddhaṃ bhagavantaṃ akkhobhaṃ āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṭṭhānena cāletuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ. Amitatejanti aparimitañāṇatejaṃ. Pabhinnañāṇanti dasabalañāṇādivasena pabhedagatañāṇaṃ. Vivaṭacakkhunti samantacakkhuṃ.
“Paññāpabhedakusala”:善巧于智慧的分类差别,即按照“什么是慧、了知、简择、审察、遍察……”等方式,对智慧的分辨能善巧了知的人。“Adhigatapaṭisambhida”:已证得四无碍解的人。“Catuvesārajjappatta”:于“你既然宣称自己是正自觉者,那么这些法你并未真正觉了”等四种情形中,全然自信、毫无畏惧,即得四无所畏。“Saddhādhimutta”:心已完全胜解并进入清净果等至的定境。“Setapaccatta”:由于一切烦恼习气已彻底断尽,其身独为清净。“Advayabhāṇi”:由于言辞决断,不说模棱两可的话,即言语无二。“Tādi”:即那样的人;或指面对合意与不合意的境界时都能如如不动的人。“Tathāpaṭiñña”:所言与所证真实相符,即如实说者。“Aparitta”:并非狭小。“Mahanta”:超越三界而成就的广大。显示巴利原文
Paññāpabhedakusalanti ‘‘yā paññā pajānanā vicayo pavicayo’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 16; vibha. 525) nayena paññāya pabhedajānane chekaṃ. Adhigatapaṭisambhidanti paṭiladdhacatupaṭisambhidaṃ. Catuvesārajjappattanti ‘‘sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.150; a. ni. 4.8) nayena vuttesu catūsu ṭhānesu visāradabhāvappattaṃ. Saddhādhimuttanti parisuddhe phalasamāpatticitte adhimuttaṃ, tattha paviṭṭhaṃ. Setapaccattanti vāsanāya vippahīnattā parisuddhaṃ āveṇikaattabhāvaṃ. Advayabhāṇinti paricchinnavacanattā dvivacanavirahitaṃ. Tādinti tādisaṃ, iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu akampanaṃ vā. Tathā paṭiññā assāti tathāpaṭiñño, taṃ. Aparittanti na khuddakaṃ. Mahantanti tedhātuṃ atikkamitvā mahantappattaṃ.
“Gambhīra”:他人难以契入的甚深境界。“Appameyya”:因为无法用天平称量,故为不可测量。“Duppariyogāha”:极难探底,难以彻底通达。“Pahūtaratana”:充满信等众多珍宝。“Sāgarasama”:因同样是众宝之源,故如大海一般。“Chaḷaṅgupekkhāya samannāgata”:圆满具足六根对境时的舍心,即“眼睛看见色法之后,心里既不欢喜也不厌恶”所说的六支舍。“Atula”:无与伦比,无法衡量。“Vipula”:极为广博。“Appameyya”:不可测量。我得以遇见那位“如是的”(taṃ tādisaṃ)世尊,即具足上述一切功德者。此处联结上下文的意思是:于一切宣说者中,他是宣说最上道路的“说道者”(pavadataṃ maggavādī),我遇见了祂。犹如群山中的须弥山,我遇见祂就如“如山中的须弥”(Merumiva nagānaṃ);犹如诸鸟中的金翅鸟……显示巴利原文
Gambhīranti aññesaṃ duppavesaṃ. Appameyyanti atulaṭṭhena appameyyaṃ. Duppariyogāhanti pariyogāhituṃ dukkhappavesaṃ. Pahūtaratananti saddhādiratanehi pahūtaratanaṃ. Sāgarasamanti ratanākarato samuddasadisaṃ. Chaḷaṅgupekkhāya samannāgatanti ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano’’ti (a. ni. 6.1) vuttanayena chaḷaṅgupekkhāya paripuṇṇaṃ. Atulanti tulavirahitaṃ, tulayituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ. Vipulanti atimahantaṃ. Appameyyanti pametuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ. Taṃ tādisanti taṃ bhagavantaṃ tādiguṇasampannaṃ. Pavadataṃ maggavādinanti pavadantānaṃ kathentānaṃ uttamaṃ kathayantaṃ vadantaṃ adhigacchinti sambandho. Merumiva nagānanti pabbatānaṃ antare sineruṃ viya. Garuḷamiva dijānanti pakkhijātānaṃ antare supaṇṇaṃ viya. Sīhamiva migānanti catuppadānamantare sīhaṃ viya. Udadhimiva aṇṇavānanti vitthiṇṇaaṇṇavānaṃ antare samuddaṃ viya adhigacchiṃ. Jinapavaranti buddhuttamaṃ.
106 「Yeme pubbeti」的意思是“这些是之前的那些人”。显示巴利原文
106.Yeme pubbeti ye ime pubbe.
107 「Tamonudāsīno」意指破除黑暗者已安坐。「Bhūripaññāṇa」意指以智慧为幢幡者。「Bhūrimedha」意指智慧广博者。显示巴利原文
107.Tamonudāsīnoti tamonudo āsīno. Bhūripaññāṇoti ñāṇaddhajo. Bhūrimedhasoti vipulapañño.
在注释中,「Pabhaṅkaro」意为作光辉者。「Ālokakaro」意为作光亮、令无黑暗者。「Obhāsakaro」意为作照耀、产生光明,故称照明者。作如灯般光明者,称为「Dīpaṅkaro」。作如灯盏般光明者,称为「Padīpakaro」。作炽热者,称为「Ujjotakaro」。作遍照四方诸隅光辉者,称为「Pajjotakaro」。显示巴利原文
Niddese pabhaṅkaroti tejaṃkaro. Ālokakaroti anandhakārakaro. Obhāsakaroti obhāsaṃ jotiṃ karotīti obhāsakaro. Dīpasadisaṃ ālokaṃ karotīti dīpaṅkaro. Padīpasadisaṃ ālokaṃ karotīti padīpakaro. Ujjotakaroti patāpakaro. Pajjotakaroti disāvidisā patāpakaro.
「Bhūripaññāṇa」指智慧广博者。「Ñāṇapaññāṇa」指以智慧而著称者。「Paññādhaja」指依高举之义,智慧即为其幢,故称慧幢,如同“幢是战车的标志”等说法。「Vibhūtavihārī」指安住于显赫中者。显示巴利原文
Bhūripaññāṇoti puthulañāṇo. Ñāṇapaññāṇoti ñāṇena pākaṭo. Paññādhajoti ussitaṭṭhena paññāva dhajo assāti paññādhajo, dhajo rathassa paññāṇantiādīsu (jā. 2.22.1841; cūḷani. pārāyanānugītigāthāniddesa 107) viya. Vibhūtavihārīti pākaṭavihāro.
108 “现见且无时的”是指:应当亲自见的果,而非须经一段时间才能获得的果。“无灾”是指:远离烦恼等灾患。显示巴利原文
108.Sandiṭṭhikamakālikanti sāmaṃ passitabbaṃ phalaṃ, na ca kālantare pattabbaphalaṃ. Anītikanti kilesādiītivirahitaṃ.
“现见”指:出世间法,已证得者不依他人的信,而以省察智亲自见之,故为现见,这就是现见。就其给予自果而言,无有时间,故为无时,无时即无时的。“来见”指:堪能行此“来,见此法!”的邀请,故为应请来见的,这就是应请来见的。“应导入”指:即使衣服或头着火,也应当不顾,而能导入自心,故为应导入的,这就是应导入的。一切钝根利根等,皆可各自于自身证知:“我已修习道,已证得果,已作证灭”,故为智者各自证知的。显示巴利原文
Sandiṭṭhikanti lokuttaradhammo yena adhigato hoti, tena parasaddhāya gantabbataṃ hitvā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena sayaṃ daṭṭhabboti sandiṭṭhiko, taṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ. Attano phalaṃdānaṃ sandhāya nāssa kāloti akālo, akāloyeva akāliko. Yo ettha ariyamaggadhammo, so attano samanantarameva phalaṃ detīti attho, taṃ akālikaṃ. Ehi passa imaṃ dhammanti evaṃ pavattaṃ ehipassavidhiṃ arahatīti ehipassiko, taṃ ehipassikaṃ. Ādittaṃ celaṃ vā sīsaṃ vā ajjhupekkhitvāpi attano citte upanayaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko, taṃ opaneyyikaṃ. Sabbehipi ugghaṭitaññūādīhi ‘‘bhāvito me maggo, adhigataṃ phalaṃ, sacchikato nirodho’’ti attani attani veditabbanti paccattaṃ veditabbaṃ viññūhi.
109 于是,婆和利以两首偈颂问他:“你从那里来吗?”显示巴利原文
109. Atha naṃ bāvarī āha ‘‘kiṃ nu tamhā’’ti dve gāthā.
“须臾”指少许。“刹那”指不多。“意”指心。“部分”指节分。“日”指一日。显示巴利原文
Muhuttampīti thokampi. Khaṇampīti na bahukampi. Layampīti manampi. Vayampīti koṭṭhāsampi. Addhampīti divasampi.
111-113 接着,宾耆耶为了说明自己从未离开世尊,便说了“我不从那里……”等语。“我不……我以意、以眼得见吗”意为:我以意得见那位佛陀,如同以肉眼得见。“礼敬中度过夜晚”意为:我正于礼敬中度过了夜晚。显示巴利原文
111-113. Tato piṅgiyo bhagavato santikā avippavāsameva dīpento ‘‘nāhaṃ tamhā’’tiādimāha. Nāhaṃ yo me…pe… passāmi naṃ manasā cakkhunāvāti taṃ buddhaṃ maṃsacakkhunā viya manasā passāmi. Namassamāno vivasemi rattinti namassamānova rattiṃ atināmemi.
114 “于彼彼处礼敬”意为:无论佛陀在哪一个方向,我也向彼方礼敬,令心倾向、朝向于彼,以此显示。显示巴利原文
114. Tena teneva natoti yena yena disābhāgena buddho, tena tenevāhampi nato, tanninno tappoṇoti dasseti.
115 “虚弱体力者”指体力微劣之人。又或指虚弱而劣质者,即缺少力量与精进之人。因此“身体不前进”:正因这般虚弱体力,身体不去往佛陀所在的方向。也有读作“na paretī”,义同。“于彼处”指在佛陀近旁。“以思惟而行”指以思惟作旅行。“相应于彼”指与佛陀所在的方向相应,即联结、精勤、追随,以此显示。显示巴利原文
115.Dubbalathāmakassāti appathāmakassa. Atha vā dubbalassa dutthāmakassa ca, balavīriyahīnassāpīti vuttaṃ hoti. Teneva kāyo na paletīti teneva dubbalatthāmakattena kāyo na gacchati, yena buddho, na tena gacchati. ‘‘Na paretī’’tipi pāṭho, so evattho. Tatthāti buddhassa santike. Saṅkappayantāyāti saṅkappagamanena. Tena yuttoti yena buddho, tena yutto payutto anuyuttoti dasseti.
“佛陀所在之方”意为:应当前往亲近佛陀的方向,身体却不向彼方前进。或者,依处所义而使用具格,即佛陀所在之处,于彼处不前进、不去往。“不前行”指不向前走。“不去往”指折返。“不超越”指不前去亲近。显示巴利原文
Yena buddhoti yena disābhāgena buddho upasaṅkamitabbo, tena disābhāgena na paleti. Atha vā bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Yattha buddho tattha na paleti na gacchati. Na vajatīti purato na yāti. Na gacchatīti nivattati. Nātikkamatīti na upasaṅkamati.
116 “卧于泥沼中”:指卧于欲泥之中。“从岛至岛游渡”:指我从一位导师辗转至另一位导师。“时我见正自觉者”:指我怀着如此邪见游走之时,在石塔处亲见佛陀。显示巴利原文
116.Paṅke sayānoti kāmakaddame sayamāno. Dīpā dīpaṃ upallavinti satthārādito satthārādiṃ adhigacchiṃ. Athaddasāsiṃ sambuddhanti sohaṃ evaṃ dudiṭṭhiṃ gahetvā anvāhiṇḍanto atha pāsāṇakacetiye buddhamaddakkhiṃ.
其中,“坐”:指坐着。“卧”:指铺设卧处。“居住”:指安住。“常住”:指恒常居住。显示巴利原文
Tattha semānoti nisajjamāno. Sayamānoti seyyaṃ kappayamāno. Āvasamānoti vasamāno. Parivasamānoti niccaṃ vasamāno.
“游渡”:指向上跃起。“上游渡”:指更向上跃起。“全游渡”:因加上前缀,词义得到加强。“见”:为释义所用的原形词。“见”:意为看见。“观见”:意为仔细观看。“寻见”:意为寻觅。“通达”:意为彻底领悟。显示巴利原文
Pallavinti uggamiṃ. Upallavinti uttariṃ , sampallavinti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Addasanti niddesassa uddesapadaṃ. Addasanti passiṃ. Addakkhinti olokesiṃ. Apassinti esiṃ. Paṭivijjhinti vinivijjhiṃ.
117 此偈结束时,世尊了知宾耆耶与婆和利的根器已然成熟,虽然身在舍卫城,便放出金色光芒。宾耆耶正坐着向婆和利称扬佛陀功德,看见那光芒,心想“这是什么?”抬头观察时,见世尊仿佛立于自己面前,便对婆和利婆罗门说:“佛来了。”婆罗门从座而起,合掌站立。世尊又放光芒,向婆罗门示现自身,了知两人皆堪领受教导,只唤宾耆耶,诵出此偈:“如昔瓦咖离……”显示巴利原文
117. Imissā gāthāya avasāne piṅgiyassa ca bāvarissa ca indriyaparipākaṃ viditvā bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ ṭhitoyeva suvaṇṇobhāsaṃ muñci. Piṅgiyo bāvarissa buddhaguṇe vaṇṇayanto nisinno eva taṃ obhāsaṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ ida’’nti olokento bhagavantaṃ attano purato ṭhitaṃ viya disvā bāvaribrāhmaṇassa ‘‘buddho āgato’’ti ārocesi. Brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā añjaliṃ paggahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavāpi obhāsaṃ pharitvā brāhmaṇassa attānaṃ dassento ubhinnampi sappāyaṃ viditvā piṅgiyameva ālapamāno ‘‘yathā ahū, vakkalī’’ti imaṃ gāthamabhāsi.
其义为:如瓦咖离长老是信胜解者,唯凭信之增上而证得阿拉汉果;又如十六位长老中有一位名跋陀罗优陀者;又如阿拉维乔达摩。同样地,你也应当释放信,由此以信胜解,依“一切行无常”等法理,修习观而超越死域,抵达彼岸涅槃。世尊以阿拉汉果为顶点结束开示。开示结束时,宾耆耶住于阿拉汉果,婆和利住于不来果,婆和利婆罗门的五百弟子成为入流者。显示巴利原文
Tassattho – yathā vakkalitthero saddhādhimutto ahosi, saddhādhureneva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi, yathā ca soḷasannaṃ eko bhadrāvudho nāma, yathā ca āḷavigotamo ca. Evameva tvampi pamuñcassu saddhaṃ, tato saddhāya adhimuccanto ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinā (dha. pa. 277; theragā. 676; paṭi. ma. 1.31; kathā. 753) nayena vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā maccudheyyassa pāraṃ nibbānaṃ gamissasīti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi, desanāpariyosāne piṅgiyo arahatte, bāvarī anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhahi, bāvaribrāhmaṇassa sissā pana pañcasatā sotāpannā ahesuṃ.
其中,“Muñcassū”意为释放。“Pamuñcassū”意为使释放。“Adhimuñcassū”意为对此作胜解。“Okappehī”意为生起深厚的净信。“一切行无常”是指以有已还无之义。“一切行是苦”是指以苦之义。“一切法无我”是指以不可自主之义。显示巴利原文
Tattha muñcassūti mocassu. Pamuñcassūti mocehi. Adhimuñcassūti tattha adhimokkhaṃ karassu. Okappehīti bahumānaṃ uppādehīti. Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena. Sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhāti dukkhamaṭṭhena. Sabbe dhammā anattāti avasavattanaṭṭhena.
118 此时,宾耆耶为表明自己的净信,说出“esa bhiyyo”等语。其中,「具辩才」是指具备辩无碍解。显示巴利原文
118. Idāni piṅgiyo attano pasādaṃ nivedento ‘‘esa bhiyyotiādimāha. Tattha paṭibhānavāti paṭibhānappaṭisambhidāya upeto.
「bhiyyo bhiyyo」意为“更上、更上”。显示巴利原文
Bhiyyo bhiyyoti uparūpari.
119 「Adhideve abhiññāya」意为:了知那超越诸天的法之后。此处的「paropara」指低劣与殊胜,意即他完全了知自己与他人成就超越诸天的一切诸法。「Kaṅkhīnaṃ paṭijānata」是指:那些尚存疑惑,却自称“我们已无疑惑”的人。显示巴利原文
119.Adhideve abhiññāyāti adhidevakare dhamme ñatvā. Paroparanti hīnapaṇītaṃ, attano ca parassa ca adhidevattakaraṃ sabbadhammajātaṃ avedīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kaṅkhīnaṃ paṭijānatanti kaṅkhīnaṃyeva sataṃ ‘‘nikkaṅkhamhā’’ti paṭijānantānaṃ.
在义注中,「pārāyanikapañhānaṃ」指那些向往彼岸的婆罗门所提出的问题。「作结尾」即成为终结者。「作边际」即成为边界者。「作范围、作界限」即成为区分划定者。「作围聚」即成为环绕者。而说「萨毗耶的提问」等语,是为了表明世尊不仅为向往彼岸的婆罗门们的提问作了终结,也为游方者萨毗耶等人的提问作了终结。显示巴利原文
Niddese pārāyanikapañhānanti pārāyanikabrāhmaṇānaṃ pucchānaṃ. Avasānaṃ karotīti antakaro. Koṭiṃ karotīti pariyantakaro. Sīmaṃ mariyādaṃ karotīti paricchedakaro. Nigamaṃ karotīti parivaṭumakaro. Sabhiyapañhānanti na kevalaṃ pārāyanikabrāhmaṇānaṃ pañhānaṃ eva, atha kho sabhiyaparibbājakādīnampi pañhānaṃ antaṃ karotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sabhiyapañhāna’’ntiādimāha.
120 「Asaṃhīra」指不被贪欲等所动摇、不可被带走。「Asaṅkuppa」指不被扰动,即不变易之法。这两句说的都是涅槃。「我将无疑地去」是说,他必定会去往那无余涅槃界。「我于此无疑」即我对此涅槃已没有任何疑惑。「你当知我如此信解之心」一句是这样来的:宾耆耶依照世尊「你也应释放信心」的教导,对自己生起了信,并凭此增上信心而获得解脱,之后为了表明自己的信解,便对世尊说:「你当知我如此信解之心。」此处的内在含义是:「正如你所教导我的那样,你便把我看作具有如此信解之心的人吧。」显示巴利原文
120.Asaṃhīranti rāgādīhi asaṃhāriyaṃ. Asaṅkuppanti asaṅkuppaṃ avipariṇāmadhammaṃ. Dvīhipi padehi nibbānaṃ bhaṇati. Addhā gamissāmīti ekaṃseneva taṃ anupādisesanibbānadhātuṃ gamissāmi. Na mettha kaṅkhāti natthi me ettha nibbāne kaṅkhā. Evaṃ maṃ dhārehi adhimuttacittanti piṅgiyo ‘‘evameva tvampi pamuñcassu saddha’’nti iminā bhagavato ovādena attani saddhaṃ uppādetvā saddhādhureneva ca vimuñcitvā taṃ saddhādhimuttiṃ pakāsento bhagavantaṃ āha – ‘‘evaṃ maṃ dhārehi adhimuttacitta’’nti. Ayañhettha adhippāyo ‘‘yathā maṃ tvaṃ avaca, evameva maṃ adhimuttacittaṃ dhārehī’’ti.
「Na saṃhariyati」指的是:拿起后便无法被取走。「niyogavacana」是确定的话语。「avatthāpanavacana」是决断的话语。在此《彼岸道品》中,那些在中间未予明说的内容,应依循前文已述的方法来理解。其余各处,意思都是很明显的。显示巴利原文
Na saṃhariyatīti gahetvā saṃharituṃ na sakkā. Niyogavacananti yuttavacanaṃ. Avatthāpanavacananti sanniṭṭhānavacanaṃ. Imasmiṃ pārāyanavagge yaṃ antarantarā na vuttaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayena gahetabbaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva.